Hydraulic Filtration & Contamination Control Products. Brochure: FDHB200UK

Transcription

1 Hydraulic Filtration & Contamination Control Products Brochure: FDHB2UK

2 Consistent quality Technical innovation Premier customer service Hydraulic, Lubrication & Coolant Filtration High-performance filtration systems for production machinery in industrial, mobile and military/marine applications. Parkers technical resources provide the correct filtration technologies that conform to your requirements. That s why thousands of manufacturers and equipment users around the world rely on Parker Filtration products and people. Worldwide Sales and Service Parker Filtration s global reputation as a reliable supplier of superior filtration products is the result of a focused and integrated development and manufacturing system. Parker Filtration consolidates quality filtration products, manufactured by process filtration, air and gas filtration and separation, fuel conditioning and filtration, hydraulic and lubrication filtration, fluid power products and fluid condition monitoring equipment into one broad-based range that covers many markets and most applications, as detailed here. Compressed Air & Gas Filtration Complete line of compressed air/gas filtration products; coalescing, particulate and adsorption filters in many applications in many industries. Process & Chemical Fluid Filtration Liquid filtration systems for beverage, chemical and food processing; cosmetic, paint, water treatment; photoprocessing; and micro-chip fabrication. Racor Fuel Conditioning & Filtration Parker air, fuel and oil filtration systems provide quality protection for engines operating in any environment, anywhere in the world. Photo courtesy of GLASBAU HAHN. System Contamination Monitoring On-line dynamic particle analysis, off-line bottle sampling and fluid analysis and measurement of water content polluting the oil in a system. All important and achievable, cost-effective solutions available to equipment manufacturers and end users alike. Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK.

3 Hydraulic Filtration and Contamination Control Products Contents Filtration and Reservoir Products. Low pressure filters ETF Series Tanktop mounted filters (Previously 2) 5 TTF Series Tanktop mounted filters BGT Series Tanktop mounted filters 2 IN-AGB Series In-tank mounted filters 33 Tanktopper Series I, II & III Tanktop mounted with integrated air breather 45 Suction Return Series Suction and return filters 53 Co-polymer and steel reservoir solutions 6 Maxiflow Series Spin-on filters 69 ATZ Series Suction filters Medium pressure filters 5/4/8CN Series 8 45M/45M Eco Series (Previously 45) 89 3 Eco Series (Previously 3) High pressure filters 5P/3P Series 3 P Series (Previously H6 and H) 9 8/28/38P Series 5 7/7 Eco Series (Previously 7) 23 22PD/32PD Series 3 4. Portable filtration systems Guardian 37 Filtration Unit 4 MF Series 47 PVS Series Models 85, 6, 2, 8 and Par-Gel Par-Gel Water Removal Elements 6 6. Filter indicators Indicators Series Reservoir equipment Environmental Air Filters EAB Series 78 ABL Series 8 Glass-Filled Nylon Air Breathers IP65 Rated Filler Breather Filters 86 Filler Breather Filters 88 Screw-On Type Air Breathers 89 Metal Filler Breathers Filler Breather Filters (Metal) 92 Lockable Filler Breathers 94 Air Filters Spin-On Air Breathers 95 Fluid Level Indication Fluid Level Temperature Gauges 2 FS Series 24 CLS46 25 Fluid Power Products Suction Elements 28 Diffusers 29 Inline Filters 2 Drive Couplings 2 Multiclamp 23 Speed Control and Needle Valves 28 Inline Check Valves 22 Single Station Gauge Isolator Valves 22 63mm Dia. Pressure Gauges 222 mm Dia. Pressure Gauges 223 Fluid Condition Monitoring and Flowmeters 8. Fluid condition monitoring LaserCM 225 Universal Bottle Sampler 233 Single Point Sampler 239 System 2 Monitors and Sensors 243 MCM2 249 H2Oil Water in Oil Monitor 253 MS and MS5 Moisture Sensors 257 Oilcheck Monitor 265 Par-Test Transducers & transmitters Asic Performer 273. Flowmeters & monitors LoFlow Oil and Water Flowmeters 278 Easiflow Meters and Flowswitches 279 Dataflow 4 to 2mA and Pulse Output Flow Transmitters 28 Dataflow Compact Inline Flow Transmitter 28 Flowline Oil and Water Calibrated Flowmeters (Brass and Aluminium) 282 Flowline Oil and Water Calibrated Flowmeters (Stainless Steel) 283 Flowline Flowswitches 284 Hydraulic Test Equipment 285 Flow Products For Compressed Air Applications 286. Guide to contamination control Guide to Contamination Control 287 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK.

4 Hydraulic Filtration and Contamination Monitoring Products Important changes to our product ordering information Standard Product Tables and a Product Configurator Parker Filtration has recently undertaken a review of its part numbering with a view to standardising on a common part number for all Filtration products. As a result of the many acquisitions we have made over the past years, it became clear to us that there was a need to standardize on a clear format for our part numbers. The examples below using the BGT Series Ordering Information, are included to explain how the Standard products are presented in the Ordering Information section of the catalogue and also how the new Product Configurator works. Explanation Example. The Standard Products Table We have created a new catalogue ordering code and included in this table are details of these new part numbers. Alongside this we have put the part number that has been superceded from previous catalogues. It is our intention that all items printed in the Standard Products Table will be available from our central warehouse for ex-stock delivery. Example 2. The Product Configurator 2a. As part of our new catalogue ordering code we have introduced an 8-box part number configurator. This Accordingly, in this new catalogue, you will find the new part number system with both a configurator and a supercedes cross reference relating to previous part numbers, issued in earlier editions of our generic catalogues. In the event that the previous reference you use is not shown in this catalogue, could we ask you to please contact our European Product Information Centre. Contact details are on the back of this catalogue. configurator features items, which are marked in bold and are on a shortened delivery time. With this in mind we would ask that when making a selection using the configurator you select those items in bold to ensure the shortest lead-time. 2b. The configurator has been designed to cover not only the various models we offer but also different micron ratings, indicator options and port connections. 2c. Should you find that what you have selected is not available in the configurator, please feel free to call our European Product Information Centre (EPIC) to see if that option can be made available. Contact details are available on the back of this catalogue. Green shaded graphs and ordering information Where pressure drop graphs and ordering information are shown with a green tint, these options are Eco options and environmentally friendly. Example. The Standard Products Table Part number Supercedes Flow Model Element Media Seals Indicator Bypass Ports Included Replacement (l/min) number length rating (μ) settings options elements BGT2QLBPER323 BGTS5-S2 TXWL8C- T B5 M 5 BGT5 Length 2 Plugged.5 Bar (22 Psi) 2"SAE-3 PSI Diffuser type T Q BGT22QLBPER323 BGTS5-S2 TXWL8C-2 T B5 M 5 BGT5 Length 2 2 Plugged.5 Bar (22 Psi) 2"SAE-3 PSI Diffuser type T Q BGT5QLBPER483 BGTS-S3 TXWL2- T B5 M BGT Length 5 Plugged.5 Bar (22 Psi) 2"SAE-3 PSI Diffuser type T Q BGT52QLBPER483 BGTS-S3 TXWL2-2 T B5 M BGT Length 5 2 Plugged.5 Bar (22 Psi) 2"SAE-3 PSI Diffuser type T Q BGT7QBPER483 BGTS2-S3 TXW4- T B5 M 2 BGT2 Length 7 Plugged.5 Bar (22 Psi) 2"SAE-3 PSI Diffuser type T Q BGT72QBPER483 BGTS2-S3 TXW4-2 T B5 M 2 BGT2 Length 7 2 Plugged.5 Bar (22 Psi) 2"SAE-3 PSI Diffuser type T 93785Q Note: Filter assemblies ordered from the product configurator below are on extended lead times. Where possible, please make your selection from the table above. Supercedes TXWL8L- TXWL8L-2 TXWL2- TXWL2-2 TXW4-B TXW4-2B Example 2. The Product Configurator Configurator examples filter including LEIF element Box Box 2 Box 3 Box 4 BGT 5 5QL B Box 5 S Box 6 E Box 7 R48 Box 8 C Configurator examples filter including conventional element Box BGT Box 2 8 Box 3 2Q Box 4 B Box 5 S4 Box 6 E Box 7 3R2 Box 8 4 Box BGT Box 2 Filter type Housing 3-39 l/min 3-5 l/min l/min l/min 4 4- l/min l/min l/min l/min 8 Box 3 Element Disposable element LEIF element Degree of filtration Glass fibre Microglass III (for disposable elements) Cellulose Ecoglass III (for Leif elements) Nom. rating 2μ media 5μ media μ media C 2Q 5Q Q 2QL 5QL QL 2μ media 2Q 2QL Wire mesh Abs. rating 4W Box 4 Seal type Seal material Fluorelastomer Neoprene B V N Box 5 Indicator Pressure gauge, setting.2 bar, Mx Pressure gauge, setting.2 bar, G /8 for dual port head and TSR series Pressure switch 42V,.2 bar setting, NO/NC, Mx Pressure switch 42V,.2 bar setting, NO with G /8 BSP Pressure switch 42V,.2 bar setting, NC with G /8 BSP Pressure switch 25V, NO/NC with G /8 Pressure switch 22V, NO/NC with M No indicator, indicator ports not machined No indicator, indicator port R plugged No indicator, indicator ports L + R plugged Other settings for indicators / gauges on request Note: For all dual head ports for BGTS apply G /8 connection for indicators G G2 S S2 S3 S4 S5 N P P2 on request Box 6 Bypass valve Bypass valve.8 bar B.5 bar E 2. bar for BGT-3 series H Blocked bypass X Other bypass settings on request Box 7 Filter connection Ports 2" SAE BGT-3 3" SAE BGT-4 x2" SAE flanged + 2x /4" SAE flanged for BGT-3 3x /4" SAE flanges + x /2" SAE for BGT-4 R32 R48 R32M 3R2 Box 8 Options Options No diffuser required Diffuser type T with perforated plate area Diffuser type P without perforated plate area Diffuser with integrated hose connection No magnets Dipstick Plugged filling port Diffuser type T and no magnets Diffuser type P and no magnets Diffuser type T, no magnets, plugged filling port Diffuser type P, no magnets, plugged filling port Other combinations 3 4 on request A B C D on request Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks 2 Parker Hannifin (UK) Limited Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK.

5 The Importance of Patented Parker Products to our customers Innovative filter design and patented product protection brings value added benefits to our OEM customers and their end users. Benefits that should help protect a manufacturers aftermarket as well as ensure that vehicle and equipment users specify quality Parker replacement filter elements and accessories and help safeguard warranties. Installing Parker Filtration patented filter assemblies such as the Suction and Return Series and LEIF (Low Environmental Impact Filter) elements can provide the end user and OEM with some positive benefits: LEIF can provide increased OEM spares business. Guaranteed Parker quality with every replacement filter element. Supports OEM end user loyalty to Parker elements. Support aftermarket sales and machinery performance. Parker patented elements promote quality and reliability to end users. 3 Low Pressure Filters

6 Hydraulic Filtration and Contamination Monitoring Products Providing the products and service our customers expect A Global Product Range With this catalogue we offer our customers an easy way to find technical specification and ordering information about Parker hydraulic filtration, fluid contamination monitoring and fluid power products. Products shown in this catalogue have a broad range of applications. Our filter products are particularly designed for hydraulic and lubrication systems as well as in transmissions. The fluid power products are also used in many industries and applications. Typical applications can vary from road sweepers, fork lift trucks, agriculture harvesting machines, grass cutting equipment, lorry mounted cranes, forestry equipment, press brakes, industrial power units, waste management trucks, drilling equipment, marine, military equipment, paper mills, water treatment and filtration systems. For more information about our products send your inquiry to your nearest sales location, see contact information at the back of this catalogue. Important information on product ordering and part numbers Parker filtration has recently undertaken a review of its part numbering with a view to standardising on a common part number for all Filtration products. As a result of the many acquisitions we have made over the past years, it became clear to us that there was a need to standardise on a clear format for our part numbers. Accordingly, in this new catalogue you will find the new part number system with a product configurator and a supercedes reference relating to previous part numbers issued in earlier editions of our generic catalogues. In the event that the previous reference you have is not shown in this catalogue, could we ask you to please contact our Epic Centre, details of which are on the back cover of this catalogue. For additional information and an example explained, turn to page 2. BSP posts offered in this catalogue conform to ISO228. Supply chain management, service and support Parker is addressing operation efficiency by expanding the systematic approach called Lean Manufacturing. Value stream analysis, flow manufacturing, reduced set-ups, manufacturing cell flexibility and fool-proofing systems are all contributing to the continuous improvement in our manufacturing sites. Lean is also expressed in our premier customer service and secondto-none customer partnerships in supply chain management. Engineering and manufacturing excellence Parker Filtration s Filter Division Europe (FDE) manufacturing focus is driven by a number of key elements that affect all areas of the business. People productivity, customer satisfaction, production throughput, quality and lean achievements are the drivers that help the FDE achieve ISO9, QS9, ISO9 and ISO4. Significant investment by our parent Parker Hannifin Corporation continues to give FDE flexible manufacturing systems, automated test equipment and excellent laboratory test facilities. New product development programmes and on-going product improvement initiatives are vital elements in maintaining a product range that meets customer demands for quality, reliability and engineering excellence. R & D resources at the Parker Filtration locations in the UK, Finland and the Netherlands are both complementary and comprehensive. Including, as examples, Multipass Test Installations, fatigue test unit, cleanliness service (water detection, special analysis, particle counting and analysis), 3D workstations, Thermal Cycle Test Chamber, Salt Spray and Humidity chambers. Parker Hannifin (UK) Ltd, herewith declares that Parker Hydraulic Filtration products are intended to be incorporated into machinery covered by Directive 89/392/EEC, as amended and that the following harmonised standards have been applied; EN982, EN292-, EN292-2 We furthermore declare that, machinery incorporating Parker Hydraulic Filtration products, is not allowed to be put into service until the machinery has been found and declared to be in conformity with the provisions of Directive 89/392/EEC and with national implementing legislation. In line with our policy of continuous product improvement, Parker Hannifin (UK) Ltd reserve the right to alter product data and specification without notice. This does not affect your statutory rights. Notes:. Within this catalogue, each product has been allocated an operating temperature and pressure range. 2. The range listed for each filter is dedicated by the materials of construction and the capability of the seals specified. 3. Consideration should also be given to the characteristics of the system fluid when specifying filters for extreme temperature and/or pressure applications. 4. The use of non-parker replacement elements and spares may invalidate your warranty. 4 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK.

7 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters ETF Series MAX 4 I/min - 6 bar 5 Low pressure filters

8 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters ETF Series Features & Benefits Features Co-polymer head Multiple return line ports Quick release cover Optional magnetic pre-filtration In-to-Out filtration Full flow bypass with low hysteresis Optional funnel Advantages Compact profile, lightweight and durable Flexibility related to return line hose(s) arrangement No tools required to release the filter cover Removes ferro particles, even during bypass conditions All captured contamination retains inside the element Reduction of bypass period due to low hysteresis Only a small part of the total flow is bypassing the element Ensures that oil enters the tank under the oil level Benefits Less weight, smaller envelope and cleaner appearance More compact solutions can be realised Easy change of filter element Improved fluid cleanliness levels No recontamination of system during change of elements Improved protection of system Significant reduction of oil foaming Typical Applications Lorry mounted cranes Agricultural equipment Container hook loaders The Parker Filtration ETF Series Low Pressure Filters For tank top mounting installation. The ETF Series applies a reinforced co-polymer head equipped with two return ports and quick release cover. This filter represents an economic solution for hydraulic systems with nominal flows up to 4 l/min. 6 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section

9 Specification Pressure ratings: Max. 6 bar. Assembly: Tank top mounted. Connections: Threads G + G (ISO 228), port B supplied as plugged connection. Filter housing: Glass reinforced co-polymer material. Funnel made from steel. Seal material:. Operating temperature range: -2 to +8 C. Bypass valve: Opening pressure.6 bar. Filter element: Conventional style element with steel end caps. Degree of filtration: Determined by multipass test according to ISO Flow fatigue characteristics: Filter media is supported so that the optimum fatigue life is achieved. Filtration media: Microglass III. Element collapse rating: 8 bar (ISO 294). Indicator options: Setting.2 bar. Options: Magnetic pre-filtration. Fluid compatibility: Suitable for use with mineral and vegetable oils, and some synthetic oils. For other fluids, please consult Parker Filtration. Installation Details Dimensions mm (inches) A B ETF45 ETF6 ETF9 ETF2 ETF4 82 (3.22) 6 (4.7) 5 (5.9) 2 (7.87) 26 (.24) (3.94) 25 (4.92) 77 (6.97) 225 (8.86) 3 (.8) mm (inches) 78.5 (3.9) 3 (.8) B G A Ø 87 (3.42) 7 (2.75) Hole cut out Ø=9 (3.54) Ø 9 (.35) Port D 62 (2.44) Port C Port A 89 (3.5) 7 (4.2) 7 (2.75) Port B 89 (3.5) 7 (4.2) 7 Low pressure filters

10 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters ETF Series Indicator Details Visual pressure indicator G2 mm (inches) 48 Vdc electrical indicator.2 bar S2/S3 mm (inches) 25 VAC electrical indicator.2 bar S4 mm (inches) G /8 3 (.22) Rotating part (.49) 3 (.8) x3 (.8) 4 (.57) 67 (2.64) HEX (2.2) 44 (.73) C3 2 NO NC 74 (2.9) 32 (.26) (.39) G /8K (.39) HEX 27 (.6) G /8K Fixed part Option Description Connection/Voltage Wiring Part number G2 Visual indicator.2 bar FMUG2FBMG2L S2/S3 Electrical indicator.2 bar 42 Vdc max Select either normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) FMUS2FBMG2L or FMUS3FBMG2L Normally open contacts S4 Electrical indicator.2 bar 25 VAC max NC 2 NO 3 C FMUS4FBMG2L Normally closed contacts 8 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section

11 Pressure Drop Curves The recommended level of the initial pressure drop for low pressure filters is max.5 bar. If the medium used has a viscosity different from 32cSt, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows: Δp = (Δp3 x viscosity of medium used) / 32cSt. ETF45 Filter Element Length ETF6 Filter Element Length Q 5Q Q 2Q Q 5Q Q 2Q ETF9 Filter Element Length 3 ETF2 Filter Element Length Q 5Q Q Q Q 5Q 2Q Q ETF4 Filter Element Length 4A Q 5Q Q 2Q Note: All pressure drop curves above show total pressure drop. i.e. they are combined housing and element curves. 9 Low pressure filters

12 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters ETF Series Ordering Information Standard products table Part number ETF2QBP2FG64 ETF22QBP2FG64 ETF3QBP2FG64 ETF32QBP2FG64 Supercedes FK23.Q.BK6.GX6 FK23.Q2.BK6.GX6 FK24.Q.BK6.GX6 FK24.Q2.BK6.GX6 Flow (l/min) Model number ETF6 ETF6 ETF9 ETF9 Element length Length 2 Length 2 Length 3 Length 3 Media rating (μ) 2 2 Seals Indicator Note: Filter assemblies ordered from the product configurator below are on extended lead times. Where possible, please make your selection from the table above. Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Bypass settings.6 Bar (22 Psi).6 Bar (22 Psi).6 Bar (22 Psi).6 Bar (22 Psi) Ports 2xG (one port plugged) 2xG (one port plugged) 2xG (one port plugged) 2xG (one port plugged) Included options Diffuser type P Diffuser type P Diffuser type P Diffuser type P Replacement elements 93795Q 93795Q Q Q Supercedes FC23.Q.XS FC23.Q2.XS FC24.Q.XS FC24.Q2.XS Product configurator Configurator example of an ETF Series filter Box Box 2 Box 3 Box 4 ETF 3 Q B Box 5 S2 Box 6 F Box 7 G6 Box 8 Box ETF Box 2 Housing ETF -45 ETF -6 ETF -9 ETF -2 ETF -4 Filter type A Box 3 Disposable element Degree of filtration Glassfibre media Microglass III (for disposable elements) 2μ media 2Q 5μ media 5Q μ media Q 2μ media 2Q Box 4 Seal material Seal type B Box 5 Indicator Pressure gauge, setting.2 bar, G /8 for dual head ports and TSR series Pressure switch 42V,.2 bar setting, NO with G /8 BSP Pressure switch 42V,.2 bar setting, NC with G /8 BSP Pressure switch 25V,.2 bar setting NO/NC with G /8 No indicator, indicator ports L + R plugged Other settings for indicators / gauges on request G2 S2 S3 S4 P2 on request Box 6 Bypass valve.6 bar Other bypass settings Bypass valve F on request Box 7 Filter connection Ports G"(BSP) (2 ports, one supplied as plugged connection) ßx(c)=2 5.% 6 G6 Box 8 Options Options No diffuser required Diffuser type P without perforated plate area Diffuser with integrated hose connection Magnets Diffuser type P and magnets Other combinations 4 on request E F on request Note: ETF filters are standard supplied without magnets and including diffuser type P Degree of filtration Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size μm [c] ßx(c)= ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)= ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)= % efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) 9.% % % Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard 99.5% 6 2 Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks 99.9% Media code 2Q 5Q Q 2Q Replacement elements Q 93797Q Q Q 93797Q Q 93795Q 93795Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 93798Q 93798Q Q Spare elements Supercedes FC22.Q2.XS FC22.Q5.XS FC22.Q.XS FC22.Q2.XS FC23.Q2.XS FC23.Q5.XS FC23.Q.XS FC23.Q2.XS FC24.Q2.XS FC24.Q5.XS FC24.Q.XS FC24.Q2.XS FC25.Q2.XS FC25.Q5.XS FC25.Q.XS FC25.Q2.XS FC26.Q2.XS FC26.Q5.XS FC26.Q.XS FC26.Q2.XS FC275.Q2.XS FC275.Q5.XS FC275.Q.XS FC275.Q2.XS Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section

13 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters TTF Series MAX 5 I/min - bar AN INNOVATIVE GREEN FILTER FEATURING LEIF LEIF Low pressure filters

14 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters TTF Series Features & Benefits Features bar rated filter Cast aluminium head LEIF elements Magnetic pre-filtration In-to-Out filtration High level of customisation Full flow bypass with low hysteresis Standard or customised funnel Advantages Can be utilised for severe return line applications Compact profile, lightweight and durable Patented element safeguards the use of genuine parts Removes ferro particles, even during bypass conditions All captured contamination retains inside the element Dedicated system-matched solutions can be easily made available Reduction of bypass period due to low hysteresis Only a small part of the total flow is bypassing the element Ensures that oil enters the tank under the oil level Benefits Reduced downtime due to premature filter failures Less weight, smaller envelop and cleaner appearance Guaranteed quality of filtration Contributes to ISO 4 certification Improved fluid cleanliness levels Extended element life time No recontamination of system during change of elements Improved integration of filter in system combined with lower initial system costs Improved protection of system Significant reduction of oil foaming Typical Applications Waste management trucks Mobile cranes Power packs Wheeled loaders Drilling equipment The Parker Filtration TTF Series Return Line Filters TTF tank top mounted return line filters feature pre-filtration by means of a magnet column and a full flow bypass with low hysteresis. Thanks to the In-to-Out filter principle, contaminated oil cannot leak back into the system. TTF filters are available in versions capable of handling flow rates up to 5 l/min. They can operate up to a maximum working pressure of bar. Optional filling port in filter cover, second return port and customised diffusers can be specified. Manifold type filter head (TSR Series) with four return ports is also available. 2 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 2

15 Specification Operation pressure: Max. bar. Assembly: Tank top mounted. Connections: Threaded BSP ports. Flanged ports on request. Manifold filter head type TSR on request available for flows up to 25 l/min. Filter housing: Aluminium head and cover. Seal material:, fluoroelastomer, neoprene. Operation temperature range: -4 to +2 C. Bypass setting Opening pressure.8 /.5 or 2 bar. Other settings on request. Degree of filtration: Determined by multipass test according to ISO Flow fatigue characteristics: Filter media is supported so that the optimum fatigue life is achieved. Filtration media: Microglass III and Ecoglass III for LEIF elements. Also available μm cellulose and 4μm stainless steel mesh. Element collapse rating: bar (ISO 294) Pressure indicator options: Setting.7 or.2 bar. Other settings on request. Visual pressure gauge. Electrical pressure switch. Options: Diffuser with and without (type P) perforated flow area for optimum flow path in the reservoir. Magnetic pack: Standard. Filling port in cover: (optional) Plugged. Filter element: LEIF element with reusable metal element sleeve. Optional conventional style element with steel end caps. The LEIF element is patented and safeguards the use of genuine parts. Note: LEIF element can be used with mineral and HEES type oils. For other fluids consult Parker Filtration. LEIF contributes to ISO 4 quality standards. TTF TSR Free element clearance Ø4 F 8 4x ISO228 G/8 (BSP) A A a B B xØ 64 Ø2± Mounting hole 9b Type -25/2-7/2-23/ / 2-5 Type -6/-9/-2 Min. oil level TTF sealkit: No Ref. No. Description 4 Flange nut 3 Cover 4 Cover-seal 5 Top-spring 6 Insert 7 Insert-seal 8 Element 9a - Indicator 9b -3 Plug Mx -3 Unit-ring Housing 2 Gasket 3 Sleeve 4 Funnel/diffuser 5 O-ring 6 Bypass set 3 Ø5 L Ø65 pitch H Standard length TSR2 Type H F L TSR 2 TSR 2 TSR Dimensions in mm Ports A Ports B G (BSP) G /4 (BSP) SAE6 SAE2 Note: All ports for return flow only Technical specification Max nominal return flow l/min Max working pressure bar Temperature range -3 C to + C Bypass pressure,5 bar LEIF -filtration ratio 2μ/5μ/μ/2μ Seals NBR Options Dipstick Indicator (electrical/visual) Low pressure filters

16 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters TTF Series Specification (cont.) Torqueload filter-cover TTF- 4 Nm max. TTF-2 Nm max. Torqueload filter-tank TTF- 5 Nm max. TTF-2 4 Nm max. H2 Type -25/2-7/2-23/2-3 Type -6/-9/-2 2-4/2-5 Section A-A with funnel ØD ØD d h H h Optional for TTF2 series /2 SAE-3PSI or G2 Optional plugged filling port: G/2 for TTF series G3/4 for TTF2 series R2 R A K 96 R b 5* Top view Note: TTF2-4 and TTF2-5 are standard supplied without magnets Type d=bsp h h D D H H2 b R R R2 K TTF6 23 TTF9 28 TTF2 G /2, G 3 /4, G x 9 TTF25 42 TTF7 35 TTF23 35 TTF3 G /4, G / x TTF4 525 TTF5 575 Dimensions in mm A Torqueload filter-cover TTF- 4 Nm max. TTF-2 Nm max. Torqueload filter-tank TTF- 5 Nm max. TTF-2 4 Nm max. 96 b K ØD d h H h Optional for TTF2 series /2 SAE-3PSI or G2 Optional plugged filling port: G/2 for TTF series G3/4 for TTF2 series R2 A 5* R R without funnel Section A-A A Type TTF6 TTF9 TTF2 TTF25 TTF7 TTF23 TTF3 TTF4 TTF5 Dimensions in mm Top view Note: TTF2-4 and TTF2-5 are standard supplied without magnets d=bsp b D h h H R R R2 K /2, 3 /4, /4, / x x 4 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 2

17 Pressure Drop Curves The recommended level of the initial pressure drop for low pressure filters is max.5 bar. If the medium used has a viscosity different from 32cSt, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows: Δp = (Δp32 x viscosity of medium used) / 32cSt. TSR II-2 Filter Element Length TSR II-2 Filter Element Length Q Q Q Q Q 5Q Q 2Q TSR II-25 Filter Element Length 3 TTF -6 Filter Element Length Q Q.2.5 Q. 2Q Q Q Q Q TTF -9 Filter Element Length 3 TTF -2 Filter Element Length Q Q Q Q Q TTF -25 Filter Element Length 5.5 5Q Q 7.3 2Q Q Q Q.2 2Q Low pressure filters

18 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters TTF Series Pressure Drop Curves (cont.) The recommended level of the initial pressure drop for low pressure filters is max.5 bar. If the medium used has a viscosity different from 32cSt, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows: Δp = (Δp32 x viscosity of medium used) / 32cSt. TTF 2-7 Filter Element Length 6 TTF 2-23 Filter Element Length Q Q.5 Q 7.3 2Q TTF 2-3 Filter Element Length Q Q 5Q 2Q TTF 2-4 Filter Element Length Q Q Q 8.7 Q TTF 2-5 Filter Element Length Q Q.6 Q 2Q Q Q 2Q Q Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 2

19 TTF6 Filter Element Length 2 Cellulose & stainless steel media TTF9 Filter Element Length 3 Cellulose & stainless steel media C 4W C 4W TTF2 Filter Element Length 4 Cellulose & stainless steel media TTF25 Filter Element Length 5 Cellulose & stainless steel media C W C 4W TTF7 Filter Element Length 6 Cellulose & stainless steel media TTF23 Filter Element Length 7 Cellulose & stainless steel media C 4W C 4W TTF3 Filter Element Length 8 Cellulose & stainless steel media C W Low pressure filters

20 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters TTF Series Indicator Options Indicator PS pressure switch Protective cap with dual cable duct for, 7-2, 3mm diameter cable Indicator PS NO/NC pressure switch Protective cover Normally open contacts Amp 6.3x8 terminals Switch 74 Normally closed contacts A/F = COM. 2 = N.C. 3 = N.O A/F 9 9 Mx G /8 (BSP) Ø3.5 Mx Ø28 Elec.rating Thread connection Elec.connection Protection Specifications 42V / 4A Mx AMP 6.3x.8 terminals + protective cap IP65 (with cap) terminals IP FMUSEBMML (Switch) Elec.rating Thread connection Elec.connection Protection Switch type Specifications 42V / 2A G /8 - Mx AMP terminal 6.3x.8 IP65 (terminal IP) NO or NC FMUS2EBMG2L (NO switch) FMUS3EBMG2L (NC switch) Visual indicator.2 bar M: code FMUGEBPML G /8: code FMUG2EBPG2L Ordering Information Standard products table Part number Supercedes TTF3QLBP2EG2 TTF9-G 3 /4 TXWL3- B5 MM TTF32QLBP2EG2 TTF9-G 3 /4 TXWL3-2 B5 MM TTF5QLBP2EG6 TTF25-G TXWL3E- B5 MM TTF52QLBP2EG6 TTF25-G TXWL3E-2 B5 MM TTF6QLBP2EG23 TTF7-G /4 TXWL4- T B5 MM TTF62QLBP2EG23 TTF7-G /4 TXWL4-2 T B5 MM TTF8QLBP2EG243 TTF3-G /2 TXWL5A- T B5 MM TTF82QLBP2EG243 TTF3-G /2 TXWL5A-2 T B5 MM TTFQLBP2HG24A TTF5-G /2 TXWL5C- T B2 MM NMG TTFQLBP2HG24A TTF5-G /2 TXWL5C-2 T B2 MM NMG Flow (l/min) Model number Element length TTF9 Length 3 TTF9 Length 3 TTF25 Length 5 TTF25 Length 5 TTF7 Length 6 TTF7 Length 6 TTF3 Length 8 TTF3 Length 8 TTF5 Length TTF5 Length Media rating (μ) Note: Filter assemblies ordered from the product configurator on the next page are on extended lead times. Where possible, please make your selection from the table above Seals Indicator Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Bypass settings.5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi) 2. Bar (29 Psi) 2. Bar (29 Psi) Ports G 3 /4 G 3 /4 G G G /4 G /4 G /2 G /2 G /2 G /2 Included options None None None None Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Replacement elements Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 93787Q Supercedes TXWL3- TXWL3-2 TXWL3E- TXWL3E-2 TXWL4- TXWL4-2 TXWL5A- TXWL5A-2 TXWL5C- TXWL5C-2 8 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section

21 Ordering Information (cont.) Product configurator Configurator example of a TTF Series filter Box TTF Box 2 9 Box 3 5QL Box 4 V Box 5 S3 Box 6 H Box 7 L24 Box 8 Configurator example of a TSR Series filter Box TSR Box 2 3 Box 3 2QL Box 4 B Box 5 G2 Box 6 E Box 7 2G2 Box 8 3 Box TTF TSR Box 2 Housing TTF -6 TTF -9 TTF -2 TTF -25 TTF 2-7 TTF 2-23 TTF 2-3 TTF 2-4 TTF 2-5 TSR2-2 TSR2-2 TSR2-25 Filter type Box 3 Element media Disposable element LEIF element Cellulose Nom. rating C Degree of filtration Glass fibre Microglass III (for disposable elements) Ecoglass III (for Leif elements) 2μ media 5μ media 2Q 5Q 2QL 5QL μ media Q QL 2μ media 2Q 2QL Wire mesh Abs. rating 4W Box 4 Seal material Fluorelastomer Neoprene Seal type B V N Box 5 Indicator Pressure gauge, setting.2 bar, Mx Pressure gauge, setting.2 bar, G /8 for dual head ports and TSR series Pressure switch 42V,.2 bar setting, NO/NC, Mx Pressure switch 42V,.2 bar setting, NO with G /8 BSP Pressure switch 42V,.2 bar setting, NC with G /8 BSP Pressure switch 25V, NO/NC with G /8 Pressure switch 22V, NO/NC with M No indicator, indicator ports not machined No indicator, indicator port R plugged No indicator, indicator ports L + R plugged Other settings for indicators / gauges on request Note: for all dual head ports and TSR series apply G /8 connection for indicator G G2 S S2 S3 S4 S5 N P P2 on request Box 6 Bypass valve.8 bar.5 bar 2. bar for TTF series Blocked bypass Other bypass settings Bypass valve B E H X on request Box 7 Filter connection Ports G 3 /4" (BSP) (-6/-9/-2) G" (BSP) (-6/-9/-2) G /4" (BSP) (2-7/2-23/2-3/2-4/2-5) G /2"(BSP) (2-7/2-23/2-3/2-4/2-5) /2" SAE-3 PSI (2nd port) + G /2" G2" (2nd port) + G /2" G /4" (BSP) + 2 Ports G" (TSR only) 2xG /2" (BSP) + 2 Ports G" (TSR only) SAE2 + 2 Ports A SAE6 (TSR only) 2xSAE2 + 2 Ports SAE6 (TSR only) G2 G6 G2 G24 L24 G32 G2 2G2 S2 2S2 Box 8 Options Options No diffuser required Diffuser type T with perforated plate area Diffuser type P without perforated plate area Diffuser with integrated hose connection No magnets Dipstick Plugged filling port Diffuser type T and no magnets Diffuser type P and no magnets Diffuser type T, no magnets, plugged filling port Diffuser type P, no magnets, plugged filling port Other combinations 3 4 on request A B C D on request Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. ßx(c)=2 5.% 6 Degree of filtration Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size μm [c] ßx(c)= ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)= ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)= % efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) 9.% % % % % Media code 2Q/2QL 5Q/5QL Q/QL 2Q/2QL Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks Low Pressure Filters

22 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters TTF Series Ordering Information (cont.) TTF -6 Part number spare element TTF -9 Part number spare element TTF -2 Part number spare element TTF -25 Part number spare element TTF -7 Part number spare element TTF -23 Part number spare element TTF -3 Part number spare element TTF -4 Part number spare element TTF -5 Part number spare element TSR2 Part number spare element TSR2 Part number spare element TSR25 Part number spare element Supercedes spare element table TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL3D Q TXWL3E Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL5A Q TXWL5B Q TXWL5C Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL4A Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL3D Q TXWL3E Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL5A Q TXWL5B Q TXWL5C Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL4A Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL3D Q TXWL3D Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL5A Q TXWL5B Q TXWL5C Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL4A Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL3D Q TXWL3E Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL5A Q TXWL5B Q TWXL5C Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL4A Q TTF -6 Part number spare element TTF -9 Part number spare element TTF -2 Part number spare element TTF -25 Part number spare element TTF -7 Part number spare element TTF -23 Part number spare element TTF -3 Part number spare element Supercedes spare element table TXX2--B TXX3--B TXX3D--B TXX3E--B TXX4--B TXX5--B TXX5A--B TXW2-2-B 93775Q TXW3-2-B 93775Q TXW3D-2-B Q TXW3E-2-B Q TXW4-2-B Q TXW5-2-B Q TXW5A-2-B Q TXW2-5-B Q TXW3-5-B Q TXW3D-5-B Q TXW3E-5-B Q TXW4-5-B Q TXW5-5-B Q TXW5A-5-B 93776Q TXW2--B Q TXW3--B Q TXW3D--B Q TXW3E--B Q TXW4--B Q TXW5--B Q TXW5A--B 93778Q TXW2-2-B 93779Q TXW3-2-B 93779Q TXW3D-2-B Q TXW3E-2-B Q TXW4-2-B Q TXW5-2-B Q TXW5A-2-B Q ST2-4-B ST3-4-B ST3D-4-B ST3E-4-B ST4-4-B ST5-4-B ST5A-4-B Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 2

23 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters BGT Series MAX 24 I/min - bar AN INNOVATIVE GREEN FILTER FEATURING LEIF LEIF 2 Low pressure filters

24 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters BGT Series Features & Benefits Features bar rated filter Cast aluminium head LEIF elements Magnetic pre-filtration In-to-Out filtration High level of customisation Full flow bypass with low hysteresis Standard or customised funnel Advantages Can be utilised for severe return line applications Compact profile, lightweight and durable Patented element safeguards the use of genuine parts Removes ferro particles, even during bypass conditions All captured contamination retains inside the element Dedicated system-matched solutions can be easily made available Reduction of bypass period due to low hysteresis Only a small part of the total flow is bypassing the element Ensures that oil enters the tank under the oil level Benefits Reduced downtime due to premature filter failures Less weight, smaller envelop and cleaner appearance Guaranteed quality of filtration Contributes to ISO 4 certification Improved fluid cleanliness levels Extended element life time No recontamination of system during change of elements Improved integration of filter in system combined with lower initial system costs Improved protection of system Significant reduction of oil foaming Typical Applications Mobile cranes Excavators Deck cranes Fire fighting equipment Hydraulic presses Waste balers Industrial power units Fork lift trucks The Parker Filtration BGT Series Tank Mounted Return Line Filters. BGT tanktop mounted return line filters feature pre-filtration by means of a magnet column and a full flow bypass with low hysteresis. Thanks to the In-to-Out filter principle, contaminated oil cannot leak back into the system. BGT Filters are available in versions capable of handling flow rates up to 24 l/min. They can operate with a maximum working pressure of bar. LEIF elements are available for environment-friendly filtration for versions up to 5 l/min. 22 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 3

25 Specification Operating pressure: Max. bar. Assembly: Tank top mounted. Connections: Flanges SAE2, 3. Threaded ports and multiple ports available. Filter housing: Aluminium head and cover. Seal material:, fluoroelastomer, neoprene. Operating temperature range: -4 to +2 C. Bypass setting Opening pressure.8 /.5 or 2 bar. Other settings on request. Degree of filtration: Determined by multipass test according to ISO Flow fatigue characteristics: Filter media is supported so that the optimum fatigue life is achieved. Filtration media: Microglass III and Ecoglass III for LEIF elements. Also available μm Cellulose and 4μm stainless steel mesh. Element collapse rating: bar (ISO 294). Pressure indicator options: Setting.7 or.2 bar. Other settings on request. Visual pressure gauge. Electrical pressure switch. Options: Diffuser with and without (type P) perforated flow area for optimum flow path in the reservoir. Magnetic pack: Standard. Filling port in cover (optional): Plugged G /2. Filter element: LEIF element with reusable metal element sleeve. Conventional style element with steel end caps. The LEIF element is patented and safeguards the use of genuine parts. Note: LEIF element can be used with mineral and HEES type oils. For other fluids consult Parker Filtration. LEIF contributes to ISO 4 quality standards. BGT-3 (LEIF version) Ref. No. Description Nut 2 Washer 3 Cover 4 Cover-seal 5 Top-spring 6 Housing 7 Insert-seal 8 Plug Mx 9 Bonded seal Insert LEIF element 2 Element sleeve 3 Gasket 4 O-ring 5 Bypass set 6 Diffuser BGT-4 (conventional element) Ref. No. Description Nut 2 Washer 3 Cover 4 Cover-seal 5 Top-spring 6 Housing 7 Insert-seal 8 Plug Mx 9 Bonded seal Insert Element seal 2 Element 3 O-ring 4 O-ring 5 Bypass set 6 Diffuser BGT-3 (LEIF version) BGT-4 (conventional element) Low pressure filters

26 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters BGT Series Specification (cont.) BGT-3 with diffuser 5 (*) Plug Mx ISO 228-G /8(BSP)* A M2 *Optional B Filter - tank /4 -SAE-3PSI torque-load 45 Nm F ØG A ØD E C B L A 2 -SAE-3PSI N (Pd) (*) Cover - house torque-load 3 Nm ØU K A M Flange SAE 2 View A-A B P (*) ØQ *Optional /4 -SAE-3PSI H S ØR W Note: Dimension indicated * are applicable for filterhead with multiple ports. Note: *on request. View B-B with diffuser BGT-3 without diffuser ØV Type BGT27* BGT39 BGT5 Dimensions in mm B C D E F G H L K M N(Pd) P Q R S U V W Kg R (*) Plug Mx ISO 228-G /8(BSP)* A M2 *Optional B Filter - tank /4 -SAE-3PSI torque-load 45 Nm F ØG A ØD E C B L A 2 -SAE-3PSI N (Pd) (*) Cover - house torque-load 3 Nm ØA K A M (*) Flange SAE 2 View A-A ØQ P B *Optional /4 -SAE-3PSI H S ØR View B-B without diffuser Note: Dimension indicated * are applicable for filterhead with multiple ports. Note: *on request. Type BGT27* BGT39 BGT5 Dimensions in mm A B C D E F G H L K M N(Pd) P Q R S V W Kg R Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 3

27 BGT-4 with diffuser Plug Mx ØF A ØD B M6 Cover - house torque-load 3 Nm Filter - tank torque-load 45 Nm B E A C N (Pd) ØU H W ØV View B-B with diffuser Type BGT6 BGT8 BGT BGT5 BGT2 B C ØD E ØF H K L M N(Pd) P ØQØR S ØU ØV W Kg R Note: dimensions of BGT-24 identical to BGT-2. Dimensions in mm BGT-4 without diffuser Plug Mx A ØF B E A C ØA H ØD M ØQ A B A S P ØR Cover - house torque-load 3 Nm Filter - tank torque-load 45 Nm B M A B A S P L K Flange SAE 3 View A-A M6 N (Pd) L K Flange SAE 3 View A-A ØQ ØR View B-B without diffuser Type BGT6 BGT8 BGT BGT5 BGT2 25 ØA B C ØD E ØF H K L M N(Pd) P ØQØR S Kg Note: dimensions of BGT-24 identical to BGT-2. Dimensions in mm R Low pressure filters

28 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters BGT Series Specification (cont.) BGT F /4 manifold type - with diffuser Ø32 M4 A Ø3 8.2 R6 Cover - house torque-load 3 Nm 5 Filter - tank torque-load 45 Nm ±2 5 A M8 /2 -SAE-6PSI View A-A R47.5 Tankhole +.5 Ø24.5 Indicator H 9 5 /4 -SAE-6PSI (3x) Ø4 Ø2 Type BGT6L BGT8L BGTL BGT5L BGT2L Dimensions in mm H Ø24 with diffuser Note: dimensions of BGT-24 identical to BGT-2 BGT F /4 manifold type - without diffuser Ø32 M4 A Ø3 8.2 R6 Cover - house torque-load 3 Nm 5 Filter - tank torque-load 45 Nm ±2 5 A M8 /2 -SAE-6PSI View A-A R47.5 Tankhole +.5 Ø24.5 Indicator H 5 without diffuser /4 -SAE-6PSI (3x) Note: dimensions of BGT-24 identical to BGT Ø4 Ø2 Type BGT6L BGT8L BGTL BGT5L BGT2L Dimensions in mm H Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 3

29 9 Indicator Options Indicator PS pressure switch Protective cap with dual cable duct for, 7-2, 3mm diameter cable Indicator PS NO/NC pressure switch Protective cover Normally open contacts 75 Amp 6.3x8 terminals 2 4 Switch 74 Normally closed contacts A/F = COM. 2 = N.C. 3 = N.O A/F 9 Mx G /8 (BSP) Ø3.5 Mx Ø28 Elec.rating Thread connection Elec.connection Protection Visual indicator M code G /8 code Specifications 42V / 4A Mx AMP 6.3x.8 terminals + protective cap IP65 (with cap) terminals IP FMUSEBMML (Switch).2 bar FMUSEBMML FMUS4EBMG2L Elec.rating Thread connection Elec.connection Protection Switch type Specifications 42V / 2A G /8 - Mx AMP terminal 6.3x.8 IP65 (terminal IP) NO or NC FMUS2EBMG2L (NO switch) FMUS3EBMG2L (NC switch) Visual indicator M code G /8 code.2 bar FMUGEBPML FMUG2EBPG2L Pressure Drop Curves The recommended level of the initial pressure drop for low pressure filters is max.5 bar. If the medium used has a viscosity different from 32cSt, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows: Δp = (Δp32 x viscosity of medium used) / 32cSt. Filter housing and element pressure drop based on 32cSt fluid viscosity and.87 density. Empty Housing BGT-3 Series (2 SAE Flange) BGT39 Filter Element Length delta-p Q Q 5.8 Q 2.9 2Q BGT5 Filter Element Length Q Q Q Q Low pressure filters

30 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters BGT Series Pressure Drop Curves (cont.) Empty Housing BGT-4 Series (3 SAE Flange) BGT6 Filter Element Length delta-p Q.8.6 5Q.4 Q Q BGT8 Filter Element Length 4 BGT Filter Element Length Q Q 5.8 Q 2.9 2Q Q.8.6 5Q Q 2.9 2Q BGT5 Filter Element Length 6 BGT2 Filter Element Length Q Q Q.4 Q Q Q 5.8 Q Q BGT24 Filter Element Length Q Q Q Q Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 3

31 Pressure Drop Curves (cellulose and stainless steel media) BGT39 Filter Element Length BGT5 Filter Element Length C 4W C 4W BGT6 Filter Element Length 3 BGT8 Filter Element Length C 4W C 4W BGT Filter Element Length 5 BGT5 Filter Element Length C 4W C 4W BGT2 Filter Element Length C.4 4W Cellulose and stainless steel media Example: BGT2 Filter Element Length 7 - cellulose and stainless steel media 29 Low pressure filters

32 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters BGT Series Ordering Information Standard products table Part number BGT2QLBPER323 BGT22QLBPER323 BGT5QLBPER483 BGT52QLBPER483 BGT7QBPER483 BGT72QBPER483 Supercedes BGTS5-S2 TXWL8C- T B5 M BGTS5-S2 TXWL8C-2 T B5 M BGTS-S3 TXWL2- T B5 M BGTS-S3 TXWL2-2 T B5 M BGTS2-S3 TXW4- T B5 M BGTS2-S3 TXW4-2 T B5 M Flow (l/min) Model number BGT5 BGT5 BGT BGT BGT2 BGT2 Element length Length 2 Length 2 Length 5 Length 5 Length 7 Length 7 Media rating (μ) Note: Filter assemblies ordered from the product configurator below are on extended lead times. Where possible, please make your selection from the table above Seals Indicator Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Bypass settings.5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi) Ports 2"SAE-3 PSI 2"SAE-3 PSI 2"SAE-3 PSI 2"SAE-3 PSI 2"SAE-3 PSI 2"SAE-3 PSI Included options Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Replacement elements Q Q Q Q Q 93785Q Supercedes TXWL8L- TXWL8L-2 TXWL2- TXWL2-2 TXW4-B TXW4-2B Product configurator Configurator examples filter including LEIF element Box BGT Box 2 5 Box 3 5QL Box 4 B Box 5 S Box 6 E Box 7 R48 Box 8 C Configurator examples filter including conventional element Box BGT Box 2 8 Box 3 2Q Box 4 B Box 5 S4 Box 6 E Box 7 3R2 Box 8 4 Box BGT Box 2 Housing 3-39 l/min 3-5 l/min 4-6 l/min 4-8 l/min 4- l/min 4-5 l/min 4-2 l/min 4-24 l/min Filter type Box 3 Element media Disposable element LEIF element Cellulose Nom. rating C Degree of filtration Glass fibre Microglass III (for disposable elements) Ecoglass III (for Leif elements) 2μ media 5μ media 2Q 5Q 2QL 5QL μ media Q QL 2μ media 2Q 2QL Wire mesh Abs. rating 4W Box 4 Seal material Fluorelastomer Neoprene Seal type B V N Box 5 Indicator Pressure gauge, setting.2 bar, Mx Pressure gauge, setting.2 bar, G /8 for dual port head and TSR series Pressure switch 42V,.2 bar setting, NO/NC, Mx Pressure switch 42V,.2 bar setting, NO with G /8 BSP Pressure switch 42V,.2 bar setting, NC with G /8 BSP Pressure switch 25V, NO/NC with G /8 Pressure switch 22V, NO/NC with M No indicator, indicator ports not machined No indicator, indicator port R plugged No indicator, indicator ports L + R plugged Other settings for indicators / gauges on request Note: For all dual head ports for BGTS apply G /8 connection for indicators G G2 S S2 S3 S4 S5 N P P2 on request Box 6 Bypass valve Bypass valve.8 bar.5 bar 2. bar for BGT-3 series Blocked bypass Other bypass settings B E H X on request Box 7 Filter connection Ports 2" SAE BGT-3 3" SAE BGT-4 x2" SAE flanged + 2x /4" SAE flanged for BGT-3 3x /4" SAE flanges + x /2" SAE for BGT-4 Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard R32 R48 R32M 3R2 Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks Box 8 Options Options No diffuser required Diffuser type T with perforated plate area Diffuser type P without perforated plate area Diffuser with integrated hose connection No magnets Dipstick Plugged filling port Diffuser type T and no magnets Diffuser type P and no magnets Diffuser type T, no magnets, plugged filling port Diffuser type P, no magnets, plugged filling port Other combinations 3 4 on request A B C D on request Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 3 Parker Hannifin (UK) Limited Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 3

33 Ordering Information (cont.) ßx(c)=2 5.% 6 Degree of filtration Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size μm [c] ßx(c)= ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)= ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)= % efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) 9.% % % % % Media code 2Q/2QL 5Q/5QL Q/QL 2Q/2QL BGT39 Part number spare element BGT5 Part number spare element BGT6 Part number spare element BGT8 Part number spare element BGT Part number spare element BGT5 Part number spare element Supercedes spare element table TXWL8A Q TXWL8C Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL8A Q TXWL8C Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL8A Q TXWL8C Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL8A Q TXWL8C Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q BGT39 Part number spare element BGT5 Part number spare element BGT6 Part number spare element BGT8 Part number spare element BGT Part number spare element BGT5 Part number spare element BGT2 Part number spare element BGT24 Part number spare element Supercedes spare element table TXX8A--B TXX8C--B TXX--B TXX--B TXX2--B TXX3--B TXX4--B TXWL8A-2-B Q TXWL8C-2-B 93774Q TXWL-2-B 93774Q TXWL-2-B Q TXWL2-2-B Q TXWL3-2-B Q TXW4-2-B Q TXWH4-2-B Q TXWL8A-5-B Q TXWL8C-5-B Q TXWL-5-B Q TXWL-5-B Q TXWL2-5-B Q TXWL3-5-B Q TXW4-5-B Q TXWH4-5-B 93777Q TXWL8A--B Q TXWL8C--B Q TXWL--B Q TXWL--B Q TXWL2--B Q TXWL3--B Q TXW4--B Q TXWH4--B 93777Q TXWL8A-2-B Q TXWL8C-2-B 9378Q TXWL-2-B 9378Q TXWL-2-B 93782Q TXWL2-2-B 93783Q TXWL3-2-B 93784Q TXW4-2-B 93785Q TXWH4-2-B 93786Q ST8A-4-B ST8C-4-B ST-4-B 9378 ST-4-B 9378 ST2-4-B ST3-4-B ST4-4-B Low Pressure Filters

34

35 In-Tank Mounted Return Line Filters IN-AGB Series MAX 24 I/min AN INNOVATIVE GREEN FILTER FEATURING LEIF LEIF 33 Low pressure filters

36 In-Tank Mounted Return Line Filters IN-AGB Series Features & Benefits Features Filter integrated in tank LEIF elements Magnetic pre-filtration In-to-Out filtration High level of customisation Full flow bypass with low hysteresis Standard or customised funnel Advantages Compact low cost solution Filter protected by reservoir Patented element safeguards the use of genuine parts Removes ferro particles, even during bypass conditions All captured contamination retains inside the element Dedicated system-matched solutions can be easily made available Reduction of bypass period due to low hysteresis Only a small part of the total flow is bypassing the element Ensures that oil enters the tank under the oil level Benefits Suitable for extreme heavy duty applications or hazardous environments No tank top parts contributes to improved esthetical design Guaranteed quality of filtration Contributes to ISO 4 certification Improved fluid cleanliness levels Extended element life time No recontamination of system during change of elements Improved integration of filter in system combined with lower initial system costs Improved protection of system Significant reduction of oil foaming Typical Applications Agricultural machines Articulated dump trucks Forestry equipment Wheeled loaders Lubrication systems Excavators The Parker Filtration IN-AGB In-Tank Mounted Return Line Filters. The low-cost, high-performance return line IN-AGB filter features Q3 filter media, a bypass construction with low hysteresis, magnetic pre-filtration and a high dirt-holding capacity. The range is capable of handling flow rates from 3 l/min up to 24 l/min. LEIF elements are available for flow rates up to 5 l/min, meeting the most stringent demands for environmentally-friendly filtration and offering protection against poor quality pirate elements. 34 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 4

37 Specification Assembly: Inside tank. Seal material:, fluoroelastomer, neoprene. Operating temperature range: -4 to +2 C. Bypass setting:.8/.5 and 2. bar. Other settings on request. Degree of filtration: Determined by multipass test according to ISO Flow fatigue characteristics: Filter media is supported so that the optimal fatigue life is achieved. Filtration media: Microglass III, Ecoglass III for LEIF elements Also available μm Cellulose and 4μm stainless steel mesh. Element collapse rating: bar (ISO 294). Options: Diffuser with and without (type P) perforated flow area for optimum flow path in the reservoir. Magnetic pack: Standard. Note: IN-AGB 2-4 and 2-5 are standard supplied without magnets. Filter element: LEIF element with reusable metal element sleeve. Optional conventional style element with steel end caps. The LEIF element is patented and safeguards the use of genuine parts. Note: LEIF element can be used with mineral and HEES type oils. For other fluids consult Parker Filtration. LEIF contributes to ISO 4 quality standards. Insert-AGB LEIF 3 series Ref. No. Description Top-spring 2 Insert 3 Insert-seal 4 LEIF Element 5 Sleeve 6 Gasket 7 O-ring 8 Bypass set 9 Diffuser Series 4 Series Insert-AGB LEIF 4 series Ref. No. Description Top-spring 2 Insert 3 Insert-seal 4 Inner sleeve 5 LEIF -element 6 Outer sleeve 7 O-ring 8 O-ring 9 Bypass set Diffuser Low pressure filters

38 In-Tank Mounted Return Line Filters IN-AGB Series Specification (cont.) A B d p C D y 45 E h x Mounting arrangement H Type A B H h d x y s p C D E F G IN3 IN6 IN9 IN2 IN F without diffuser IN7 IN23 IN3 IN4 IN Ø23 Ø26 Ø2 Ø23±.2 Ø227±.2 IN27 IN39 IN G s.8 Series 2 Series Series Dimensions in mm Ø27± H IN-AGB 3 IN-AGB 4 Ø93 Ø26 5 u v R±. without diffuser Ø23 K ØM ØQ+.-.5 Type ØM ØQ -.5 K L M U V Q R 3.2 min.2 Type IN6 IN8 IN IN5 IN2 IN24 Dimensions in mm H L with diffuser 3 Series 4 Series IN27 IN39 IN5 (3) IN6 IN8 IN IN5 IN2 IN Dimensions in mm 36 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 4

39 Pressure Drop Curves The recommended level of the initial pressure drop for low pressure filters is max.5 bar. If the medium used has a viscosity different from 32cSt, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows: Δp = (Δp32 x viscosity of medium used) / 32cSt. Filter housing and element pressure drop based on 32cSt fluid viscosity and.87 density. IN3 Filter Element Length IN6 Filter Element Length Q 4.5 5Q Q Q Q 5Q Q 2Q IN9 Filter Element Length 3 IN2 Filter Element Length Q Q Q Q 2Q Q.5 Q 7.3 2Q IN25 Filter Element Length 5 IN7 Filter Element Length Q 5Q Q 2Q Q 4.5 5Q.5 Q 7.3 2Q IN23 Filter Element Length 7 IN3 Filter Element Length Q Q Q 2Q Q Q 8.7 Q 5.8 2Q Low pressure filters

40 In-Tank Mounted Return Line Filters IN-AGB Series Pressure Drop Curves (cont.) Q IN4 Filter Element Length 9 IN5 (2) Filter Element Length.8.6 5Q Q Q Q Q Q.2 2Q Q Q 8.7 Q Q IN39 Filter Element Length IN5 (3) Filter Element Length Q Q Q Q IN6 Filter Element Length 3 IN8 Filter Element Length Q Q Q Q IN Filter Element Length Q.8.6 5Q Q 2.9 2Q IN2 Filter Element Length Q Q 5.8 Q Q Q Q 5.8 Q 2.9 2Q IN5 Filter Element Length Q Q 5.8 Q Q IN24 Filter Element Length Q Q Q Q Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 4

41 Pressure Drop Curves (cellulose and stainless steel media) IN3 Filter Element Length IN3 Filter Element Length C.5.4 4W C W IN9 Filter Element Length 3 IN2 Filter Element Length C W C.87 4W IN25 Filter Element Length 5 IN7 Filter Element Length C 4W C 4W IN23 Filter Element Length 7 IN3 Filter Element Length C W C 4W Cellulose and stainless steel media Example: IN3 Filter Element Length 8 - Cellulose and stainless steel media 39 Low pressure filters

42 In-Tank Mounted Return Line Filters IN-AGB Series Pressure Drop Curves (cellulose and stainless steel media) IN39 Filter Element Length IN5 (3) Filter Element Length C 4W C 4W IN6 Filter Element Length 3 IN8 Filter Element Length C 4W C 4W IN Filter Element Length 5 IN5 Filter Element Length C 4W C 4W IN2 Filter Element Length C.4 4W Cellulose and stainless steel media Example: IN3 Filter Element Length 8 - Cellulose and stainless steel media 4 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 4

43 Ordering Information Standard products table Part number IN3QLBNEXXX IN32QLBNEXXX IN5QLBNEXXX IN52QLBNEXXX IN6QLBNEXXX IN62QLBNEXXX IN8QLBNEXXX3 IN82QLBNEXXX3 IN2QLBNEXXX3 IN22QLBNEXXX3 IN5QLBNEXXX3 IN52QLBNEXXX3 IN7QBNEXXX3 IN72QBNEXXX3 Supercedes IN9-TXWL3-B5 IN9-TXWL3-2 B5 IN25-TXWL3E- B5 IN25-TXWL3E-2 B5 IN7-TXWL4- B5 IN7-TXWL4-2 B5 IN3-TXWL5A- T B5 IN3-TXWL5A-2 T B5 IN5-TXWL8C- T B5 IN5-TXWL8C-2 T B5 IN-TXWL2- T B5 IN-TXWL2-2 T B5 IN2-TXW4--B T B5 IN2-TXW4-2-B T B5 Flow (l/min) Model number IN9 IN9 IN25 IN25 IN7 IN7 IN3 IN3 IN5 IN5 IN IN IN2 IN2 Element length Length 3 Length 3 Length 5 Length 5 Length 6 Length 6 Length 8 Length 8 Length 2 Length 2 Length 5 Length 5 Length 7 Length 7 Media rating (μ) Note: Filter assemblies ordered from the product configurator below are on extended lead times. Where possible, please make your selection from the table above Seals Indicator NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA Bypass settings.5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi) Ports NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA Included options None None None None None None Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Diffuser type T Replacement elements Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 93785Q Supercedes TXWL3- TXWL3-2 TXWL3E- TXWL3E-2 TXWL4- TXWL4-2 TXWL5A- TXWL5A-2 TXWL8C- TXWL8C-2 TXWL2- TXWL2-2 TXW4-B TXW4-2B Product configurator Configurator example filter including LEIF element Box IN Box 2 Box 3 5QL Box 4 V Box 5 N Box 6 H Box 7 B Box 8 Configurator example filter including conventional element Box IN Box 2 8 Box 3 2Q Box 4 B Box 5 N Box 6 H Box 7 B Box 8 3 Box IN Box 2 Filter type Housing -3 l/min -6 l/min -9 l/min -2 l/min -25 l/min 2-7 l/min 2-23 l/min 2-3 l/min 2-4 l/min 2-5 l/min 3-39 l/min 3-5 l/min 4-6 l/min 4-8 l/min 4- l/min 4-5 l/min 4-2 l/min 4-24 l/min Box 3 Element media Disposable element LEIF element Box 4 Seal material Fluoroelastomer Neoprene Seal type Cellulose Nom. rating C B V N Degree of filtration Glass fibre Microglass III (for disposable elements) Ecoglass III (for Leif elements) 2μ media 5μ media 2Q 5Q 2QL 5QL Box 5 No indicator Indicator μ media Q QL N 2μ media 2Q 2QL Wire mesh Abs. rating 4W Box 6 Bypass valve Bypass valve.8 bar.5 bar 2. bar for IN-AGB, 2 or 3 series Blocked bypass Other bypass settings B E H X on request Box 7 Ports No ports applicable Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard Filter connection Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks XXX Box 8 Options Options No diffuser required Diffuser type T with perforated plate area Diffuser type P without perforated plate area No magnets Diffuser type T and no magnets Diffuser type P and no magnets A B Note: IN-AGB size 2-4 and 2-5 are standard supplied without magnets Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 4 Low pressure filters

44 In-Tank Mounted Return Line Filters IN-AGB Series Ordering Information (cont.) ßx(c)=2 5.% 6 Degree of filtration Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size μm [c] ßx(c)= ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)= ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)= % efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) 9.% % % % % Media code 2Q/2QL 5Q/5QL Q/QL 2Q/2QL IN3 Part number spare element IN6 Part number spare element IN9 Part number spare element IN2 Part number spare element IN25 Part number spare element IN7 Part number spare element IN23 Part number spare element IN3 Part number spare element IN4 Part number spare element IN5 Part number spare element IN39 Part number spare element IN5 Part number spare element IN6 Part number spare element IN8 Part number spare element IN Part number spare element IN5 Part number spare element Supercedes spare element table TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL3D Q TXWL3E Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL5A Q TXWL5B Q TXWL5C Q TXWL8A Q TXWL8C Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL3D Q TXWL3E Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL5A Q TXWL5B Q TXWL5C Q TXWL8A Q TXWL8C Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL3D Q TXWL3E Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL5A Q TXWL5B Q TWXL5C Q TXWL8A Q TXWL8C Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL3D Q TXWL3E Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL5A Q TXWL5B Q TWXL5C Q TXWL8A Q TXWL8C Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q TXWL Q 42 Parker Hannifin (UK) Limited Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 4

45 Ordering Information (cont.) IN3 Part number spare element IN6 Part number spare element IN9 Part number spare element IN2 Part number spare element IN25 Part number spare element IN7 Part number spare element IN23 Part number spare element IN3 Part number spare element IN39 Part number spare element IN5 (3 series) Part number spare element IN6 Part number spare element IN8 Part number spare element IN Part number spare element IN5 Part number spare element IN2 Part number spare element IN24 Part number spare element Supercedes spare element table TXX--B TXX2--B TXX3--B TXX3D--B TXX3E--B TXX4--B TXX5--B TXX5A--B TXX8A--B TXX8C--B TXX--B TXX--B TXX2--B TXX3--B TXX4--B TXW-2-B Q TXW2-2-B 93775Q TXW3-2-B 93775Q TXW3D-2-B Q TXW3E-2-B Q TXW4-2-B Q TXW5-2-B Q TXW5A-2-B Q TXW8A-2-B Q TXW8C-2-B 93774Q TXW-2-B 93774Q TXW-2-B Q TXW2-2-B Q TXW3-2-B Q TXW4-2-B Q TXWH4-2-B Q TXW-5-B Q TXW2-5-B Q TXW3-5-B Q TXW3D-5-B Q TXW3E-5-B Q TXW4-5-B Q TXW5-5-B Q TXW5A-5-B 93776Q TXW8A-5-B Q TXW8C-5-B Q TXW-5-B Q TXW-5-B Q TXW2-5-B Q TXW3-5-B Q TXW4-5-B Q TXWH4-5-B 93777Q TXW--B Q TXW2--B Q TXW3--B Q TXW3D--B Q TXW3E--B Q TXW4--B Q TXW5--B Q TXW5A--B 93778Q TXW8A--B Q TXW8C--B Q TXW--B Q TXW--B Q TXW2--B Q TXW3--B Q TXW4--B Q TXWH4--B 93777Q TXW-2-B Q TXW2-2-B 93779Q TXW3-2-B 93779Q TXW3D-2-B Q TXW3E-2-B Q TXW4-2-B Q TXW5-2-B Q TXW5A-2-B Q TXW8A-2-B Q TXW8C-2-B 9378Q TXW-2-B 9378Q TXW-2-B 93782Q TXW2-2-B 93783Q TXW3-2-B 93784Q TXW4-2-B 93785Q TXWH4-2-B 93786Q ST-4-B ST2-4-B ST3-4-B ST3D-4-B ST3E-4-B ST4-4-B ST5-4-B ST5A-4-B ST8A-4-B ST8C-4-B ST-4-B 9378 ST-4-B 9378 ST2-4-B ST3-4-B ST Low Pressure Filters

46

47 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters with Integrated Air Breather Tanktopper Series I,II & III MAX 65 I/min - bar AN INNOVATIVE GREEN FILTER FEATURING LEIF LEIF 45 Low Pressure Filters

48 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters Tanktopper Series I,II & III Features & Benefits Features Return line filter with Integrated airbreather Airbreather equipped with high quality labyrinth Second port and dipstick available Airbreather element always supplied with spare return line filter elements LEIF elements Magnetic pre-filtration In-to-Out filtration Full flow bypass with low hysteresis Standard or customised funnel Advantages All in one filter No oil leakage through the airbreather Filler port and level glass function can be integrated in filter Both filter elements can be replaced during the service event Patented element safeguards the use of genuine parts Removes ferro particles, even during bypass conditions All captured contamination retains inside the element Reduction of bypass period due to low hysteresis Only a small part of the total flow is bypassing the element Ensures that oil enters the tank under the oil level Benefits More compact design, cost reduction due to elimination of loose airbreather Improved efficiency of airbreather No oil leakage on the tank / in the environment Significant reduction of reservoir accessories Improved protection of system due to change of airbreather element Guaranteed quality of filtration Contributes to ISO 4 certification Improved fluid cleanliness levels Extended element life time No recontamination of system during change of elements Improved protection of system Significant reduction of oil foaming Typical Applications TPR I Fork lift trucks Power packs Mini excavator TPR II Gully-sucker Power packs Dredging ships TPR III Mobile cranes Refuse vehicles The Parker Filtration Tanktopper Series I, II & III Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters. The TPR Series I, II & III offer a total filtration solution. A -micron Abs. air breather that is integrated into the filter housing, a magnet column for pre-filtration, In-to-Out filtration, a full-flow bypass with low hysteresis, and the high performance Q3 filter element materials are all proven success factors in efficient return-line filtration for flow rates up to 65 l/min. Several pressure gauges and switches can be applied, combined or not with a dipstick. The all-in-one, easy-to-mount cost-saving TPR solution allows for a more compact tank design. 46 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 5

49 Specification Operation pressure: Max. bar. Assembly: Tank top mounted. Connections: Threaded BSP or SAE ports. Second return port available for Tanktopper II and Tanktopper III. Filter housing: Aluminium head and co-polymer cover. Seal material:, Fluoroelastomer. Operation temperature range: -4 to +8 C. Bypass setting: Opening pressure.8,.5 or 2.5 bar for Tanktopper I. Opening pressure.5 bar for Tanktopper II and III. Degree of filtration: Determined by multipass test according to ISO Flow fatigue characteristics: Filter media is supported so that the optimum fatigue life is achieved. Filtration media: Microglass III, Ecoglass III for LEIF element. Also available μm Cellulose and 4μm stainless steel mesh. (TPR) Element collapse rating: bar (ISO 294). Pressure indicator options: Setting.7 or.2 bar. Other settings on request. Visual pressure gauge. Electrical pressure switch. Options: Dipstick, second return port. Magnetic pack: Optional for Tanktopper I. Standard for Tanktopper II and III. Filter element: LEIF element with reusable metal element sleeve. Conventional style element with steel end caps only optional for Tanktopper I. The LEIF element is patented and safeguards the use of genuine parts. Note: LEIF element can be used with mineral and HEES type oils. For other fluids consult Parker Filtration. LEIF contributes to ISO 4 quality standards Tanktopper I F Free element clearance 27 (.6) 2 3 H 77 (3.3) D 33 (.3) 5 (.59) 74±.5 (2.9±.2) Mounting hole 5 (.59) M8 Ø72.9 (2.87) Ø6 (2.4) R6 Min.8mm (3.5) Max oil-level Min.8mm (3.5) -max (2.9) 6 (2.4) NOM.Ø25 (.98) Indicator * For filter with air breather: In order to keep the minimum required distance under all circumstances, it is recommended to position the filter in the middle of the reservoir (2.6) G /8 ISO 228(BSP) G /8 ISO 228(BSP) R 6 (2.4) Ø9 (.35) Max. torque-load filter-tank 8 Nm 47 Pitch 9 Length H F D 69 6 G 3 /4 TPR-4 (6.65) (6.3) (BSP) TPR-8 (.6) (.23) SAE 2 Dimensions in mm 9 Tanktopper I Ref. No. Description Cover 2 Magnet-set 3 Cover-seal 4 Bridge (blue) 5 LEIF Element 6 Sleeve 7 Funnel-assembly 8 Filter-housing 9 Housing-seal Airguide Cover airbreather 2 Breather-element 3 Dipstick assembly Low pressure filters

50 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters Tanktopper Series I,II & III Specification (cont.) Tanktopper II F Free element clearance (3.94) 4 (.59) (D) 4xM8 (Min. mm) (3.94) Max oil level +.5 Mounting hole Second port optional 3.2 (H).3 7 (.67) (Port) G /4 G /2 SAE 2 SAE 24 D (BSP) (BSP) Length H F 4x9 on pitch circle Ø45 Torque-load max. 8 Nm (5.7) ISO 228 G /8 (BSP) 8 7 TPR2-2 (7.2) (6.7) TPR2-2 (.5) (.3) 4 38 TPR 2-25 (5.75) (4.96) Dimensions in mm 82 (3.23) (Min. mm) (3.94) 2 5 (4.3) (D) 4xM Oil level Ø4 (.57) Tanktopper III 44 (.73) 7 (6.73) Top view Free element clearance 35 (5.3) 22 (H) Max oil level Second port optional Mounting hole Ø4 (5.5) ( -max.3 ) For filter with * air breather: In order to keep the minimum required distance under all circumstances, it is recommended to position the filter in the middle of the reservoir Length D H F -G / TPR3-45 (BSP) (6.34) (3.58) -G / TPR3-65 (BSP) (23.62) (2.87) Dimensions in mm Tanktopper II & III Ref. No. Description Hexagon socket bolt M8 2 Air breather cap 3 Air breather filter medium 4 Cover (assembly) 5 Cover seal 6 Bridge 7 Magnet set 8 Element 9 Sleeve Filter house Airguide 2 Tank gasket 3 Funnel 4 Dipstick assembly 4 * 4x on pitch circle 85 ISO 228-G/8 (BSP) Torque-load max. 5 Nm (4.33) (4.33) For filter with air breather: In order to keep the minimum required distance under all circumstances, it is recommended to position the filter in the middle of the reservoir 5 (4.3) (Min. mm) (3.94) 2 3 Oil level -max.4 3 (5.2) Ø4 (.57) Top view 48 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 5

51 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters Tanktopper Series I & II Pressure Drop Curves - Tanktopper I Filter housing and element pressure drop based on 32cSt fluid viscosity and.87 density. Length Length 2 TPR-I-4 Empty Housing TPR-I-8 Empty Housing TPR4 Filter Element Length TPR8 Filter Element Length Q Q Q Q 2Q Q Q 2Q TPR4 Filter Element Length (cellulose and stainless steel) TPR8 Filter Element Length 2 (cellulose and stainless steel) C 4W C 4W Pressure Drop Curves - Tanktopper II Filter housing and element pressure drop based on 32cSt fluid viscosity and.87 density. TPR II-2 TPR II-2/25 Empty Housing (G /4 Ports) Empty Housing (G /2 Ports) Low pressure filters

52 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters Tanktopper Series II & III Pressure Drop Curves - Tanktopper II (cont.) Filter housing and element pressure drop based on 32cSt fluid viscosity and.87 density. TPR2 Filter Element Length 5 TPR2 Filter Element Length Q.6 5Q.5.4 Q.3.2 2Q Q.7.6 5Q.5.4 Q.3.2 2Q TPR25 Filter Element Length Pressure Drop Curves - Tanktopper III Q 5Q 2.9. Q.5 2Q Filter housing and element pressure drop based on 32cSt fluid viscosity and.87 density. TPR III-45/65 Empty Housing /2 BSP TPR45 Filter Element Length TPR65 Filter Element Length Q Q Q Q 2Q Q Q 2Q Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 5

53 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters Tanktopper Series I,II & III Ordering Information Standard products table Part number Supercedes TPRQLBP2EG2E TPR4-G 3 /4 PXWL- B5 MM MA TPR2QLBP2EG2E TPR4-G 3 /4 PXWL-2 B5 MM MA TPR2QLBP2EG2L TPR8-G 3 /4 PXWL2- AB5 MM MA TPR22QLBP2EG2L TPR8-G 3 /4 PXWL2-2 AB5 MM MA TPR5QLBP2E2G2 TPR2-2G /4 PXWL3- B5 MM TPR52QLBP2E2G2 TPR2-2G /4 PXWL3-2 B5 MM TPR7QLBP2E2G24 TPR25-2G /2 PXWL4A- B5 MM TPR72QLBP2E2G24 TPR25-2G /2 PXWL4A-2 B5 MM TPRQLBP2E2G24 TPR65-2G /2 PXWL8- B5 MM TPR2QLBP2E2G24 TPR65-2G /2 PXWL8-2 B5 MM Flow (l/min) Model number Element length TPR4 Length TPR4 Length TPR8 Length 2 TPR8 Length 2 TPR2 Length 5 TPR2 Length 5 TPR25 Length 7 TPR25 Length 7 TPR65 Length TPR65 Length Media rating (μ) Seals Indicator Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Bypass settings.5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi).5 Bar (22 Psi) Ports G 3 /4 G 3 /4 G 3 /4 G 3 /4 Included options Magnets Magnets Aluminium funnel, magnets Aluminium funnel, magnets None None None None None None 2xG /4 2xG /4 2xG /2 2xG /2 2xG /2 2xG /2 Note: Filter assemblies ordered from the product configurator below are on extended lead times. Where possible, please make your selection from the table above. Replacement elements 93792Q 93794Q 93793Q 93795Q Q Q Q Q 93794Q 93797Q Supercedes PXWL- PXWL-2 PXWL2- PXWL2-2 PXWL3- PXWL3-2 PXWL4A- PXWL4A-2 PXWL8- PXWL8-2 Visual indicator Thread connection G /8 FMUG2EBPG2L Specifications Elec.rating 42V / 2A Thread connection G /8 Elec.connection AMP terminal 6.3x.8 Protection IP65 (terminal IP) Switch type NO or NC FMUS2EBMG2L (NO switch) FMUS3EBMG2L (NC switch) Normally open contacts Normally closed contacts Product configurator Configurator example TPR filter Box TPR Box 2 2 Box 3 5QL Box 4 B Box 5 S2 Box 6 I Box 7 G2 Box 8 L Box TPR Box 2 Housing TPR -4 TPR -8 TPR 2-2 TPR 2-2 TPR 2-25 TPR 3-45 TPR 3-65 Filter type Box 3 Element media Disposable element (TPR I only) LEIF element (for all TPR Filters) Cellulose Nom. rating C Degree of filtration Glass fibre Microglass III (for disposable elements) Ecoglass III (for Leif elements) 2μ media 5μ media 2Q 5Q 2QL 5QL μ media Q QL 2μ media 2Q 2QL Wire mesh Abs. rating 4W Box 4 Seal material Fluoroelastomer Box 7 Seal type Filter connection Ports G 3 /4 (BSP) (TPR Series) SAE2 (TPR Series) G /4 (BSP) (TPR 2 Series) 2 x ISO 228-G /4 (BSP) (TPR 2 Series) SAE 2 (TPR 2 Series) 2 x SAE 2 (TPR 2 Series) SAE 24 (TPR 2 Series) 2 x SAE 24 (TPR 2 Series) G /2 (BSP) (TPR 2 and 3 Series) G /2 (BSP) (TPR 2 and 3 Series) B on request G2 S2 G2 2G2 S2 2S2 S24 2S24 G24 2G24 Box 5 Indicator Pressure gauge, setting.2 bar, G /8 Pressure switch 42V,.2 bar setting, NO with G /8 Pressure switch 42V,.2 bar setting, NC with G /8 Pressure switch 25V, NO/NC with G /8 No indicator, indicator ports not machined No indicator, indicator port R plugged No indicator, indicator ports L + R plugged Other settings for indicators / gauges on request Box 8 Options Options Standard Dipstick Aluminium funnel for TPR -8 Magnets for TPR Series Magnets + Dipstick for TPR Series Magnets + Aluminium Diffuser for TPR Series Magnets + Aluminium Diffuser + Dipstick for TPR Series Other combinations 6 J E K L M on request Note: Tanktopper I Series are standard supplied with POM type diffuser. Aluminium funnel is recommended for heavy duty applications, sensitivity for electrostatically charging or high fluid temperatures. Tanktopper II and III Series are always supplied with metal diffuser. G2 S2 S3 S4 on request on request P2 on request Box 6 Bypass valve Bypass valve.8 bar.5 bar 2.5 bar (TPR Series only) Blocked bypass Other bypass settings B E I on request on request Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks 5 Low pressure filters

54 Tanktop Mounted Return Line Filters Tanktopper Series I,II & III Ordering Information (cont.) ßx(c)=2 5.% 6 Degree of filtration Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size μm [c] ßx(c)= ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)= ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)= % efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) 9.% % % % % Media code 2Q/2QL 5Q/5QL Q/QL 2Q/2QL TPR -4 Part number spare element TPR -8 Part number spare element TPR 2-2 Part number spare element TPR 2-2 Part number spare element TPR 2-25 Part number spare element TPR 3-25 Part number spare element TPR 3-45 Part number spare element TPR 3-65 Part number spare element Supercedes spare element table PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL4A Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL4A Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL4A Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL4A Q PXWL Q PXWL Q PXWL Q Supercedes spare element table TPR -4 Part number spare element TPR -8 Part number spare element TPR 3-6 Part number spare element TPR 3-25 Part number spare element TPR 3-45 Part number spare element PXXA PXX2A PXWA Q PXW2A Q PXW Q PXW Q PXW Q PXWA Q PXW2A Q PXW Q PXW Q PXW Q PXWA Q PXW2A Q PXW Q PXW Q PXW Q PXWA Q PXW2A Q PXW Q PXW Q PXW Q PSA PS2A Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 5

55 Tanktop Mounted Suction & Return Line Filters - Types SR & SR2 Suction Return Series MAX 25 I/min - bar AN INNOVATIVE GREEN FILTER FEATURING LEIF LEIF 53 Low pressure filters

56 Tanktop Mounted Suction & Return Line Filters - Types SR & SR2 Suction Return Series Features & Benefits Features Compact design Bypass valve mounted in series with back-pressure valve LEIF elements Strainer located in filter head High level of customisation Full flow bypass with low hysteresis Standard or customised funnel Multiple ports availability Advantages Less space required to apply SR Series Pressurisation of filtered oil for hydrostatic drive ensured during bypass Patented element safeguards the use of genuine parts Strainer filters all bypass fluid by using a systemmatched degree of filtration Dedicated system-matched solutions can be easily made available Reduction of bypass period due to low hysteresis Only a small part of the total flow is bypassing the element Ensures that oil enters the tank under the oil level Flexibility related to suction- and return line hose(s) arrangement Benefits Improved flexibility during system design Lower risk of pump cavition No direct bypass in the tank reducing the additional risk of oil foaming Guaranteed quality of filtration Contributes to ISO 4 certification Improved protection of system Strainer can be inspected and cleaned during service events Improved integration of filter in system combined with lower initial system costs Improved protection of system Significant reduction of oil foaming More compact solutions can be realised The use of manifold blocks can be avoided Easy to integrate with cooler circuit Typical Applications Mobile equipment with both open and closed hydraulic circuits. For exemple: Road sweepers Road rollers Fork lift trucks Loading shovels Telescopic handlers Dump trucks Skid steers Agricultural harvesting machines Mini excavators The Parker Filtration Tank Top Mounted Suction & Return Line Filters. A tank top mounted return filter capable of feeding filtered oil under positive pressure to the suction side of the boost pump, thereby filtering both open and closed loop oil systems through one filter. The Type SR2 uses the patented LEIF elements for environmentally-friendly filtration and offering protection against the use of pirate elements. Several options including integrated suction strainer and dipstick are available. Optional strainer Separator plate with.7 bar bypass Filtered oil at.5 bar pressure Filtered oil return to tank Filtered oil supply to charge pump Return oil Green LEIF filter element, flow direction out to in Valve assembly.5 bar back pressure valve with integrated anti cavitation valve 54 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 6

57 Specification Pressure ratings: Max. bar. Assembly: Tank top mounted filters. Connections: Return port G (to BS 2779). } SR Suction port G 3 /4 (to BS 2779). Return port G /4 (ISO 228) or SAE2: Optional second return port type SR2. } SR2 Suction port G (ISO 228) or SAE6: Standard two suction ports. Seal material: Type SR. Type SR2, Fluoroelastomer. Other seal material on request. Operating temperature range: -3 to + C. Bypass valve system: Main system bypass valve. Type SR.7 bar (2.5 bar optional). Type SR2.7 bar (2.5 bar optional). Degree of filtration: Determined by multipass test according to ISO Flow fatigue characteristics: Filter media designed to optimise fatigue life. Filtration media: Type SR and SR2 Microglass III supported with epoxy coated metal wire. Ecoglass III for LEIF element. See table and 2 on the following page. - High dirt holding capacity. - Low pressure drop. - Extended service life. Element collapse rating: Type SR 2 bar ISO 294. Type SR2 bar ISO 294. Suction line: Back-pressure valve setting.5 bar (nominal). Anti-cavitation: Emergency suction valve fitted as standard. Construction: Type SR Type SR2 Filter Precision pressure Precision pressure Housing: die casting die casting Cover: Precision pressure Glass reinforced nylon die casting (high impact and temperature resistant) Weight:.4Kg 3.3Kg Filter Element with LEIF element with reusable metal element: steel end caps element sleeve. The patented LEIF concept contributes to ISO 4 and can only be applied to mineral oils. For other fluid types consult Parker Filtration. Circuit Application Example Suction Return Filter: Hydraulic Circuit R Open circuit operating hydraulics.7 bar Bypass valve Filter element Suction return filter assembly Power take off Closed loop circuit example Anti cavitation valve Optional strainer.5 bar (Nominal) Back pressure valve S Tank Note: Suction return filter without optional strainer. Note: Suction return filter with optional strainer. 55 Low pressure filters

58 Tanktop Mounted Suction & Return Line Filters - Types SR & SR2 Suction Return Series SR Outlet port (S) G 3 /4 or 3 /4 NPT (optional) F E A B D Element removal distance C H max Inlet port (R) G or NPT (optional) Table Degree of filtration Average filtration ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size (μm(c) Q Q2 ØG Tank hole out-out ØJ I max Alternative position for indicators K square 2 holes Ø7. on A 5. PCD 2 holes Ø. on a 5. PCD Minimum oil level L Plastic port plugs for transit 4.25 SR2 Optional second return port F E A B C 3.2 H max Table 2 Degree of filtration Average filtration ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size (μm(c) Q Q2 ØG Alternative position for indicators Tank hole cutout ØJ max. 25 I max D 4 holes Ø. on a 65 PCD K square Minimum oil level L Optional pressure switch 27 Dimensions mm (inches) Type SR Type SR2 A B C D E F G H I J K L 98 (3.86) 42 (5.59) 55 (2.7) 64 (2.52) Element removal distance for dimension C. 3 (2.2) 38 (4.96) (.7) 8 (3.9) 26 (.2) 45 (.77) 25 (.98) 36 (.42) 73 (2.87) (3.94) 92.8 (3.65) 37 (5.39) (5.7) 44 (7.32) 75 to 76 (2.95 to 2.99) to 3 (3.98 to 4.6) 5 (4.3) 45 (5.7) 72 (2.83) 8 (3.9) 56 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 6

59 Indicator Details Protective cover Normally open contacts Visual indicator Thread connection 2 bar G /8 FMUG5HBMG2L G /8 (BSP) Mx Ø28 24 A/F Normally closed contacts Elec.rating Thread connection Elec.connection Protection Setting Switch type Pressure switch 42V / 2A G /8 AMP terminal 6.3 x.8 IP65 (terminal IP) 2 bar NO or NC FMUS6HBMG2L (NO switch) FMUS7HBMG2L (NC switch) Note: Vacuum indicators visual or electrical are available on request for filter type SR2 only. Principles of Operation Suction Return Series filter This one filter assembly is designed to carry out two specific functions: () Filter system return line oil. (2) Supply filtered oil under positive pressure to the closed loop hydrostatic circuits. Principles of operation () Return oil from both the open and closed circuits* is fed into the Suction Return Series Filter at port R. (2) The filtered oil is maintained at a nominal.5 bar by the unique back pressure valve assembly and fed into the closed loop hydrostatic circuit via port S. (3) Surplus filtered oil is fed back to the tank via the back pressure valve assembly. (4) Emergency suction (anti-cavitation) valve: This valve is fitted as standard to ensure oil is always available to the closed loop system, even on emergency occasions when the return flows do not meet the flow demands of the closed loop circuit. Additional installation guidance notes () Return oil flow should always be greater than the oil flow rate demanded by the closed loop charge pump. (2) Oil level at all times should not fall below valve assembly at the base of the filter bowl. Benefits () Only one filter is required to supply filtered oil to both open and closed loop circuits. (2) Feeding the closed loop circuit with filtered oil at a nominal pressure of.5 bar ensures excellent cold start characteristics, thus reducing the risk of cavitation. (3) Four hole mounting with gasket seal. (4) Microglass III filter element materials ensure; low pressure drop, high dirt holding capacity and extended service life. (5) Type SR2 filter with patented LEIF element, unique drain construction, quick element replacement concept. * CAUTION: Back pressure in pump and motor drain lines should always be kept at a minimum thus protecting shaft seals etc. If case drain oils are to be fed through the return line filter please consult the pump/motor manufactures for details on maximum allowable back pressure. Ensure filter elements are replaced when element condition indicators show that the bypass setting has been reached. Failure to observe the above operation and guidance notes, or use of non genuine Parker specified filter elements could cause damage to the system. System designers should always ensure that adequate cooling capacity is available. 57 Low pressure filters

60 Tanktop Mounted Suction & Return Line Filters - Types SR & SR2 Suction Return Series Pressure Drop Curves (Type SR) The recommended level of the initial pressure drop is approximately bar. If the medium used has a viscosity different from 32cSt, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows: The total Δp = Housing Δph + (Element Δpe x working viscosity/32). SRA Empty Filter Housing SRA Filter Element Length cst cst Q Q Curves are based on 32cSt fluid viscosity and.87 Kg/l density. Pressure Drop Curves (Type SR2) Curves are based on 32cSt fluid viscosity and.87 Kg/l density. SR2 Empty Filter Housing SRL2 Filter Element Length Empty Housing.3.25 Q Q Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 6

61 Ordering Information Standard products table Part number SRA2QBPGG2 SRA22QBPGG2 SRL22QLBPGG2 SRL222QLBPGG2 Supercedes SRA2QNPB SRA2Q2NPB SRL22QNPB SRL22Q2NPB Flow (l/min) Model number SRA SRA SRL2 SRL2 Element length Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Media rating (μ) Note: Filter assemblies ordered from the product configurator below are on extended lead times. Where possible, please make your selection from the table above. 2 2 Seals Indicator Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Bypass settings.7 Bar (25 Psi).7 Bar (25 Psi).7 Bar (25 Psi).7 Bar (25 Psi) Ports return G G G /4 G /4 Ports suction G 3 /4 G 3 /4 2xG /4 2xG /4 Included options None None None None Replacement elements Q Q Q Q Supercedes SRR2QN SRR2Q2N SRE22Q SRE22Q2 Product configurator Configurator example SR filter Box SRL2 Box 2 2 Box 3 5QL Box 4 B Box 5 S2 Box 6 G Box 7 2G2 Box 8 I Box Box 2 Housing Reduced length Standard length Extended length Filter type Model SR Series with conventional element SR2 Series with LEIF element on request 2 on request Box 3 SRA SRL2 Element media Disposable element (for SRA only) LEIF element (for SRL2 only) Degree of filtration Glass fibre Microglass III (for disposable elements) Ecoglass III (for Leif elements) 2μ media 5μ media 2Q 5Q 2QL 5QL Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks μ media Q QL 2μ media 2Q 2QL Box 4 Seal material Fluoroelastomer Seal type B V Box 5 Indicator Pressure gauge, setting 2. bar, G /8 Pressure switch 42V, 2. bar setting, NO with G /8 BSP Pressure switch 42V, 2. bar setting, NC with G /8 BSP Pressure switch 25V, NO/NC with G /8 No indicator, indicator ports not machined No indicator, indicator port R plugged No indicator, indicator ports L + R plugged Vacuum switch / vacuum gauge Other settings for indicators / gauges on request G5 S6 S7 on request N P on request on request on request Box 6 Bypass valve.7 bar 2.5 bar Blocked bypass Other bypass settings Bypass valve G I on request on request Box 7 Filter connection Ports Return port x G + Suction port x G 3 /4 Return port x G /4 + Suction port 2 x G Return port 2 x G /4 + Suction port 2 x G Return port x SAE2 + Suction port 2 x SAE6 Return port 2 x SAE2 + Suction port 2 x SAE6 G2 G2 2G2 S2 2S2 Note SR SR2 SR2 SR2 SR2 Box 8 Options Options None Strainer 2 micron Dipstick Plugged vent port in cover Strainer 2 micron, dipstick and plugged vent port Customized options G 6 H I on request ßx(c)=2 5.% 6 Degree of filtration Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size μm [c] ßx(c)= ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)= ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)= % efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) 9.% % % % % Media code 2Q/2QL 5Q/5QL Q/QL 2Q/2QL Replacement elements Q Q Q Q Q Q Spare elements Supercedes SRR2Q5N SRR2QN SRR2Q2N SRE22Q5 SRE22Q SRE22Q2 Semi standard Standard Standard Semi standard Standard Standard Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 59 Low pressure filters

62

63 Hydraulic Reservoir Solutions Co-Polymer and Steel Reservoirs AN INNOVATIVE GREEN FILTER FEATURING LEIF LEIF 6 Low pressure filters

64 Hydraulic Reservoir Solutions Co-Polymer & Steel Reservoirs Features & Benefits Parker hydraulic tank solutions are applied to a wide variety of markets Hyd. & lube oil filtration Co-polymer tanks Steel tanks Agriculture X X Construction equipment X X Marine X Material handling X Mining X Road building equipment X X Transportation X X Waste management / Environmental control X X An introduction to Parker Hydraulic Reservoir Solutions Parker s experience in designing fluid power equipment will help a system designer to save costs at every stage of hydraulic system development. Original Equipment Manufacturers are continually looking to reduce manufacturing costs and increase operating efficiency and it s here that Parker Hannifin s European Filtration Division offers complete solutions. Beside high quality steel tanks designed and supplied by Parker and featured in this brochure, Parker also designs and supplies revolutionary, lightweight co-polymer reservoirs with tank top mounted or integrated filter and tank air filter options. Co-polymer tank example Both tank types can typically represent a significant contribution to cost savings. Because of the differing features and benefits between the metal and co-polymer tanks, Parker is able to offer customers the most appropriate tank concept to meet their specific requirements. Saving costs with complete Parker Hydraulic Tank Solutions A partnership in supply chain management reduces costs An integration of reservoir functions Reduction of component parts Integrated hydraulic filter and air filter benefits Integrated oil level measurement benefits Standard & customised solutions offered Flexibility related to shape & dimension of each tank Leak-proof connections Patented element for guaranteed quality filtration Steel tank example Typical Applications Unique tank solutions designed to meet customer needs Parker designs and supplies both co-polymer and steel reservoirs. Today Parker steel tank solutions are typically applied to commercial vehicle applications for example waste management and the transportation market. Customers manufacturing hook-arm systems, truck manufacturing or vehicle body builders are further examples of potential customers for a complete steel tank assembly. A more common use of co-polymer tanks can be seen in materials handling equipment, agricultural and construction equipment markets. Typical applications are warehouse trucks, smaller sized wheeled loaders, telescopic handlers, dumpers, mini excavators and agricultural machinery. with the courtesy of Geesink B.V. 62 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 7

65 Specifications Product Architecture Type of tank Filters & accessories customised steel tank On request Steel or co-polymer tank customised co-polymer tank Standard steel tank IN-AGB with integrated breather TPR I and II SR I and II series Tank air filter IP65 compact series ABL series thread mounted EAB series flange mounted ETF TTF SR I and II TPR I and II Steel tank with integrated options Co-polymer tank with integrated filter & air filter Design aspects Co-polymer reservoir Steel reservoir Example of co-polymer tank with top mounted filters and air filters Complicated shapes X Styling of reservoir meets overall styling of vehicle X Weight reduction X Long-term temperatures (depends of Tmin< -3 C or material properties) X Tmax> +2 C High mechanical load on tank (tank contributes to strength of chassis) X All-in-one concept X High level of tank Pressurisation X Suitable for heavy duty equipment X X Design note: All customised tanks are engineered solutions based on detailed analysis of customer requirements and specifications. Detailed knowledge of co-polymer materials, implies that customised materials can be made available to meet specific demands. Depending on technical and commercial requirements, Parker is able to advise each customer individually, about the most suitable and economical reservoir solution, made from co-polymer or steel. 63 Low pressure filters

66 Hydraulic Reservoir Solutions Co-Polymer Reservoirs Features, Benefits & Specifications Where a tailormade tank design is the solution The lightweight co-polymer tank is an all-in-one solution that keeps in mind a customer s specific design requirements. Each tank is unique in terms of shape, dimensions and integrated functions. It is equipped with an integrated tank top mounted return line filter and tank air filter. All filters and air filters are supplied as standard with the patented, environmentally friendly LEIF element. Reliable connections Reliable, leak-proof connections have always been a critical aspect for co-polymer tanks. Parker has developed a technology using metal attachment components. All metal attachment components are moulded in with the co-polymer tank wall, ensuring a reliable, leak-proof connection between the tank and the components that are attached to it. Customised integrated metal attachment Tank also features integrated level measurement Level measurement Oil level indication can be fully integrated into the tank design. This feature eliminates the need for level glasses, which are fragile and an additional potential source of leakage when mounted incorrectly. Parker Filtration has designed high tech sealing solutions for tank top mounted filters. These attached connections (e.g. a suction connection for pumps, drains, vents, or a filler opening) can easily be achieved, as well as providing indications for minimum and maximum oil levels. Metal attachment connections can be made available for hose couplings, a flange attachment or thread attachment. Co-polymer reservoirs are designed to meet the stringent demands of our customers. All relevant aspects are analysed, from material properties and operational conditions to dynamic load and requirements for equipment servicing. Example of customised co-polymer tank 64 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 7

67 Features, Benefits & Specifications Integrated air breather (with optional water removal media) Air flow through air breather labyrinth Return line connection Integrated return line filter type IN-AGB filter has In-to-Out flow direction Pressure gauge or switch Oil level indication Example of a customised tank with an integrated return line filter and air filter The ultimate all-in-one design A more frequent use of co-polymer tanks located on the outside of mobile equipment often results in specific requirements relating to styling. Despite the compact design of Parker tank top mounted filters and air filters, these parts can influence aspects related to styling or cabin accessibility. This concept is ideal for applications where space is at a premium. Parker Filtration s unique all-in-one design, where the return line filter and air filter are both located under one cover is a concept that offers great possibilities related to tank styling. The high quality of the co-polymer material ensures a longterm stability of the chosen colour. This all-in-one design features the IN-AGB type return line and integrated air filter with labyrinth. The labyrinth prevents oil leakage through the air filter. The connection(s) for return line(s) and filler port are integrated in the tank. This avoids having to have hydraulic hoses placed on top of the tank. LEIF elements: Environmentally friendly filtration Re-usable steel element sleeve Patented elements result in guaranteed quality of filtration Saves element disposal costs typically by up to 5% Supports ISO 4 certification Environmentally friendly Parker considers care for the environment as a social obligation. The environmentally friendly LEIF element (Low Environmental Impact Filter) is applied to the return line filters and breathers type ABL and EAB. What makes this element so special is that the metal sleeve can be re-used. As a result, this filter element component no longer ends up in the waste disposal; only the contaminated filter medium is disposed of as chemical waste. With LEIF filter elements, the disposal and processing cost may be reduced by as much as 5%. The LEIF concept safeguards the use of genuine Parker parts. IN-AGB with LEIF element Cost-effective The advantages of this co-polymer concept are obvious: Lightweight Flexibility with respect to tank shapes Characteristics of plastic material can be customised to meet specific requirements Integration of several functions limits the use of individual components The tank can be purchased and supplied as a complete unit 65 Low pressure filters

68 Hydraulic Reservoir Solutions Steel Reservoirs Features, Benefits & Specifications Parker steel reservoirs designed to withstand extreme conditions Standard steel tanks are often specified for commercial vehicle side mounting. Parker steel tanks are built to last in extreme conditions. Extreme weather conditions and heavy duty vehicle movements can be resisted by our tank design. Quality design As with co-polymer tanks, steel tanks offer leak proof connections and are vigorously tested against leakage. Additionally, they are painted with primer and topcoat to ensure maximum protection against corrosion. Suction port(s), covered with anti-vortex plate(s), allow low oil levels giving the operator an increased operational capacity. Before delivery the steel tanks are thoroughly washed inside and ready for system assembly. Diverse tank size options are available With space at a premium in most truck chassis configurations and the need to deal with toolboxes, compressed air reservoirs and other equipment, tank dimensions are always an issue. To meet the specific environment requirements Parker Filtration offers several tank sizes. Steel tanks are fully equipped. Our customers can choose from a wide choice of filter options. Parker considers care for the environment. The environmentally friendly LEIF element is also applied to steel tank solutions. Additionally, Parker steel reservoirs are equipped with an efficient air filter, a level gauge, plugs, a suction kit and mounting brackets. The level gauge can be relocated on the other side of the tank if user visibility is an issue. Technical data steel tanks Material: 2mm steel plate applied for standard reservoirs Suction connection: Suction connections at the back and the bottom of the tank swivel type nominal size 2, 2 /2 and 3. Steel tank with Tanktopper II filter To help reduce dirt build-up, our steel tanks are designed with smooth corners and the upper front part of the tank can be sloped which offers extra benefits: Easier service access for the filter and tank air filter Dirt, water, snow and ice will not adhere to the tank surface next to the breather and filter Air filter: Ref. product selection for types: IP65 ABL EAB Tank top mounted return filter TTF ETF Tanktopper I & II (with integrated air breather) SR series (Suction & Return filters) Support frame and fasteners Included as standard Holes must be drilled into the plate 6 x 28mm for attachment to the frame for standard steel reservoir Steel tank with with customised chassis mounting straps Detailed sectional view of Tanktopper II with integrated air filter 66 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 7

69 Ordering Information Product configurator Configurator examples SR filter Box S Box 2 Box 3 R Box 4 S Box 5 ETF4 Box 6 Q Box 7 E Box Bypass valve Material Steel (standard tank shape) Steel (customised tank design) Co-polymer (customised tank design) S on request on request Box 2 Tank volume Operating volume (L) Gross volume (L) H x D x W x 65 x x 65 x x 65 x x 65 x x 65 x x 65 x Box 3 Box 4 Level glass Location Right hand side Left hand side R L Suction port options Suction port connections Swivel type 42mm (nominal 2") Swivel type 55mm (nominal 2 /2") Swivel type SAE 3" G2" - Female BSP (ISO 228) G2 /2" - Female BSP (ISO 228) G2" - Female ball valve (manual operated) G2 /2" - Female ball valve (manual operated) N W S (standard steel tanks) to be specified to be specified to be specified to be specified Box 5 Filter model Other filter sizes are available Filter Qmax ETF4QBP2FG64 2 ETF4 TTF7QLBP2EG TTF7 TPR7QLBP2E2G24 25 TPR7 SRL22QLBPGG2 25 SRL22 Note: Refer to the relevant product information to compose the required filter configuration. Box 7 Tank air filter Tank air filter type IP65 (breather only) Flange mounted style (compact design) EAB EAB2 Anti splash style filter (threaded connection) ABL ABL2 IP65 E E2 ABL ABL2 Note: filter codes are based on B(c) 2 glass fibre elements other degrees of filtration are standard available. ßx(c)=2 5.% 6 Degree of filtration Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size μm [c] ßx(c)= ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)= ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)= % efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) 9.% % % % % Media code 2Q/2QL 5Q/5QL Q/QL 2Q/2QL Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 67 Low pressure filters

70

71 Spin-on Filters Maxiflow Series MAX 36 I/min - bar 69 Low pressure filters

72 Spin-on Filters Maxiflow Series Features & Benefits Features Integrated indicator High quality paint for canisters Spin-on filters available for suction and return line filtration High quality filter medium Advantages Compact and robust durable construction Long term protection against corrosion Flexible product offering Filter medium suitable for fatigue load due to high frequent flow fluctuation Benefits Easy identification of element status Improved protection of filter medium Standardisation of components Extended element life time Typical Applications Telescopic handlers Refuse vehicles Road sweepers Compactors Industrial power units Grass cutters Press brakes The Parker Filtration Maxiflow Full Flow Filters for Suction or Return. Size and 2 Maxiflow Filters feature two integral red/green indicators incorporated into the head casting design. Fitted as standard, they ensure maximum indicator visibility and early warning of filter condition. Size 3 Maxiflow features one integral indicator. 7 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 8

73 Specification Preferred Series MXA PS Series Maximum working pressure: bar bar Filter head material: Aluminium LM24 Aluminium alloy Filter bowl material: Steel Steel Seal material: Buna (nitrile) Operating temperature range: -3 C to +9 C -3 C to + C Bypass: Return line.5 bar Return line.5 bar Suction line.7 bar Suction line. bar No bypass option No bypass option Fluids: Mineral oils Mineral oils Element media: Microglass III media Cellulose media Installation Details MXA.8/MXA.9*** 2PS/22PS Size 3 MXA.7*** D B A C F G H D B C A F Inlet 7 2 mounting holes L F Ø29 H J 23 (4.84) 7 2 (4.) (2.75) Minimum for element removal Minimum for element removal 2 ØJ 2 mounting holes L 2PS-5 22PS-2 Element removal clearance K H K C D 2 (.79) 2 (.79) Minimum for element removal L Filter selection To select the correct filter use the appropriate pressure drop graphs. For details and an example of how to select the correct filter, see next page. M B Ø54 (2.2) A 2 ports /8 BSPT for optional indicators Circuit symbol Type A B C D F G H J K L M MXA.8 2PS MXA.9 22PS MXA.7 G 3 /4 G /4 G /2 9 (.75) 22 (.86) 3 (.8) 28 (.) 43 (6.93) 47 (5.79) 65 (6.49) 79 (7.4) 28 (8.9) 79 (7.5) 73 (6.8) 87 (7.36) 23 (8.38) 236 (9.29) 24 (8.42) 95 (3.74) 95 (3.74) 33 (5.24) 33 (5.23) 4 (5.5) 97 (3.82) 29 (5.8) 38 (.49) 38 (.49) 5 (.97) 5 (.97) 65 (2.56) 94 (3.7) 93 (3.66) 27 (5.) 3 (5.2) 27 (5.) 88 (3.46) 7 (4.2) 3 (5.2) M8 x.25 x 6 full depth M x.5 72 (2.83) 72 (2.83) 7 Low pressure filters

74 Spin-on Filters Maxiflow Series Pressure Drop Curves The recommended level of the initial pressure drop for low pressure filters is max.5 bar. If the medium used has a viscosity different from 3cSt, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows: Δp = (Δp3 x viscosity of medium used) / 3cSt. Size Maxiflow (MXA.8*** Series) and 2PS Series Filter Housing Filter Element μ Abs 25 Abs Size 2 Maxiflow (MXA.9*** Series) and 22PS Series Filter Housing Filter Element μ Abs 25 Abs Size 3 Maxiflow (MXA.7*** Series) Filter Housing Filter Element μ Abs.4.3 Abs Note: All above data is calculated at 3cSt Rel density Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 8

75 Ordering Information Type Part number Description MXA.8*** & 2PS Return Line Filters MXA PS MXA PSBTVR2B Assembly with bypass & dual visual indicators Assembly with bypass & gauge type visual indicators MAOP Flow Media Replacement Ports (bar) (l/min) rating element 7 micron abs. G 3 /4 MXR855 MXA PS MXA PSCTVR2B 2PSCTE2R2B 2PSCTPR2B Assembly with bypass & dual visual indicators Assembly with bypass & gauge type visual indicators Assembly with bypass & electrical pressure indicator Assembly with bypass & no indicator 7 micron nom. G 3 /4 MX584X4 (x4*) MXA.8*** & 2PS Suction Line Filters MXA PS MXA PS MXA PSCTVS4B MXA PSCTVSX4B Assembly with bypass & dual visual indicators Assembly with bypass & gauge type visual indicator Assembly without bypass, with dual visual indicators Assembly without bypass, with gauge type visual indicator 2 micron nom. G 3 /4 MX584X4 (x4*) MXA.9*** & 22PS Return Line Filters 3 micron MXA MXA Assembly with bypass & dual visual indicators 3 G /4 MXR956 abs. 3 Micron abs. filtration for Off-Line and Bypass System Clean Up Maxiflow 3 micron elements are ideal for off-line or bypass clean up applications. These can be specified for the 9*** and 7*** series return line filters MXA PS PS PS MXA PSBTVR2D 22PSBTE2R2D 22PSBTPR2D Assembly with bypass & dual visual indicators Assembly with bypass & gauge type visual indicators Assembly with bypass & electrical pressure indicator Assembly with bypass & no indicator 8 micron abs. G /4 MXR955 MXA PS PS PS MXA PSCTVR2D 22PSCTE2R2D 22PSCTPR2D Assembly with bypass & dual visual indicators Assembly with bypass & gauge type visual indicator Assembly with bypass & electrical pressure indicator Assembly with bypass & no indicator 8 micron nom. G /4 MX594X4 (x4*) MXA.9*** & 22PS Suction Line Filters MXA PS MXA PS MXA PSCTV2S4D MXA PSCTPSX4D Assembly with bypass & dual visual indicators Assembly with bypass & gauge type visual indicator Assembly without bypass, with visual indicators Assembly without bypass, no indicator 48 micron nom. G /4 MX594X4 (x4*) MXA.7*** Return Line Filters micron MXA MXA Assembly with bypass & dual visual indicators 3 G /2 MXR955 abs. MXA MXA75424 Assembly with bypass & dual visual indicators 35 micron nom. G /2 MX594X4 (x4*) MXA.7*** Suction Line Filters MXA MXA MXA75523 Assembly with bypass & visual indicators Assembly without bypass with visual indicators 8 micron abs. G /2 MXR955 MXA MXA75223 MXA7523 Assembly with bypass & visual indicators Assembly without bypass with visual indicators The Maxiflow Series 7*** can be specified with additional visual or electrical indicators. Please consult Parker Filtration for details 8 micron nom. G /2 MX594X4 (x4*) Note: Elements marked with (x4*) are only available in 4 element packs 73 Low pressure filters

76 Notes 74 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK.

77 Suction Filters ATZ Series MAX 3 I/min 75 Low pressure filters

78 Suction Filters ATZ Series Features & Benefits Features Cast aluminium construction Integrated check valve Magnetic pre-filtration In-to-Out filtration Wide range of vacuum measurement devices Advantages Compact and robust durable construction Filter element can be changed when the filter housing is submerged under the oil in the tank Removes ferro particles, even during bypass conditions All captured contamination retains inside the element Continuous filter condition monitoring Benefits Suitable for heavy duty industrial applications Improved protection of sophisticated pumps Improved fluid cleanliness levels Extended element life time No recontamination of system during change of elements Contributes to just-in-time service Improved protection of pump when pressure measurement device connected with pump drive management Typical Applications Wool untangling machine Hydraulic winch Power packs with sophisticated pumps Drilling blocks The Parker Filtration ATZ Series Submersible Suction Filters. ATZ Filters are located below the tank s oil level, offering maximum protection for the hydraulic system pump. When removing the element, the check valve closes automatically, eliminating any chance of oil leakage. Pre-filtration takes place by means of a magnet column. Thanks to the In-to- Out filter principle, contaminated oil cannot leak back into the system. ATZ Filters are capable of handling flow rates up to 3 l/min. 76 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 9

79 Specification Operating pressure: Vacuum. Assembly: Suction line filter, mounted horizontally against tank side. Connections: Threads G /2 (ISO 228) or flanges 2 SAE-3PSI. Filter housing: Aluminium. Seal material:, neoprene, fluoroelastomer. Operating temperature range: -4 to +2 C. Bypass valve: Blocked. Degree of filtration: Determined by multipass test according to ISO Flow fatigue characteristics: Filter media is supported so that the optimal fatigue life is achieved. Filtration media: Microglass III. μ cellulose and 4μ Stainless Steel. Element collapse rating: bar (ISO 294). Pressure indicator options:.5 bar or.3 bar (vacuum gauge) VAC (LI-, 5A, Lr-2, A) (electrical vacuum switch). 2-28Vdc (Li-, A, Lr-3, A) (electrical vacuum switch). Features: Unique check valve, enabling element change below oil level. Filter element: Element with steel end caps. 2 3 ATZ ATZ-3 Protective cover A/F 8 Mx Ø ATZ-2 & ATZ-3 Ref. No. Description Ref. No. Description Bolt Valve support 2 Seal ring Nut 3 Insert 2 O-ring 4 O-ring 3 Valve 5 Element 4 Ring 6 O-ring 5 Spring 7 Filter-housing 6 Valve-housing 8 Gasket 7 Bonded seal 9 O-ring 8 Indicator 77 Low pressure filters

80 Suction Filters ATZ Series Specification (cont.) ATZ-2 Min element clearance 3 Ø6 4 Ø8.5 Indicator 55 ISO 228 G (BSP) PCD 4 32 Visual Elect ISO 228 G (BSP) Ø25 Tankhole 43 ISO 228 G/2 (BSP) Max torque-load filter-tank 8Nm The Parker suction filters, type ATZ, are designed for submerged operation. The filters contain a unique check valve which automatically closes when the filter insert is removed from the housing, thus enabling element change below oil level. Construction is based on the field proven Parker Filter System. Ø ATZ Min element clearance 3 Indicator PCD 95 ISO 228 G /2 (BSP) 55 Ø Visual 3 Elect 55 ISO 228 G/2 (BSP) Ø7 Tankhole Ø A A 2/2 SAE (3psi) Max torque-load filter-tank 45Nm M Ø63 View A-A 78 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 9

81 Pressure Drop Curves The recommended level of the initial pressure drop for suction filters is.3 bar. If the medium used has a viscosity different from 32cSt, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows: Δp = (Δp32 x viscosity of medium used) / 32cSt. Filter housing and element pressure drop based on 32cSt fluid viscosity and.87 density. ATZ -2 (G /2) Empty Housing ATZ 3 (2 /2 SAE FLANGE) Empty Housing ATZ2 Filter Element Length Q.6 5Q.5.4 Q.3 2Q ATZ3 Filter Element Length 2 (cellulose and stainless steel) C 2W W ATZ2 Filter Element Length (cellulose and stainless steel) C.5 4W.73 2W ATZ3 Filter Element Length Q Q Q Q Low pressure filters

82 Suction Filters ATZ Series Ordering Information Standard products table Part number ATZCBPXG24 ATZQBPXG24 ATZ2CBPXR48 ATZ2QBPXR48 Supercedes ATZ2-G /2 FXX-R- B M ATZ2-G /2 FXW-R- B M ATZ3-S2 /2-C FXX3- B M ATZ3-S2 /2-C FXW3- B M Flow (l/min) Model number ATZ2 ATZ2 ATZ3 ATZ3 Element length Length Length Length 2 Length 2 Media rating (μ) NOM ABS NOM ABS Seals Indicator Note: Filter assemblies ordered from the product configurator below are on extended lead times. Where possible, please make your selection from the table above. Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Bypass settings Blocked Blocked Blocked Blocked Ports G /2" G /2" 2 /2" SAE-3 PSI 2 /2" SAE-3 PSI Included options None None None None Replacement elements Q Q Supercedes FXX-R- FXW-R- FXX3- FXW3- Product configurator Configurator example ATZ filter Box ATZ Box 2 2 Box 3 C Box 4 B Box 5 U2 Box 6 X Box 7 R48 Box 8 Box ATZ Box 2 Housing ATZ -2 ATZ 2-3 Filter type 2 Box 3 Element media Disposable element Cellulose Nom. rating C Degree of filtration Glass fibre Microglass III (for disposable elements) 2μ media 2Q 5μ media 5Q μ media Q 2μ media 2Q Wire mesh Abs. rating 4W Box 4 Seal material Fluoroelastomer Neoprene Seal type B V N Box 5 Indicator Vacuum gauge, setting -.5 bar, Mx Vacuum gauge, setting -.3 bar, Mx Vacuum switch 42V, -.5 bar setting, NO/NC, M x Vacuum switch 42V, -.3 bar setting, NO/NC, M x Vacuum switch 25 VAC, -.5 bar setting, NO/NC, M x Vacuum switch 25 VAC, -.3 bar setting, NO/NC, M x No indicator, indicator ports not machined No indicator, indicator port plugged Other settings for indicators / gauges on request U U2 V V2 V3 V4 N P on request Box 6 Bypass valve Blocked bypass Bypass valve X Box 7 Filter connection Ports G /2" + 2 x G" (For ATZ -2 only) 2 /2" SAE-3 PSI +2 x G /2" (For ATZ 2-3 only) ATZ -2 Part number spare element ATZ 2-3 Part number spare element FXX-R FXX G24 R48 Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) ßx(c)=2 5.% 6 Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks FXW-R Q FXW Q Box 8 Spare element table FXW-R Q FXW Q Options for ATZ -2 x G /2" + x G" plugged Not plugged x G" right plugged 2 x G" left & right plugged Special Options for ATZ 2-3 x SAE6 plugged Not plugged Special Degree of filtration Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size μm [c] ßx(c)= ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)= ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)= % efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) 9.% % % % % FXW-R Q FXW Q Options Media code 2Q 5Q Q 2Q FXW-R Q FXW Q SF-R SF Q R P on request Q on request Visual indicator Setting -.3 bar Thread connection Mx FMUV2VBMML Electrical switch Setting -.3 bar Thread connection Mx Switch type NO or NC Elec.connection AMP terminal 6.3x.8 Protection IP54 (terminal IP) Performance VAC (Li,5A, Lr 2,A max) 2-28 Vdc (Li,A, Lr3,A max) FMUU2VBMML Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 8 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 9

83 Medium Pressure Filters 5/4/8CN Series MAX 6 I/min - 7 bar FEATURING 8 Medium pressure filters

84 Medium Pressure Filters 5/4/8CN Series Features & Benefits Features 56 bar fatigue rating (eight times that of a spin-on) Diametral (side) seal between head and bowl Dust seal 4CN-2 meets automotive HF3 standard 5CN meets automotive HF2 standard Cast aluminium head Reinforced Microglass III replacement elements Complete performance data disclosure Visual, electrical or electronic indicators available Coreless Ecoglass III replacement elements Advantages Ability to provide reliable service under tough cyclic operating conditions Can be utilised in applications where high pressure filters may have been only option Proven reliability in cyclic applications Reduced importance of bowl torque Prevents contamination from building up on bowl/head threads Automotive industry acceptance Low profile, lightweight and durable Multi-layered design produced high capacity and efficiency Wire support reduces pleat bunching, keeps performance consistent All pertinent information is provided in an easy-tocompare format Check element condition at a glance Right style for the application No metal content in element Reduced overall weight of 5% Easy compaction of used elements Conversion kits available: new bowl with permanent core Benefits Reduced downtime due to premature filter failures Reduced costs, better fit for the application No downtime, no leaks Performs with real world service Easier service, eliminates thread galling Satisfies specifications without need for further testing and/or approval Less weight, smaller envelop and cleaner appearance Great performance value Reliable performance throughout element life Reduces downtime, maximises element life No hidden deficiencies Easy selection of proper filtration Optimise element life, prevent bypassing Matches your system electrical connections Environmentally friendly disposal by incineration Lower element replacement costs Lower disposal cost Retrofit coreless design to housings already installed Typical Applications Compressor lube oil Off-line filter loops Machine tools (Automotive standard) Hydrostatic drive charge pumps Mobile equipment Pilot lines for servo controls Oil patch drilling equipment Injection moulding The Parker Filtration 5/4/8CN Series Medium Pressure Filters. This partial list of applications for Parker CN Series Filters has a common factor, the need for an economical, medium pressure range filter with excellent fatigue pressure ratings. Prior to the availability of the CN filter, applications such as those listed were restricted by limitations of a spin-on can, or forced into the higher-cost range of high pressure filters. The CN Series fills this gap and is now available with environmentally friendly Ecoglass III elements. 82 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section

85 Specification Pressure ratings: Maximum allowable operating pressure: Rated fatigue pressure: 7 bar 56 bar Connections: Several threaded port options available, flange faced ports available on 8CN. Connection style Model 5CN 4CN 8CN BSPF(G), 3 /4 /4, /2 /2, 2 SAE 2, 6 6, 24 24, 32 ISO 649 M27 M33 M42, M48 Metric 3-M 2 Filter housing: Head material aluminium. Bowl material hard anodized aluminium. Seal material: or fluoroelastomer. Operating temperature range: -2 C to + C. Bypass valve & indicator settings: Table following gives bypass valve and corresponding indicator setting. Bypass Indicator.7 bar.2 bar 3.5 bar 2.5 bar Filtration element: Degree of filtration: Determined by Multipass-test according to ISO 6889, see Box 3 in the product configurator. Flow fatigue characteristics: Filter media is supported so that the optimal fatigue life is achieved (ISO 3724). Microglass III (available by request) Supported with epoxy coated metal wire mesh, end cap material reinforced composite and metal inner core. Collapse rating 2 bar (ISO 294). Ecoglass III Supported with plastic net, end cap material reinforced composite. No metal parts. Collapse rating bar (ISO 294). Filter element can only be used together with bowl including Eco-adaptor. Note: Ecoglass III contributes to ISO 4 quality. Indicator options: - visual M3. - electrical T. - electronic F(PNP). - electronic F2(NPN). For indicator details see catalogue section 6. Weights (kg): Model Length Length 2 5CN..6 4CN CN Fluid compatibility: Suitable for use with mineral and vegetable oils, and some synthetic oils. For other fluids, please consult Parker Filtration. 5CN H I N 4CN H J N 8CN H J N F G L K F G L K G L K F J I I M D M D M D C C C Length A Length 2 B P Length A Length 2 B P Length A Length 2 B P Element removal clearance 65mm (2.5 ) 25.4 (.) Nominal Hex E SAE - 4 Drain plug Element removal clearance 65mm (2.5 ) 25.4 (.) Nominal Hex E SAE - 4 Drain plug Element removal clearance 65mm (2.5 ) 25.4 (.) Nominal Hex E SAE - 4 Drain plug Dimensions in mm (inch) Model A B C D E F G H I J K L M* N P 5CN 4CN 8CN 56.6 (6.7) 7.8 (6.73) 28.9 (.6) 25.7 (9.87) (.33) 4.6 (5.8) 46.5 (.83) 62. (2.44) 77.7 (3.6) 25.4 (.9) 32.6 (.28) 49.5 (.95) 7. (2.8) 7.2 (4.22) 24.8 (4.9) 85.9 (3.38) 27. (5.) 58.7 (6.25) 73.2 (2.88). (4.37) 82.6 (3.25) 82.6 (3.25) 2.9 (4.8) 5.4 (5.96) 38. (.5) 62. (2.44).6 (4.) 22.9 (.9) 3.8 (.25) 4. (.62) 42.9 (.69) 58.8 (2.32) 79.4 (3.2) 36.6 (.44) 6.2 (2.37) 4.3 (.63) xM6-.x7.9 deep 4xM8-.25x3 deep 4xM8-.25x6 deep 2-27 Nm Nm 8-95 Nm Note: add 45mm for T and F indicators 83 Medium pressure filters

86 Medium Pressure Filters 5/4/8CN Series 8CN Flange Face Details (SAE 2 3-M) Flange face mounting holes M2-.75 x 22 deep Pressure Drop Curves With.7 bar bypass the recommended initial pressure drop is max.5 bar. With 3.5 bar bypass the recommended initial pressure drop is max. bar. If the medium used has a viscosity different from 3 cst, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows: The total Δp = housing Δph + (element Δpe x working viscosity/3). 5CN- Elements 5CN Empty Housing QE QE QE QE /4 Nominal Port Size Nominal Port Size CN-2 Elements QE QE QE 2QE Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section

87 Pressure Drop Curves 4CN- Elements 4CN Empty Housing QE 5QE. QE Nominal Port Size QE 5.5 /2 Nominal Port Size CN-2 Elements QE 2. 5QE 5.5 QE 5. 2QE CN- Elements 8CN Empty Housing QE 5QE QE.5 2QE /2 Nominal Port Size 2 Nominal Port Size CN-2 Elements QE 5QE.5 QE 5 2QE Medium pressure filters

88 Medium Pressure Filters 5/4/8CN Series Element Service A. Stop the system s power unit. B. Relieve any system pressure in the filter line. C. Drain the filter bowl if drain port option is provided. D. Loosen and remove bowl. E. Remove element by pulling downward with a slight twisting motion and discard. F. Check bowl o-ring and anti-extrusion ring for damage and replace if necessary. G. Lubricate element o-ring with system fluid and place on post in filter head. H. Install bowl by rotating counter clockwise and tighten to specified torque. 5CN 2-27 Nm (5-2ft. lbs) 4CN Nm (42-5ft. lbs) 8CN 8-95 Nm (6-7ft. lbs) I. Confirm there are no leaks after powering the system. 3 2 CN Filters Parts List Index Description Head 2 Indicators M3-visual auto reset:.2 bar M3-visual auto reset: 2.5 bar 3 T-electrical:.2 bar c/w DIN 4365 connector T-electrical: 2.5 bar c/w DIN 4365 connector F-electronic PNP with 4 LEDs:.2 bar F-electronic PNP with 4 LEDs: 2.5 bar F2-electronic NPN with 4 LEDs:.2 bar F2-electronic NPN with 4 LEDs: 2.5 bar 4 Bypass valve.7 bar assembly 3.5 bar assembly 5 Element (see replacement element part numbers) 6 Bowl Single length with drain Single length with reusable core and drain Single length without drain Double length with drain Double length with reusable core and drain Double length without drain 7 Bowl and dust seal Fluoroelastomer 8 Drain plug: SAE-4 Fluoroelastomer Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section

89 Ordering Information Standard products table Part numbers 5CNQEVTKG64 5CNQEVM3KG64 5CN2QEVTKG64 5CN2QEVM3KG64 5CN2QEVTKG64 5CN2QEVM3KG64 5CN22QEVTKG64 5CN22QEVM3KG64 4CN5QEVTKG244 4CN5QEVM3KG244 4CNQEVTKG244 4CNQEVM3KG244 4CN2QEVTKG244 4CN2QEVM3KG244 4CN25QEVTKG244 4CN25QEVM3KG244 4CN2QEVTKG244 4CN2QEVM3KG244 4CN22QEVTKG244 4CN22QEVM3KG244 8CNQEVTKG324 8CNQEVM3KG324 8CN2QEVTKG324 8CN2QEVM3KG324 8CN2QEVTKG324 8CN2QEVM3KG324 8CN22QEVTKG324 8CN22QEVM3KG324 Supercedes F35CNRQETW35C2C29 F35CNRQEM25C2C29 F35CNR2QETW35C2C29 F35CNR2QEM25C2C29 F35CN2RQETW35C2C29 F35CN2RQEM25C2C29 F35CN2R2QETW35C2C29 F35CN2R2QEM25C2C29 F34CNR5QETW35E2E29 F34CNR5QEM25E2E29 F34CNRQETW35E2E29 F34CNRQEM25E2E29 F34CNR2QETW35E2E29 F34CNR2QEM25E2E29 F34CN2R5QETW35E2E29 F34CN2R5QEM25E2E29 F34CN2RQETW35E2E29 F34CN2RQEM25E2E29 F34CN2R2QETW35E2E29 F34CN2R2QEM25E2E29 F38CNRQETW35F2F29 F38CNRQEM25F2F29 F38CNR2QETW35F2F29 F38CNR2QEM25F2F29 F38CN2RQETW35F2F29 F38CN2RQEM25F2F29 F38CN2R2QETW35F2F29 F38CN2R2QEM25F2F29 Flow (l/min) Model number 5CN 5CN 5CN 5CN 5CN 5CN 5CN 5CN 4CN 4CN 4CN 4CN 4CN 4CN 4CN 4CN 4CN 4CN 4CN 4CN 8CN 8CN 8CN 8CN 8CN 8CN 8CN 8CN Element length Length Length Length Length Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length Length Length Length Length Length Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length Length Length Length Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Media rating (μ) Note: Filter assemblies ordered from the product configurator on next page are on extended lead times. Where possible, please make your selection from the table above Seals Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Fluoroelastomer Indicator Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Bypass settings 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar Ports G" G" G" G" G" G" G" G" G /2" G /2" G /2" G /2" G /2" G /2" G /2" G /2" G /2" G /2" G /2" G /2" G2" G2" G2" G2" G2" G2" G2" G2" Replacement elements 9367Q 9367Q 9367Q 9367Q 93674Q 93674Q 93675Q 93675Q 93677Q 93677Q 93678Q 93678Q 93679Q 93679Q 9367Q 9367Q 9366Q 9366Q 93672Q 93672Q 93662Q 93662Q 93675Q 93675Q 93678Q 93678Q 93679Q 93679Q 87 Medium pressure filters

90 Medium Pressure Filters 5/4/8CN Series Ordering Information (cont.) Product Configurator Box Box 2 4CN 2 Box 3 QE Box 4 V Box 5 M3 Box 6 K Box 7 G24 Box 8 4 Box Model Small size MP filter, T-port Medium size MP filter, T-port Large size MP filter, T-port 5CN 4CN 8CN Box 2 Length Length Length 2 Filter type 2 Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks Box 3 Element media Ecoglass III element Degree of filtration Glass fibre 2μ media 2QE 5μ media 5QE μ media QE Note: When using Ecoglass III elements a bowl with reusable Eco-adaptor is required. Filter assemblies with Microglass III elements are available by request 2μ media 2QE Box 4 Seal material Fluoroelastomer Seal type V B Box 5 No indicator port Visual indicator Electrical indicator Plugged with steel plug Electronic 4 LED, PNP, N.O. Electronic 4 LED, NPN, N.O. Electronic 4 LED, PNP, N.C. Electronic 4 LED, NPN, N.C. Box 8 Options Options Standard drain port on bowl Indicator 4 N M3 T P F F2 F3 F4 Box 6 Bypass valve.7 bar 3.5 bar Bypass valve Indicator.2 bar 2.5 bar G K When filter includes a bypass valve but not an indicator, code denotes bypass setting. Box 7 Ports 5CN:Thread G 3 /4 Thread G Thread SAE 2 Thread SAE 6 Thread M27, ISO649 4CN:Thread G /4 Thread G /2 Thread SAE 6 Thread SAE 24 Thread M33, ISO649 8CN:Thread G /2 Thread G2 Thread SAE 24 Thread SAE 32 Thread M42, ISO649 Thread M48, ISO649 SAE flange 2" 3-M Filter connection G2 G6 S2 S6 M27 G2 G24 S6 S24 M33 G24 G32 S24 S32 M42 M48 R32 Ecoglass III elements (Fluoroelastomer seals) Model 5CN- 5CN-2 4CN- 4CN-2 8CN- 8CN-2 2QE Q 93672Q 93676Q 9367Q 93673Q 93676Q 5QE Q 93673Q 93677Q 9367Q 93674Q 93677Q QE 9367Q 93674Q 93678Q 9366Q 93662Q 93678Q Conversion bowl assembly (to retrofit existing CN filter housings to use coreless elements) CN- coreless element bowl assembly CN-2 coreless element bowl assembly CN- coreless element bowl assembly CN-2 coreless element bowl assembly CN- coreless element bowl assembly CN-2 coreless element bowl assembly 2QE 9367Q 93675Q 93679Q 93672Q 93675Q 93679Q Model 5CN 4CN 8CN Replacement element part numbers for conventional assemblies Elements with nitrile seals Elements with Fluoroelastomer seals Model 5CN- 5CN-2 4CN- 4CN-2 8CN- 8CN-2 2Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Seal kits S2594 S2596 S3543 5Q G44Q G469Q G448Q G467Q Q Q Fluoroelastomer* S2595 S2597 S3544 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 2Q 93367Q 93368Q 9399Q 938Q Q Q Model 5CN- 5CN-2 4CN- 4CN-2 8CN- 8CN-2 2Q 9326Q 93266Q 92676Q 92677Q Q Q 5Q G489Q G49Q G49Q G492Q 93266Q Q Q 93262Q 93268Q Q Q 83266Q Q 2Q 93369Q 9337Q 93Q 939Q 92993Q Q ßx(c)=2 5.% 6 Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size μm [c] ßx(c)= ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)= ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)= % efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) 9.% 6 Degree of filtration 98.7% % % 6 2 Please note the bolded options reflect standard options with a reduced lead-time of (4) weeks or less. Consult Parker Filtration on all other lead-time options. 99.9% Metal free Ecoglass III 2QE 5QE QE 2QE Nominal flow (l/min) for filter assembly at viscosity 3cSt Housing, port size 5CN-, G 5CN-2, G 4CN-, G /2 4CN-2, G /2 8CN-, G2 8CN-2, G2 2QE QE QE QE * Fluoroelastomers are available under various registered trademarks, including Viton (a registered trademark of DuPont) and Fluorel (a registered trademark of 3M) 88 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section

91 Medium Pressure Filters 45M/45M Eco Series MAX 26 I/min - 4 bar FEATURING 89 Medium pressure filters

92 Medium Pressure Filters 45M/45M Eco Series Features & Benefits Features Cast iron head, steel bowl Reinforced Microglass III replacement elements Visual, electrical or electronic indicators available Test points in the filter head Coreless Ecoglass III replacement elements Advantages Can be used in applications where aluminium is not allowed Rugged construction Multi-layered design produced high capacity and efficiency Wire support reduces pleat bunching, keeps performance consistent Check element condition at glance Right style for the application Pressure measurement and Δp possible No metal content in element Reduced overall weight of 5% Easy compaction of used elements Eco adaptors available Benefits Approved for engine rooms and mines Reliable filtration in all conditions Great performance value Reliable performance throughout element life Reduces downtime, maximises element life Optimise element life, prevent bypassing Matches your system electrical connections Quick testing and maintenance Environmentally friendly disposal by incineration Lower element replacement costs Lower disposal costs Retrofit coreless design to housings already installed Typical Applications Industrial power units Mobile construction equipment Forestry equipment The Parker Filtration 45M/45 Eco Series Medium Pressure Filters. The 45M/45 Eco Series of medium pressure filters offer an ideal solution to the problem of protecting system components at lower pressures. These filters are a realistic, high quality alternative to low specification spin-on filters. The 45M/45 Eco Series offers high dirt holding capacity, 4 bar capability and rapid element replacement. 9 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section

93 Specification Pressure ratings: Maximum allowable operating pressure 4 bar. Filter housing pressure pulse fatigue tested: 6 pulses -4 bar. Connections: Threads G, G /4 (ISO 228/) or flange SAE /2 3-M. Filter housing: Head material cast iron (GSI). Bowl material steel. Seal material: or Fluoroelastomer. Operating temperature range: -2 to + C Bypass valve: Opening pressure 3.5 bar. Filtration element: Degree of filtration: Determined by Multipass-test according to ISO 6889, see Box 3 in the product configurator. Flow fatigue characteristics: Filter media is supported so that the optimal fatigue life is achieved (ISO 3724). Microglass III: Supported with epoxy coated metal wire mesh, end cap material reinforced composite and metal inner core. Collapse rating 2 bar (ISO 294). Ecoglass III: Supported with plastic net, end cap material reinforced composite. No metal parts. Collapse rating bar (ISO 294). Filter element can only be used together with reusable FEA Eco-adapter. Note: Ecoglass III contributes to ISO 4 quality. Indicator options: Indicating differential pressure: 2.5 ±.2 bar. - visual M3. - electrical T. - electronic F(PNP). - electronic F2(NPN). For indicator details see catalogue section 6. Fluid compatibility: Suitable for use with mineral and vegetable oils, and some synthetic oils. For other fluids, please consult Parker Filtration. Installation Details Plug M2x.5 Type A B C Weight (kg) D Length 6 (4.57) 237 (9.33) 92 (7.56) 5.9 Length 2 Length 3 28 (8.2) 33 (3.) 285 (.22) 329 (3.) 45 (7.72) 45 (5.94) G, G /4, G /2, Flange SAE /2 3-M D D Length (6.85) 55 (2.65) 55 (9.9) 7. 4 pcs M2 depth 8 only model SAE 69.8 (2.75) A 38 (.5) 35.7 (.4) 5 min (2.) B C mm (inches) M depth 2 32 (5.2) 7 (2.75) 66 ( ) 5 min (2.) 39 ( ) 58 (2.28) 9 Medium pressure filters

94 Medium Pressure Filters 45M/45M Eco Series Pressure Drop Curves The recommended level of the initial pressure drop is max. bar. If the medium used has a viscosity different from 3 cst, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows: The total Δp = housing Δph + (element Δpe x working viscosity/3). 45M Series Empty Housing G6 G2 G24 R M- Element with Microglass III 45M-2 Element with Microglass III Q.2 5Q Q 2Q Q 5Q Q 2Q M-3 Element with Microglass III 45M-4 Element with Microglass III Q 5Q 2Q Q Q Q Q 2Q Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section

95 45M- Element with Ecoglass III 45M-2 Element with Ecoglass III QE QE 2QE QE QE 5QE QE QE M-3 Element with Ecoglass III 45M-4 Elements with Ecoglass III QE QE QE QE 5QE QE QE QE Ordering Information Standard products table Product numbers 45MQBPKG6 45M2QBPKG6 45MQEBPKG6 45M2QEBPKG6 45M2QBPKG2 45M22QBPKG2 45M2QEBPKG2 45M22QEBPKG2 45M3QBPKG24 45M32QBPKG24 45M3QEBPKG24 45M32QEBPKG24 Supercedes FF45.Q.BS35.GT6 FF45.Q2.BS35.GT6 FF45.QE.BS35.GT6 FF45.QE2.BS35.GT6 FF46.Q.BS35.GT2 FF46.Q2.BS35.GT2 FF46.QE.BS35.GT2 FF46.QE2.BS35.GT2 FF47.Q.BS35.GT24 FF47.Q2.BS35.GT24 FF47.QE.BS35.GT24 FF47.QE2.BS35.GT24 Flow (l/min) Model number 45M 45M 45M 45M 45M 45M 45M 45M 45M 45M 45M 45M Element length Length Length Length Length Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length 3 Length 3 Length 3 Length 3 Media rating (μ) Note: Filter assemblies ordered from the product configurator below are on extended lead times. Where possible, please make your selection from the table above. Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability Seals Indicator Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Bypass settings 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar Ports G" G" G" G" G /4" G /4" G /4" G /4" G /2" G /2" G /2" G /2" Replacement elements Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 93897Q 93897Q Q Q Supercedes FC75.Q.BK FC75.Q2.BK FC75.QE.BK FC75.QE2.BK FC76.Q.BK FC76.Q2.BK FC76.QE.BK FC76.QE2.BK FC77.Q.BK FC77.Q2.BK FC77.QE.BK FC77.QE2.BK 93 Medium pressure filters

96 Medium Pressure Filters 45M/45M Eco Series Ordering Information (cont.) Product configurator Box Box 2 45M 2 Box 3 Q Box 4 B Box 5 M3 Box 6 K Box 7 G2 Box 8 Box Box 2 Length Length Length 2 Length 3 Length 4 Model Medium pressure filter, T-port Filter type Box 3 45M Element media Microglass III element Ecoglass III element Degree of filtration Glass fibre 2μ media 2Q 2QE Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks 5μ media 5Q 5QE μ media Q QE Note: When using Ecoglass III elements a bowl with reusable Eco-adaptor is required. Filter assemblies with Microglass III elements are available by request 2μ media 2Q 2QE Box 4 Seal material Fluoroelastomer Seal type B V Box 5 Plugged with steel plug Visual indicator Electrical indicator Electronic 4 LED, PNP, N.O. Electronic 4 LED, NPN, N.O. Electronic 4 LED, PNP, N.C. Electronic 4 LED, NPN, N.C. Indicator P M3 T F F2 F3 F4 Box 6 Bypass valve 3.5 bar No bypass* No bypass* Bypass valve Indicator 2.5 bar 7. bar No indicator (P) K N X * High collapse element must be used if MAOP is higher than element collapse pressure. When filter includes a bypass valve but not an indicator, code denotes bypass setting. + Box 8: code 2 + Box 8: code 2 Box 7 Connections Thread G Thread G /4 Thread G /2 SAE flange /2" 3-M G6 G2 G24 R24 Availability: S = standard product x = non-standard, ask for availability Filter connection Length S S x x Length 2 S S S x Length 3 S S S x Length 4 x S S x Box 8 Options Standard No bypass Options 2 Media 2Q 5Q Q 2Q 2QE 5QE QE 2QE Replacement elements with nitrile seals Length 93896Q 93896Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Length Q Q Q Q 93898Q 93898Q Q Q Length Q Q 93897Q 93897Q Q Q Q Q Length Q Q Q Q Q Q 93899Q 93899Q Nominal flow (I/min) at viscosity 3 cst - connection size Filter length Length Length 2 Length 3 Length 4 Media 2Q/2QE 5Q/5QE Q/QE 2Q/2QE 2Q/2QE 5Q/5QE Q/QE 2Q/2QE 2Q/2QE 5Q/5QE Q/QE 2Q/2QE 2Q/2QE 5Q/5QE Q/QE 2Q/2QE G G G24 & R ßx(c)=2 5.% 6 Degree of filtration Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size μm [c] ßx(c)= ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)= ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)= % efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) 9.% % % % % Disposable Microglass III 2Q 5Q Q 2Q Metal free Ecoglass III 2QE 5QE QE 2QE Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 94 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section

97 Medium Pressure Filters 3 Eco Series MAX I/min - 3 bar FEATURING 95 Medium pressure filters

98 Medium Pressure Filters 3 Eco Series Features & Benefits Features Modular filter system Duplex type systems with selecting valve Bypass assembly in the filter cover Large filtration area Air bleed valve Two indicator locations, visual indicator as standard Coreless Ecoglass III replacement elements Advantages Sizing and performance can be optimised Element change during operation Sediment and other particles at the bottom are away from the flow entering the system High dirt holding capacity Easy air removal after element change Easy to detect when element replacement needed No metal content in element Reduced overall weight of 5% Easy compaction of used elements Conversion kits available: new bowl with permanent core Benefits Best filter for every lube application Continuous filtration No contamination passing into the system if filter in bypass Long element life Protects bearings and other sensitive components Reliable filtration Environmentally friendly disposal by incineration Lower element replacement costs Lower disposal costs Retrofit coreless design to housings already installed Typical Applications Paper production plants Steel mills Aluminium mills Industrial power packs Lubrication systems Power generation The Parker Filtration 3 Eco Series Medium Pressure Filters. These high flow return filters are ideal for industrial applications on hydraulic or lubrication systems with pressures up to 3 bar and flows up to l/min in single units. Multiple filter systems with pressures up to 6 bar and flows up to 4 l/min. The ability to bank multiple filters together in a duplex format enables continuous filtration during element changes. 96 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 2

99 Specification Pressure ratings: Maximum allowable operating pressure: Single filters 3 bar. Filter systems 6 bar. Filter housing pressure pulse fatigue tested: 6 pulses -25 bar. Construction: Eco-element does not include any metal parts and is supported by Eco-adaptor. Conventional elements can be used without removing the Eco-adaptor. Connections: Single unit connections: Flanges SAE 2 3-M, SAE 2 /2 3-M or with adaptor threads G /2 or G2. Dual unit connections: Flanges SAE 3 3-M or with adaptor threads G /2 or G2. Parallel unit and filter system assembly connections: DN8/PN6 or DN/PN6. Assembly of two, four six or eight filters to the same system by using L-bore valve assembly (only one side in use). Filter housing: Material aluminium. Seal material: or Fluoroelastomer. Operating temperature range: -2 C to + C. Bypass valve: Opening pressure 3.5 bar. Filter element: Degree of filtration: Determined by Multipass-test according to ISO 6889, see Box 3 in the product configurator. Flow fatigue characteristics: Filter media is supported so that the optimal fatigue life is achieved (ISO 3724). Ecoglass III: Supported with plastic net, end cap material reinforced composite. No metal parts. Collapse rating bar (ISO 294). Filter element can only be used together with reusable FEA Eco-adapter. Note: Ecoglass III contributes to ISO 4 quality. Also available with Microglass III elements. Contact Parker Filtration for details. Visual indicator: Includes M3, full part number FMUM3KVMU2H as standard. Optional Indicators (mounted to lower indicator port): - electrical T. - electronic F(PNP). - electronic F2(NPN). For indicator details see catalogue section 6. Fluid compatibility: Suitable for use with mineral and vegetable oils, and some synthetic oils. For other fluids, please consult Parker Filtration. Installation Details Single Assemblies 3M Body flange Adaptor flange Connection options SAE 2 3-M SAE 2 /2 3-M G /2 G2 SAE 3 3-M (9 elbow) M2 8pcs G /2x2pcs G /8 Venting valve M2 4pcs Direction A Torque 5 Nm Ø96 Indicator FPC V Weights (kg) Length 2 Length 3 Single Dual D2 Parallel P2 System S2 System S9 System S6 System S Length 2=65 Length 3=2 Dimensions in mm G /2 42 Indicator port A 63 Adaptor flange 27 In M2 4pcs Torque 5 Nm Adaptor flange 28 Torque 5 Nm OUT Option. can be rotated in 9 steps. 97 Medium pressure filters

100 Medium Pressure Filters 3 Eco Series Dual System 3D G /2 x 2pcs G /8 Venting valve A 97.5 Out In Out 9 27 In SAE 3 flange SAE 3 flange 9 Thread flange 35 Thread flange 35 Parallel System 3N Ø Supported from base Connection options Body flange Adaptor flange thread SAE 3 3-M G /2 G2 G /2x2pcs G /8 Venting valve Type Length 2 Length 3 Dimensions in mm A Out A 635 In In Out 9 29 Port Sizes DN8/PN6 or DN/PN Ø Supported from base 98 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 2

101 3S System + units 3S System 2+2 units Indicator FPC V Indicator FPC V Drain valve G /2x2pcs Drain valve G /2x2pcs S System 3+3 units 3S System 4+4 units Indicator FPC V Indicator FPC V Drain valve G /2x2pcs Medium pressure filters

102 Medium Pressure Filters 3 Eco Series Valve Assembly Connection - T-Model G /2x2pcs G /8 Venting valve Type Length 2 Length 3 Dimensions in mm A Out Slow fill valve A Out In Indicator port 9 Ø4 393/ /53 In Valve supported from base Port sizes DN8/PN6 or DN/PN6 L-Model C-Model G /2x2pcs G /8 Venting valve G /2x2pcs G /8 Venting valve Handle turns counter clockwise A In A Out 366/376 In 9 9 Ø4 Out 254 Indicator port 4 78 Ø4 393/ / /5 293/33 Valve supported from base Valve supported from base Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 2

103 Pressure Drop Curves The recommended level of the initial pressure drop is max.8 bar. If the medium used has a viscosity different from 3 cst, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows: The total Δp = housing Δph + (element Δpe x working viscosity/3). 3M Eco Single Empty Housing 3S Eco System Empty Housing G G32 R Elements 2QE S S3-4 3S S Elements 5QE Length 2 Length Length 2.25 Length Elements QE 3 Elements 2QE Length 2 Length Length 2 Length Δp (psid) Ordering Information Standard products table Part numbers 3M2QEBM3KR4 3M22QEBM3KR4 3M3QEBM3KR4 3M32QEBM3KR4 Supercedes FF32.QE.BA35.SL4 FF32.QE2.BA35.SL4 FF33.QE.BA35.SL4 FF33.QE2.BA35.SL4 Flow (l/min) Model number 3M 3M 3M 3M Element length Length 2 Length 2 Length 3 Length 3 Media rating (μ) Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 2 2 Seals Indicator Visual Visual Visual Visual Bypass settings 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar Ports SAE flange 2 /2" 3-M SAE flange 2 /2" 3-M SAE flange 2 /2" 3-M SAE flange 2 /2" 3-M Replacement elements Q Q Q Q Supercedes FC32.QE.BK FC32.QE2.BK FC33.QE.BK FC33.QE2.BK Medium pressure filters

104 Medium Pressure Filters 3 Eco Series Ordering Information (cont.) Product configurator Configurator example, single unit: Box Box 2 Box 3 3M 3 QE Box 4 B Box 5 M3 Box 6 K Box 7 R4 Box 8 Configurator example, 2+2 system: Box 3S Box 2 3 Box 3 QE Box 4 B Box 5 M3 Box 6 K Box 7 D Box 8 4 Box Model Single unit Dual unit Parallel unit System 3M 3D 3N 3S Box 2 Length Length 2 Length 3 Filter type 2* 3 * = This option is semi standard on single units (3M) only Box 3 Element media Ecoglass III element Degree of filtration Glass fibre 2μ media 2QE* 5μ media 5QE * = This option is semi standard on single units (3M) only Filter assemblies with Microglass III elements are available by request μ media QE 2μ media 2QE Box 4 Seal material Fluoroelastomer Box 7 Seal type Connections Thread G /2 Thread G2 SAE flange 2" 3-M SAE flange 2 /2" 3-M SAE flange 3" 3-M DN8 flange DN flange B V G24 G32 R32 R4 R48 D8 D Availability: S = standard product x = non-standard, ask for availability - = not available Box 5 Visual indicator Electrical indicator Electronic 4 LED, PNP, N.O. Electronic 4 LED, NPN, N.O. Filter connection 3M S S x S D x x - - S - - Indicator 3N S S 3S S S M3 T F F2 Visual M3 indicator always as standard Other indicator options are additional and the indicator must be mounted to lower indicator port. Box 8 Box 6 Bypass valve 3.5 bar Options 3M: standard 3D: 2 units 3 units 3N: + units: L-port 2+2 units: L-port 3S: + units: T-port 2+2 units: T-port 3+3 units: T-port 4+4 units: T-port + units: L-port 2+2 units: L-port 3+3 units: L-port 4+4 units: L-port Bypass valve Indicator 2.5 bar Options K Replacement elements with nitrile seals Media 2QE 5QE QE 2QE Media 2Q 5Q Q 2Q Length Q Q Q Q Length Q Q Q Q Replacement Microglass III elements with nitrile seals Length Q Q Q Q Length Q Q Q 93874Q Filter length Length 2 Length 3 Nominal flow (I/min) at viscosity 3 cst Single unit 3M Media 2QE 5QE QE 2QE 2QE 5QE QE 2QE G Connection size G R Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks ßx(c)=2 5.% 6 Degree of filtration Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size μm [c] ßx(c)= ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)= ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)= % efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) 9.% % % % % Metal free Ecoglass III 2QE* 5QE QE 2QE Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 2 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 2

105 High Pressure Filters 5P/3P Series MAX 2 I/min - 27 bar 3 High pressure filters

106 High Pressure Filters 5P/3P Series Features & Benefits Features Compact aluminium housing Two head sizes and two bowl lengths Large ports and wide flow paths Microglass III replacement elements Visual, electrical and electronic indicators available Advantages Light weight but still robust design Optimised sizing Low differential pressure across housing and element Multi-layered design produced high capacity and efficiency Wire support reduces pleat bunching, keeps performance consistent Check element condition at a glance Right style for the application Benefits Reliable and continuous operation both in mobile and industrial applications Efficient filtration Right filter for each application Higher flow rates possible Less lost energy Great performance value Reliable performance throughout element life Reduces downtime, maximises element life Optimise element life, prevent bypassing Matches your system electrical connections Typical Applications Saw mills Aircraft ground support equipment Asphalt pavers Hydraulic fan drives Power steering circuits Domestic refuse vehicles Cement trucks Servo control protection Logging equipment The Parker Filtration 5P/3P Series High Pressure Filters. These application examples have one thing in common...the need for clean hydraulic fluid. Modern high pressure hydraulic systems are demanding. Better controls and long component life are expected. To deliver the high standards of performance, hydraulic components are built with tighter tolerances which increases their sensitivity to contamination. That s where Parker pressure filters come into play. They filter out ingressed contamination before it jams a valve or scores a cylinder. They block pump generated debris before it gets to servo or proportional valves. Parker pressure filters are a key ingredient in meeting today s system demands. Put your hydraulic systems in the care of Parker Filtration. We are committed to designing and building the best filters available to industry. 4 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 3

107 Specification Pressure ratings: Maximum allowable operating pressure 27 bar. Filter housing pressure pulse fatigue tested: 38 bar. Connections: Inlet and outlet connections are threaded. Connection style Model 5P 3P BSPF(G) 3/4 ISO 649 M27 M33 Filter housing: Head material extruded aluminium (anodised 66-T6). Bowl material impacted aluminium (anodised 66-T6). Seal material: or Fluoroelastomer. Operating temperature range: -2 C to + C. Bypass valve: Opening pressure 3.5 bar. Filter element: Degree of filtration: Determined by multipass-test according to ISO 6889, see Box 3 in the product configurator. Flow fatigue characteristics: Filter media is supported so that the optimal fatigue life is achieved (ISO 3724). Microglass III: Supported with epoxy coated metal wire mesh, end cap material reinforced composite and metal inner core. Collapse rating 24 bar (ISO 294). High collapse elements: High collapse elements available. For details please contact Parker Filtration. Indicator options: Indicating differential pressure: 2.5 ±.2 bar. - visual M3. - electrical T. - electronic F(PNP). - electronic F2(NPN). For indicator details see catalogue section 6. Weights (kg): Model Length Length 2 5P P Fluid compatibility: Suitable for use with mineral and vegetable oils, and some synthetic oils. For other fluids, please consult Parker Filtration. Installation Details 5P Series Torque Nm (55-7 Ft lbs) Dia P P Torque 4-48 Nm Minimum cartridge removal clearance P P- Optional 5/6 SAE-5 drain port torque 2-27 Nm (5-2 ft lbs) Bottom View High pressure filters

108 High Pressure Filters 5P/3P Series Installation Details (cont.) 3P Series Torque Nm (55-7 Ft lbs) mm (inches) Side view P- 3P Torque Nm (65-7 Ft lbs) P P Minimum cartridge removal clearance dia Bottom view Optional str thd drain port 5/6 SAE-5 ( /2-2 UNF-2B) Torque 2-27 Nm (5-2 Ft lbs) dia dia thru 2 total Hex.6 4. Port to port Optional mounting bracket (925563) Index Description 5P 3P Head 2 Bypass assembly 3 Element See chart in product configurator 4 Bowl O-ring buna N9238 N925 Bowl O-ring fluoroelastomer V9238 V925 5 Bowl 6 Drain plug c/w buna seal Drain plug c/w Fluoroelastomer seal 7 Nameplate Blank indicator kit Indicators M3 Visual auto reset indicator FMUM3KVAU4M T Electrical indicator FMUTKVAU4M F Electronic indicator PNP with 4 LED FMUFKVAU4M F2 Electronic indicator NPN with 4 LED FMUF2KVAU4M Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 3

109 Pressure Drop Curves The recommended level of the initial pressure drop is max..2 bar. If the medium used has a viscosity different from 3 cst, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows: Δp = (Δp3 x viscosity of medium used) / 3 cst. 5P Empty Housing P Empty Housing P- 5P P- 3P P- Elements 3P- Elements Q Q 5Q 2Q Q 5Q Q 2Q P-2 Elements 3P-2 Elements Q 2.5 2Q Q Q 2Q Q 2Q Q High pressure filters

110 High Pressure Filters 5P/3P Series Ordering Information Standard products table Part number 5PQBM3KG2 5PQBTKG2 5P2QBM3KG2 5P2QBTKG2 3PQBM3KG6 3PQBTKG6 3P2QBM3KG6 3P2QBTKG6 Supercedes 5P--Q-M2-5-B2B2-5P--Q-TW3-5-B2B2-5P-2-Q-M2-5-B2B2-5P-2-Q-TW3-5-B2B2-3P--Q-M2-5-C2C2-3P--Q-TW3-5-C2C2-3P-2-Q-M2-5-C2C2-3P-2-Q-TW3-5-C2C2- Flow (l/min) Model number 5P 5P 5P 5P 3P 3P 3P 3P Element length Length Length Length 2 Length 2 Length Length Length 2 Length 2 Media rating (μ) Note: Filter assemblies ordered from the product configurator below are on extended lead times. Where possible, please make your selection from the table above. Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Seals Indicator Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Bypass settings 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar Ports G 3 /4" G 3 /4" G 3 /4" G 3 /4" G" G" G" G" Replacement elements 9392Q 9392Q 9396Q 9396Q 939Q 939Q 9394Q 9394Q Product configurator Box Box 2 5P Box 3 Q Box 4 B Box 5 M3 Box 6 K Box 7 G2 Box 8 Box Model High pressure filter, T-port High pressure filter, T-port Box 2 Length Length Length 2 Filter type 2 Box 3 5P 3P Element media Microglass III element Degree of filtration Glass fibre 2μ media 2Q Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks 5μ media 5Q μ media Q 2μ media 2Q Box 4 Seal material Fluoroelastomer Seal type B V Box 5 Plugged with steel plug Visual indicator Electrical indicator No indicator port Electronic 4 LED, PNP, N.O. Electronic 4 LED, NPN, N.O. Electronic 4 LED, PNP, N.C. Electronic 4 LED, NPN, N.C. Indicator P M3 T N F F2 F3 F4 Box 6 Bypass and indicator settings Bypass valve 3.5 bar Indicator 2.5 bar K When filter includes a bypass valve but not an indicator, code denotes bypass setting. Box 7 Filter connection Connections 5P: Thread G 3 /4 Thread M27, ISO 649 3P: Thread G Thread M33, ISO 649 G2 M27 G6 M33 Box 8 Options Standard Drain port on bowl Options 4 Media 2Q 5Q Q 2Q Replacement elements with nitrile seals 5P- 939Q 939Q 9392Q 9393Q 5P Q 9395Q 9396Q 9397Q 3P- 9398Q 9399Q 939Q 939Q 3P Q 9393Q 9394Q 9395Q Nominal flow (I/min) at viscosity 3 cst Filter model 5P- 5P-2 3P- 3P-2 2Q Q Q Q ßx(c)=2 5.% 6 Degree of filtration Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size μm [c] ßx(c)= ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)= ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)= % efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) 9.% % % % % Disposable Microglass III 2Q 5Q Q 2Q 8 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 3

111 High Pressure Filters P Series MAX I/min - 44 bar 9 High pressure filters

112 High Pressure Filters P Series Features & Benefits Features High 44 bar pressure rating Flow rates up to l/min Optional reverse flow valve Bottom access bowl Microglass III replacement elements Visual and electrical indicators available Advantages Strong and robust housing for heavy duty applications Pressure filtration possible for high flow rates Allows reverse flow and prevents back wash of element Only bottom of the bowl must be opened for element change Multi-layered design produced high capacity and efficiency Wire support reduces pleat bunching, keeps performance consistent Check element condition at a glance Right style for the application Benefits Reliable and continuous operation for open and closed loop applications Excellent protection of high performance machinery Ideal for applications where back flow is expected Easy service Great performance value Reliable performance throughout element life Reduces downtime, maximises element life Optimises element life, prevents bypassing Matches your system electrical connections Typical Applications Drilling rigs Power packs Oil/gas industry Flight simulators Test rigs The Parker Filtration Model P High Pressure Filters. The P Series is designed to meet the growing demand for high-pressure filters with a flow rate capacity of up to l/min at 44 bar working pressure. For systems where reverse flow can be expected, an optional integrated reverse flow valve avoids back wash of contamination. When changing the element, only the end cap of the bowl has to be removed. The filter is ideal for applications where space is at a premium. The filter media used in the elements is high quality Microglass III glass fibre. Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 4

113 Specification Pressure ratings: Maximum allowable operating pressure 44 bar. Filter housing pressure pulse fatigue tested: 3* 6 pulses bar. Connections: Inlet and outlet connections are threaded internally or flange faced. Threads G /2, G2 (ISO 228/), SAE 24, SAE 32. or flanges /2" SAE 6, 2 SAE 6, /2" SAE 6-M, 2 SAE 6-M. *6-M is a SAE style with appropriate metric fixing threads. Filter housing: Head material cast iron (GSI). Bowl material extruded steel, max torque 2 Nm. Seal material: or Fluoroelastomer, Neoprene. Operating temperature range: - 2 C to + C. Bypass valve: Opening pressure 7. bar. Options: Reverse flow valve, which directs back flow from port to port. Filter element: Degree of filtration: Determined by Multipass-test according to ISO 6889, see Box 3 in the product configurator. Flow fatigue characteristics: Filter media is supported so that the optimal fatigue life is achieved (ISO 3724). Microglass III: Supported with epoxy coated metal wire mesh, end cap material reinforced composite and metal inner core. Collapse rating 2 bar (ISO 294). High collapse elements: High collapse elements available. For details please contact Parker Filtration. Indicator options: Indicating differential pressure: 5. bar. - visual indicator. - electrical indicator. Weights (kg): P-: 37 kg. P-2: 47 kg. Fluid compatibility: Suitable for use with mineral and vegetable oils, and some synthetic oils. For other fluids, please consult Parker Filtration. Installation Details A/F Mounting Clamp Item 6 Steel (Zinc plated) EPDM Ø M2x75(2x) ( ) SAE 6 Ø69 Ø25 Ø45 Ø45 46 A/F 5 Minimum element clearance L=563 L2=83 33/ /3A 4 3/3A Type H model Filter head 2 Filter element 3 Bowl seal 3A Bowl back-up ring 4 Housing 5 Cover 6 Indicator seal 7 Bypass set 8 Visual indicator 9 Electrical indicator Bypass seal Reverse flow set 2 Adaptor 3 Adaptor/reverse flow seal 4 Cover seal 5 Drain plug 6 Mounting clamp High pressure filters

114 High Pressure Filters P Series Additional Information Filter with Reverse Flow Valve Normal Flow Condition Valve housing Valve housing Sleeve Central stem Circuit symbol Reverse Flow Condition Pressure Drop Curves The recommended level of the initial pressure drop is max. 2.3 bar. If the medium used has a viscosity different from 3 cst, pressure drop can be estimated as follows: The total Δp = housing Δph + (element Δpe x working viscosity/3). P- Empty Housing (G /2, SAE 24, SAE /2 ) P-2 Empty Housing (G2, SAE 32, SAE 2 ) RFV Normal housing RFV Normal housing P- Elements P-2 Elements Q Q 4.5 Q Q Q Q Q Q Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 4

115 Ordering Information Standard products table Part number P5QBM4MF24 PQBM4MF24 P2QBM4MF24 P25QBM4MF32 P2QBM4MF32 P22QBM4MF32 Supercedes 74A.2HN7.FZ2 74A.2HN7.FZ22 74A.2HN7.FZ23 74A.2HN7.TZ22 74A.2HN7.TZ222 74A.2HN7.TZ223 Flow (l/min) Model number P P P P P P Element length Length Length Length Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Media rating (μ) Note: Filter assemblies ordered from the product configurator below are on extended lead times. Where possible, please make your selection from the table above Seals Indicator Visual Visual Visual Visual Visual Visual Bypass settings 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar Ports SAE flange /2" 6 SAE flange /2" 6 SAE flange /2" 6 SAE flange 2" 6 SAE flange 2" 6 SAE flange 2" 6 Replacement elements 9396Q 93962Q 93963Q 93965Q 93966Q 93967Q Supercedes 7Z2A 7Z22A 7Z23A 7Z22A 7Z222A 7Z223A Product configurator Box Box 2 P 2 Box 3 Q Box 4 B Box 5 M4 Box 6 M Box 7 F32 Box 8 Box Model Large HP filter, L-port P Box 2 Length Length Length 2 Filter type 2 Box 3 Element media Microglass III element Degree of filtration Glass fibre 2μ media 2Q 5μ media 5Q μ media Q 2μ media 2Q Box 4 Seal material Fluoroelastomer Seal type B V Box 5 Indicator No indicator port Visual indicator Electrical indicator Electrical indicator with red lamp 28 Vdc, N.O. Electrical indicator with red lamp VAC, N.O. Electrical indicator with red lamp 25 VAC, N.O. N M4 T2 T3 T4 T5 Box 6 Bypass and indicator settings Bypass valve 7. bar Indicator 5. bar M When filter includes a bypass valve but not an indicator, code denotes bypass setting. Box 7 Filter connection Connections Thread G /2 Thread G 2 Thread SAE 24 Thread SAE 32 SAE flange /2" 6 SAE flange /2" 6-M SAE flange 2" 6 SAE flange 2" 6-M G24 G32 S24 S32 F24 H24 F32 H32 Box 8 Options Standard Reverse flow valve Options 3 Replacement elements with nitrile seals Media 2Q 5Q Q 2Q Filter port size P-, /2" P-2, 2" Length 9396Q 9396Q 93962Q 93963Q Length Q 93965Q 93966Q 93967Q Nominal flow (I/min) at viscosity 3 cst 2Q Q 6 84 Q Q 8 Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks ßx(c)=2 5.% 6 Degree of filtration Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size μm [c] ßx(c)= ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)= ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)= % efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) 9.% % % % % Disposable Microglass III 2Q 5Q Q 2Q Seal kit (nitrile) order code: 8697 Mounting clamp order code: Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 3 High pressure filters

116 Notes 4 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK.

117 High Pressure Filters 8/28/38P Series MAX 7 I/min - 44 bar 5 High pressure filters

118 High Pressure Filters 8/28/38P Series Features & Benefits Features Fatigue tested to full pressure rating Several head sizes Several connection options Microglass III replacement elements Visual, electrical and electronic indicators available Advantages Strong and robust housing for heavy duty applications Optimised sizing Easy mounting Multi-layered design produced high capacity and efficiency Wire support reduces pleat bunching, keeps performance consistent Check element condition at a glance Right style for the application Benefits Reliable and continuous operation both in mobile and industrial applications Efficient filtration Covers wide flow range Global design, global acceptance Right filter for each application Great performance value Reliable performance throughout element life Reduces downtime, maximises element life Optimises element life, prevents bypassing Matches your system electrical connections Typical Applications Injection moulding Die casting Servo controls Machine tools Mobile equipment The Parker Filtration 8/28/38P Series High Pressure Filters Parker Filtration engineered the 8/28/38P series of high pressure filters to satisfy demanding applications in the mobile and industrial markets throughout the world. With metric mounting and optional ISO 649 ports, this new series is truly a global design. Installed downstream of the pump, this new series with their wide range of high capacity Microglass III elements, offer excellent protection to system components. Standard filters come complete with industry proven spool type bypass valve. For more critical applications such as servo or proportional controls, a no bypass high strength element combination ensures maximum protection. The modular low hysteresis differential pressure indicator fitted to this series is unrivaled in its performance. Tests prove its accuracy and foolproof design to be a major advance in indicator technology. 6 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 5

119 Specification Pressure ratings: Maximum allowable operating pressure 44 bar. Filter housing pressure pulse fatigue tested: 6 pulses - 44 bar. Connections: Inlet and outlet connections are threaded internally or flange faced. Connection style Model 8P 28P 38P BSPF(G) 3/4 /4, /2 SAE 2 6 2, 24 ISO 649 M27 M33 M42, M48 Flange SAE 6 3 /4 /4 Flange SAE 6-M* 3 /4 /4 *6-M is a SAE style with appropriate metric fixing threads. Filter housing: Head material cast iron (GSI). Bowl material steel. Seal material: or Fluoroelastomer. Operating temperature range: -2 C to + C. Bypass valve & indicator settings: Table below gives bypass valve and corresponding indicator setting. Bypass Indicator 3.5 bar 2.5 bar 7. bar 5. bar Filter element: Degree of filtration: Determined by multipass-test according to ISO 6889, see Box 3 in the product configurator. Flow fatigue characteristics: Filter media is supported so that the optimal fatigue life is achieved (ISO 3724). Microglass III: Supported with epoxy coated metal wire mesh, end cap material reinforced composite and metal inner core. Collapse rating 2 bar (ISO 294). High collapse elements: (to be used when no bypass function in filter housing). Microglass III media supported with epoxy coated metal wire mesh on upstream and stainless steel on downstream, end cap material steel. Strong metal inner core. Collapse rating 2 bar (ISO 294). Indicator options: Indicating differential pressure: 2.5 ±.2 bar or 5. ±.4 bar. - visual M3. - electrical T. - electronic F(PNP). - electronic F2(NPN). For indicator details see catalogue section 6. Weights (kg): Model Length Length 2 8P P P Fluid compatibility: Suitable for use with mineral and vegetable oils, and some synthetic oils. For other fluids, please consult Parker Filtration. Model 8P- 8P-2 28P- 28P-2 38P- 38P-2 A B C D E F G H J K L M N P (A/F) 98 (7.79) 293 (.53) 228 (8.97) 337 (3.26) 329 (2.95) 448 (7.64) 32 (.26) 4 (.57) 44 (.73) 26 (.2) 29 (.4) 35 (.38) 75 (2.95) 93 (3.66) 28 (5.4) 24 (.94) 24 (.94) 36 (.42) (3.94) 98 (3.86) 2 (4.72) 6 (6.3) 4 (.57) 55 (2.6) 5 (.97) 2 (.79) 27.5 (.7) 25 (.98) 8 (3.5) 9 (3.54) 2 (4.72) 4 (.57) 45 (.77) 6 (2.36) 55 (2.6) 62 (2.44) 8 (3.9) (4.33) 24 (4.88) 62 (6.38) M8 x.25 x2 deep M x.5 x deep M x.5 x2 deep 8P 28P 38P B C B C B C A Length A Length 2 Bowl removal F D G H J Torque 22-27Nm (5-2 ft/lbs) Hex. E A Length A Length 2 Bowl removal F D G H J Torque 35-4 Nm (25-3 ft/lbs) Hex. E A Length A Length 2 Bowl removal F G H J D Torque 8-95 Nm (6-7 ft/lbs) Hex. E mm (inches) K L R3 5 M N K L R35 M 5 N K L R38 5 M N 4 mounting holes (P) 4 mounting holes (P) 4 mounting holes (P) 7 High pressure filters

120 High Pressure Filters 8/28/38P Series Flange Face Details ØG Thread E metric F SAE A B C D Model mm (inches) 8P ( 3 /4 ) 28P ( ) 38P ( /4 ) A B C D E F G M x.5-6h x 8 Deep 3 /8-6 UNC-2B x 8 deep (.47) (.94) (.) (2.) (.75) M2 x.75-6h x 2 Deep /6-4 UNC-2B x 2 deep (.55) (.9) (.) (2.25) (.) M4 x 2-6H x 2 Deep /2-3 UNC-2B x 2 deep (.62) (.25) (.3) (2.62) (.25) 8 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 5

121 Pressure Drop Curves With 3.5 bar bypass the recommended initial pressure drop is max.2 bar. With 7. bar bypass the recommended initial pressure drop is max 2.3 bar. If the medium used has a viscosity different from 3 cst, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows: The total Δp = housing Δph + (element Δpe x working viscosity/3). 8P- Elements 8P-2 Elements Q Q Q Q Q 5Q Q 2Q P- Empty Housing and High Collapse 8P-2 High Collapse Elements QH QH QH 2QH Empty Housing QH 2QH QH QH P- Elements 28P-2 Elements Q Q 5Q 2Q Q 5Q Q 2Q P- Empty Housing and High Collapse 28P-2 High Collapse Elements QH 5QH QH 2QH Empty Housing QH 5QH QH 2QH High pressure filters

122 High Pressure Filters 8/28/38P Series Pressure Drop Curves (cont.) 38P- Elements P-2 Elements Q 5Q 29. Q 4.5 2Q Q 5Q 4.5 Q 2Q 6 38P- Empty Housing and High Collapse 38P-2 High Collapse Elements QH 3. 2QH QH QH.5. Empty Housing QH QH QH QH Element Service A. Stop the system s power unit. B. Relieve any system pressure in the filter line. C. Drain the filter bowl if drain port option is provided. D. Rotate the bowl clockwise (left) and remove. E. Remove element by pulling downward with a slight twisting motion and discard. F. Check bowl o-ring and anti-extrusion ring for damage and replace if necessary. G. Lubricate element o-ring with system fluid and locate element in filter head. H. Install bowl by rotating counter-clockwise (right) and tighten to specified torque. 8P Nm 28P 35-4 Nm 38P 8-95 Nm I. Confirm there are no leaks after powering the system. Parts List Index Description Part number Head Assembly Element Bowl Indicators M3 Visual auto reset; 2.5 bar M3 Visual auto reset; 5. bar T Electrical; 2.5 bar with DIN 4365 Connector T Electrical; 5. bar with DIN 4365 Connector F Electronic PNP; 2.5 bar with 4 LED F2 Electronic NPN; 2.5 bar with 4 LED F Electronic PNP; 5. bar with 4 LED F2 Electronic NPN; 5. bar with 4 LED Bowl Seal Bowl Anti-extrusion Ring Seal Kits Seal kit 8P (std) Seal kit 8P (F3) Fluoroelastomer Seal kit 28P (std) Seal kit 28P (F3) Fluoroelastomer Seal kit 38P (std) Seal Kit 38P (F3) Fluoroelastomer see table on next page S435 S435 S4352 S4353 S4354 S Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 5

123 Element Service (cont.) 5 4 Replacement element part numbers Elements with seals Model 2Q 5Q Q 2Q 2QH 5QH QH 2QH 8P- G4242 G4243 G4244 G4245 G429 G429 G4292 G4293 8P-2 G425 G425 G4252 G4253 G4298 G4299 G43 G43 28P- G4258 G4259 G426 G426 G436 G437 G438 G439 28P-2 G4266 G4267 G4268 G4269 G434 G435 G436 G437 38P- G4274 G4275 G4276 G4277 G4322 G4323 G4324 G P-2 G4282 G4283 G4284 G4285 G433 G433 G4332 G4333 Elements with Fluoroelastomer seals Model 2Q 5Q Q 2Q 2QH 5QH QH 2QH 8P- G4236 G4237 G4238 G4239 G4294 G4295 G4296 G4297 8P-2 G4254 G4255 G4256 G4257 G422 G423 G434 G435 28P- G4262 G4263 G4264 G4265 G43 G43 G432 G433 28P-2 G427 G427 G4272 G4273 G438 G439 G432 G432 38P- G4278 G4279 G428 G428 G4326 G4327 G4328 G P-2 G4286 G4287 G4288 G4289 G4334 G4335 G4336 G Ordering Information Standard products table Part number Supercedes Flow (l/min) Model number Element length Media rating (μ) Seals Indicator Bypass settings 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar 7. bar Ports Replacement elements G4244 G4244 G4245 G4245 G4252 G4252 G4253 G4253 G426 G426 G426 G426 G4268 G4268 G4276 G4276 G4277 G4277 G4284 G4284 G4285 G4285 8PQBTMG2 8PQBM3MG2 8P2QBTMG2 8P2QBM3MG2 8P2QBTMG2 8P2QBM3MG2 8P22QBTMG2 8P22QBM3MG2 28PQBTMG6 28PQBM3MG6 28P2QBTMG6 28P2QBM3MG6 28P2QBTMG6 28P2QBM3MG6 38PQBTMG2 38PQBM3MG2 38P2QBTMG2 38P2QBM3MG2 38P2QBTMG2 38P2QBM3MG2 38P22QBTMG2 38P22QBM3MG2 8P--Q-TW6-98-B2B2-8P--Q-M2-98-B2B2-8P--2Q-TW6-98-B2B2-8P--2Q-M2-98-B2B2-8P-2-Q-TW6-98-B2B2-8P-2-Q-M2-98-B2B2-8P-2-2Q-TW6-98-B2B2-8P-2-2Q-M2-98-B2B2-28P--Q-TW6-98-C2C2-28P--Q-M2-98-C2C2-28P--2Q-TW6-98-C2C2-28P--2Q-M2-98-C2C2-28P-2-Q-TW6-98-C2C2-28P-2-Q-M2-98-C2C2-38P--Q-TW6-98-D2D2-38P--Q-M2-98-D2D2-38P--2Q-TW6-98-D2D2-38P--2Q-M2-98-D2D2-38P-2-Q-TW6-98-D2D2-38P-2-Q-M2-98-D2D2-38P-2-2Q-TW6-98-D2D2-38P-2-2Q-M2-98-D2D P 8P 8P 8P 8P 8P 8P 8P 28P 28P 28P 28P 28P 28P 38P 38P 38P 38P 38P 38P 38P 38P Length Length Length Length Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length Length Length Length Length 2 Length 2 Length Length Length Length Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual G 3 /4" G 3 /4" G 3 /4" G 3 /4" G 3 /4" G 3 /4" G 3 /4" G 3 /4" G" G" G" G" G" G" G /4" G /4" G /4" G /4" G /4" G /4" G /4" G /4" Note: Filter assemblies ordered from the product configurator on the next page are on extended lead times. Where possible, please make your selection from the table above. 2 High pressure filters

124 High Pressure Filters 8/28/38P Series Ordering Information (cont.) Product configurator Box Box 2 38P Box 3 Q Box 4 B Box 5 M3 Box 6 M Box 7 G2 Box 8 Box Model Small size high pressure filter, T-port Medium size high pressure filter, T-port Large size high pressure filter, T-port 8P 28P 38P Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks Box 2 Length Length Length 2 Filter type 2 Box 3 Element media Microglass III element High collapse element Degree of filtration Glass fibre 2μ media 2Q 2QH 5μ media 5Q 5QH μ media Q QH 2μ media 2Q 2QH Box 4 Seal material Fluoroelastomer Seal type B V Box 5 No indicator port Visual indicator Electrical indicator Plugged with steel plug Electronic 4 LED, PNP, N.O. Electronic 4 LED, NPN, N.O. Electronic 4 LED, PNP, N.C. Electronic 4 LED, NPN, N.C. Indicator N M3 T P F F2 F3 F4 Box 6 Bypass and indicator settings Bypass valve 3.5 bar 7. bar No bypass No bypass Indicator 2.5 bar 5. bar 5. bar No indicator K M M X When filter includes a bypass valve but not an indicator, code denotes bypass setting. + Box 8: code 2 + Box 8: code 2 Box 7 Filter connection Ports 8P: Thread G 3 /4 Thread SAE 2 Thread M27, ISO 649 SAE flange 3 /4" 6-M SAE flange 3 /4" 6 28P: Thread G Thread SAE 6 Thread M33, ISO 649 SAE flange " 6-M SAE flange " 6 38P: Thread G /4 Thread G /2 Thread SAE 2 Thread SAE 24 Thread M42, ISO 649 Thread M48, ISO 649 SAE flange /4" 6-M SAE flange /4" 6 G2 S2 M27 H2 F2 G6 S6 M33 H6 F6 G2 G24 S2 S24 M42 M48 H2 F2 Box 8 Options Standard No bypass Options 2 Filter model 8P- 8P-2 28P- 28P-2 38P- 38P-2 Nominal flow (I/min) at viscosity 3 cst 2Q Q Q Q ßx(c)=2 5.% 6 Degree of filtration Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size μm [c] ßx(c)= ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)= ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)= % efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) 9.% % % % % Disposable Microglass III 2Q 5Q Q 2Q High collapse element 2QH 5QH QH 2QH Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 22 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 5

125 High Pressure Filters 7/7 Eco Series MAX 45 I/min - 42 bar FEATURING 23 High pressure filters

126 High Pressure Filters 7/7 Eco Series Features & Benefits Features Fatigue tested to full pressure rating Several head options and connection sizes Several bowl lengths Microglass III replacement elements Coreless Ecoglass III replacement elements Visual, electrical and electronic indicators available Advantages Strong and robust housing for heavy duty applications Easy mounting Optimised sizing Multi-layered design produced high capacity and efficiency Wire support reduces pleat bunching, keeps performance consistent No metal content in element Reduced overall weight of 5% Easy compaction of used elements Eco adaptors available Check element condition at a glance Right style for the application Benefits Reliable and continuous operation both in mobile and industrial applications Reduced space and piping Right filter for each application Efficient filtration Great performance value Reliable performance throughout element life Reduces downtime, maximises element life Environmentally friendly disposal by incineration Lower element replacement costs Lower disposal costs Retrofit coreless design to housings already installed Optimise element life, prevent bypassing Matches your system electrical connections Typical Applications Forestry equipment Industrial power units Pulp and paper Port handling equipment Mining and quarrying equipment The Parker Filtration 7/7 Eco Series High Pressure Filters. High quality 42 bar in-line pressure filters designed to offer high levels of protection at flows up to 45 l/min. Dirt sensitive systems can be protected with confidence using the 7 Series high pressure filters. The 7 Series also available with environmentally friendly Ecoglass III elements. 24 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 6

127 Specification Pressure ratings: Maximum allowable operating pressure 42 bar. Filter housing pressure pulse fatigue tested: 6 pulses - 44 bar. Connections: Threads G, G /4, G /2 (ISO 228/). or flanges /4" SAE 3-M, /2" SAE 3-M, /4" SAE 6-M, /2" SAE 6-M. Filter housing: Head material cast iron (GSI). Bowl material steel. Max torque 4 Nm. Seal material: or Fluoroelastomer. Operating temperature range: - 2 C to + C. Bypass valve: Opening pressure 3.5 bar. Filter element: Degree of filtration: Determined by Multipass-test according to ISO 6889, see Box 3 in the product configurator. Flow fatigue characteristics: Filter media is supported so that the optimal fatigue life is achieved (ISO 3724). Microglass III: Supported with epoxy coated metal wire mesh, end cap material reinforced composite and metal inner core. Collapse rating 2 bar (ISO 294). Ecoglass III: Supported with plastic net, end cap material reinforced composite. No metal parts. Collapse rating bar (ISO 294). Filter element can only be used together with reusable FEA Eco-adapter. Note: Ecoglass III contributes to ISO 4 quality. High collapse elements: (To be used when no bypass function in filter housing). Microglass III media supported with epoxy coated metal wire mesh on upstream and stainless steel on downstream, end cap material steel. Strong metal inner core. Collapse rating 2 bar (ISO 294). Indicator options: Indicating differential pressure: 2.5 ±.2 bar or 7. ±.5 bar. 2.5 bar indicators to be used with 3.5 bar bypass valve and 7. bar indicators with no bypass function. - visual M3. - electrical T. - electronic F(PNP). - electronic F2(NPN). For indicator details see catalogue section 6. Fluid compatibility: Suitable for use with mineral and vegetable oils, and some synthetic oils. For other fluids, please consult Parker Filtration. 25 High pressure filters

128 High Pressure Filters 7/7 Eco Series Specification 7B 7T 7L Δp indicator Vent port 3 (.8) Out D D In D Out D In A 4 Option (for all models) plug G /4 29 (5.8) 43 (.69) 7 29 (5.8) 62 (2.44) Internal dia. 32/external dia. 4 O-ring size 22 4 mounting holes 2 dia. 95 Outlet (5.6) B 52 (2.4) 58 (2.28) B 9 (7.48) Inlet B 6 4 HEX 6 4 HEX (.6) 6 (2.36) Ø3 (4.5) 4 HEX (.6) mm (inches) 44 (5.67) (3.94) M depth Option plug M2x.5 37 (5.39) 43 (.69) M depth 2 (.78) 75 (2.95) Note: No fastening holes with SAE flange option Weights (kg) Type 7T 7L 7B Length Length Length Length (2.2) 37 (5.39) 89 (3.5) Type A B B B Max working Port 7T 7B 7L pressure D Length 6 (4.57) 249 (9.8) 295 (.6) 235 (9.25) G, G /4 or G /2 42 bar Length 2 28 (8.9) 342 (3.46) 39 (5.35) 33 (3.) Flange /2 SAE 3-M Length 3 Length (2.95) 428 (6.85) 462 (8.9) 562 (22.2) 5 (2.8) 6 (24.) 45 (7.72) 55 (2.65) 35 bar Flange /4 SAE 3-M Flange /2 SAE 6-M Flange /4 SAE 6-M 26 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 6

129 Pressure Drop Curves With 3.5 bar bypass the recommended initial pressure drop is max.2 bar. If the medium used has a viscosity different from 3 cst, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows: The total Δp = housing Δph + (element Δpe x working viscosity/3). 7 Series Empty Housing B C 4.5 D A E A: 7T with G6 connections B: 7T with G2 connections 7L with G6 connections C: 7T with G2 connections 7B D: 7T with G24 connections E: 7L with G24 connections Elements with Microglass III 7-2 Elements with Microglass III Q.2 5Q Q 2Q Q 5Q Q 2Q Elements with Microglass III 7-4 Elements with Microglass III Q 5Q 2Q Q Q Q Q 2Q High pressure filters

130 High Pressure Filters 7/7 Eco Series Pressure Drop Curves (cont.) 7- Elements with Ecoglass III 7-2 Elements with Ecoglass III QE QE 2QE QE QE 5QE QE QE Elements with Ecoglass III 7-4 Elements with Ecoglass III QE QE QE QE 5QE QE QE QE Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 6

131 Ordering Information Standard products table Part number 7LQBPKG6 7L2QBPKG6 7L2QBPKG2 7L22QBPKG2 7L3QBPKG24 7L32QBPKG24 7L4QBPKG24 7L42QBPKG24 7LQEBPKG6 7L2QEBPKG6 7L2QEBPKG2 7L22QEBPKG2 7L3QEBPKG24 7L32QEBPKG24 7L4QEBPKG24 7L42QEBPKG24 7TQBPKG6 7T2QBPKG6 7T2QBPKG2 7T22QBPKG2 7T3QBPKG24 7T32QBPKG24 7T4QBPKG24 7T42QBPKG24 7TQEBPKG6 7T2QEBPKG6 7T2QEBPKG2 7T22QEBPKG2 7T3QEBPKG24 7T32QEBPKG24 7T4QEBPKG24 7T42QEBPKG24 Supercedes FF75.Q.BS35.GL6 FF75.Q2.BS35.GL6 FF76.Q.BS35.GL2 FF76.Q2.BS35.GL2 FF77.Q.BS35.GL24 FF77.Q2.BS35.GL24 FF78.Q.BS35.GL24 FF78.Q2.BS35.GL24 FF75.QE.BS35.GL6 FF75.QE2.BS35.GL6 FF76.QE.BS35.GL2 FF76.QE2.BS35.GL2 FF77.QE.BS35.GL24 FF77.QE2.BS35.GL24 FF78.QE.BS35.GL24 FF78.QE2.BS35.GL24 FF75.Q.BS35.GT6 FF75.Q2.BS35.GT6 FF76.Q.BS35.GT2 FF76.Q2.BS35.GT2 FF77.Q.BS35.GT24 FF77.Q2.BS35.GT24 FF78.Q.BS35.GT24 FF78.Q2.BS35.GT24 FF75.QE.BS35.GT6 FF75.QE2.BS35.GT6 FF76.QE.BS35.GT2 FF76.QE2.BS35.GT2 FF77.QE.BS35.GT24 FF77.QE2.BS35.GT24 FF78.QE.BS35.GT24 FF78.QE2.BS35.GT24 Flow (l/min) Model number 7L 7L 7L 7L 7L 7L 7L 7L 7L 7L 7L 7L 7L 7L 7L 7L 7T 7T 7T 7T 7T 7T 7T 7T 7T 7T 7T 7T 7T 7T 7T 7T Element length Note: Filter assemblies ordered from the product configurator on next page are on extended lead times. Where possible, please make your selection from the table above Media rating (μ) Seals Indicator Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Plugged Bypass settings 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar Ports G" G" G /4" G /4" G /2" G /2" G /2" G /2" G" G" G /4" G /4" G /2" G /2" G /2" G /2" G" G" G /4" G /4" G /2" G /2" G /2" G /2" G" G" G /4" G /4" G /2" G /2" G /2" G /2" Replacement elements Q Q Q Q 93878Q Q Q Q Q 93879Q Q Q Q Q 9388Q 93882Q Q Q Q Q 93878Q Q Q Q Q 93879Q Q Q Q Q 9388Q 93882Q Supercedes FC75.Q.BK FC75.Q2.BK FC76.Q.BK FC76.Q2.BK FC77.Q.BK FC77.Q2.BK FC78.Q.BK FC78.Q2.BK FC75.QE.BK FC75.QE2.BK FC76.QE.BK FC76.QE2.BK FC77.QE.BK FC77.QE2.BK FC78.QE.BK FC78.QE2.BK FC75.Q.BK FC75.Q2.BK FC76.Q.BK FC76.Q2.BK FC77.Q.BK FC77.Q2.BK FC78.Q.BK FC78.Q2.BK FC75.QE.BK FC75.QE2.BK FC76.QE.BK FC76.QE2.BK FC77.QE.BK FC77.QE2.BK FC78.QE.BK FC78.QE2.BK 29 High pressure filters

132 High Pressure Filters 7/7 Eco Series Ordering Information (cont.) Product configurator Box Box 2 7L 3 Box 3 Q Box 4 B Box 5 M3 Box 6 K Box 7 G24 Box 8 Box Model High pressure filter with L-port High pressure filter with T-port High pressure filter with side manifold mounting 7L 7T 7B Box 2 Length Length Length 2 Length 3 Length 4 Filter type Box 3 Element media Microglass III element Ecoglass III element High collapse element Degree of filtration Glass fibre 2μ media 2Q 2QE 2QH 5μ media 5Q 5QE 5QH μ media Q QE QH Note: When using Ecoglass III elements reusable Eco-adaptor is required 2μ media 2Q 2QE 2QH Box 4 Seal material Fluoroelastomer Seal type B V Box 5 Plugged with steel plug Visual indicator Electrical indicator Electronic 4 LED, PNP, N.O. Electronic 4 LED, NPN, N.O. Electronic 4 LED, PNP, N.C. Electronic 4 LED, NPN, N.C. Indicator P M3 T F F2 F3 F4 Box 6 Bypass and indicator settings Bypass valve 3.5 bar No bypass No bypass Indicator 2.5 bar 7. bar No indicator (P) K N X When filter includes a bypass valve but not an indicator, code denotes bypass setting. + Box 8: code 2 + Box 8: code 2 Box 7 Connections Thread G Thread G /4 Thread G /2 SAE flange /4" 3-M SAE flange /2" 3-M SAE flange /4" 6-M SAE flange /2" 6-M Side manifold (7B only) G6 G2 G24 R2 R24 H2 H24 X32 Availability: S = standard product x = non-standard, ask for availability Filter connection Length S S x x x x x x Length 2 S S S x x x x x Length 3 x S S x x x x x Length 4 x S S x x x x x Box 8 Options Options Standard No bypass 7T: side indicator ports 7T: options Options 6 and 8: in 7T model there is an option for 2 x indicator ports on filter outlet flange (standard indicator port not machined) P: both side indicator ports plugged with steel plug M3 or other indicator chosen: right side (in flow direction) port plugged with a plastic plug, left with a steel plug Filter length Length Length 2 Length 3 Length 4 Media 2Q/2QE 5Q/5QE Q/QE 2Q/2QE 2Q/2QE 5Q/5QE Q/QE 2Q/2QE 2Q/2QE 5Q/5QE Q/QE 2Q/2QE 2Q/2QE 5Q/5QE Q/QE 2Q/2QE Nominal flow (I/min) at viscosity 3 cst G6 T-port G6 L-port & G2 T-port G2 L-port & Side manifold G24 T-port G24 L-port Media 2Q 5Q Q 2Q 2QE 5QE QE 2QE 2QH 5QH QH 2QH Replacement elements with nitrile seals Length 93877Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 93879Q 93883Q 93884Q 93885Q 93886Q Length Q Q Q Q 93879Q Q Q Q 93887Q 93888Q 93889Q 9388Q Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard Length Q 93878Q 93878Q Q Q Q Q Q 9388Q 93882Q 93883Q 93884Q Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) Length Q Q Q Q Q 9388Q 9388Q 93882Q 93885Q 93886Q 93887Q 93888Q Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks ßx(c)=2 5.% 6 Degree of filtration Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size μm [c] ßx(c)= ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)= ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)= % efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) 9.% % % % % Disposable Microglass III 2Q 5Q Q 2Q Metal free Ecoglass III 2QE 5QE QE 2QE High collapse element 2QH 5QH QH 2QH Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 3 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 6

133 High Pressure Duplex Filters 22PD/32PD Series MAX 26 I/min - 2 bar 3 High pressure filters

134 High Pressure Duplex Filters 22PD/32PD Series Features & Benefits Features Duplex design Integrated balancing valve Vent ports Microglass III replacement elements Visual, electrical and electronic indicators available Advantages Element service possible during operation No external piping required Purges all trapped air in filter Multi-layered design produced high capacity and efficiency Wire support reduces pleat bunching, keeps performance consistent Check element condition at a glance Right style for the application Benefits Allows to keep machine running with full contamination protection Safety and reliability Get the maximum performance from the elements Prevents a "flabby" system Great performance value Reliable performance throughout element life Reduces downtime, maximises element life Optimises element life, prevents bypassing Matches your system electrical connections Typical Applications Ship steering systems Continuous operation industrial systems High flow flushing systems The Parker Filtration 22PD/32PD Series High Pressure Duplex Filters. Specially designed to offer continuous operation, even during element change. A changeover valve operates on the upstream side of the filter, ensuring a contamination free system. 32 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 7

135 Specification Pressure ratings: Maximum allowable operating pressure 2 bar. Filter housing pressure pulse fatigue tested: 6 cycles 2 bar. Connections: Inlet and outlet connections are threaded. Connection style Model 22PD 32PD BSPF(G) /4 Flange SAE 3-M /4 /2 *3-M is a SAE style with appropriate metric fixing threads. Filter housing: Head material cast iron (GSI). Bowl material steel. Seal material: or Fluoroelastomer. Operating temperature range: -2 C to + C. Bypass valve: Opening pressure 3.5 bar Filter element: Degree of filtration: Determined by multipass-test according to ISO 6889, see Box 3 in the product configurator. Flow fatigue characteristics: Filter media is supported so that the optimal fatigue life is achieved (ISO 3724). Microglass III: Supported with epoxy coated metal wire mesh, end cap material reinforced composite and metal inner core. Collapse rating 2 bar (ISO 294). High collapse elements: (to be used when no bypass function in filter housing). Microglass III media supported with epoxy coated metal wire mesh on upstream and stainless steel on downstream, end cap material steel. Strong metal inner core. Collapse rating 2 bar (ISO 294). Indicator options: Indicating differential pressure: 2.5 ±.2 bar. - visual M3. - electrical T. - electronic F(PNP). - electronic F2(NPN). For indicator details see catalogue section 6. Weights (kg): Model Length Length 2 22PD PD 44 5 Fluid compatibility: Suitable for use with mineral and vegetable oils, and some synthetic oils. For other fluids, please consult Parker Filtration. Dimensions mm (inches) Model A B C D E F G H I J K L M N 3.75Ø 22PD- 22-PD-2 32PD- 32PD-2 24 (9.45) 36 (2.5) 35 (.38) 42 (.65) 92 (3.62) 3 (5.2) 8 (.7) 2 (.79) 55 (2.6) 78 (3.7) 5 (5.9) 7 (6.69) 5 (5.9) 65 (6.49) 96 (3.7) 2 (4.72) 92 (7.56) 24 (9.45) 6 (2.36) 75 (2.95) 3 (.8) 36 (.42) 59 (2.32) 7 (2.75) 38Ø 236 (9.29) 345 (3.58) 37 (2.48) 437 (7.2) A D Indicator location In Out B mm (inches) J I G E N 4 mounting holes 22PD: M8x.2 pitchx2 deep 32PD: Mx.5 pitchx5 deep H 2 bleed holes G /8 F Changeover handle Balance valve Bleed valve Hexagon 22PD 24 A/F 32PD 36 A/F C Bowl removal mm (3.93) Flange face detail L Both 22PD & 32PD M2x.72 pitch x2 deep M K 33 High pressure filters

136 High Pressure Duplex Filters 22PD/32PD Series Pressure Drop Curves The recommended level of initial pressure drop is max..2 bar. If the medium used has a viscosity different from 3 cst, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows: Δp = (Δp3 x viscosity of medium used) / 3 cst. The total Δp = housing Δph + (element Δpe x working viscosity/3). 22PD/32PD Bypass Valve PD/32PD Empty Housing Cracking Pressure PD 32PD PD- Elements PD-2 Elements Q 5Q Q 2Q Q 2Q 5Q Q PD- Elements 32PD-2 Elements Q 2.8 5Q 4.5 Q 7.3 2Q Q 4.5 5Q Q 7.3 2Q Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 7

137 22PD- High Collapse Elements PD-2 High Collapse Elements QH 5 QH QH 2 QH QH 5 QH QH 2 QH PD- High Collapse Elements 32PD-2 High Collapse Elements QH 5 QH 2 QH QH QH 5 QH QH 2 QH Ordering Information Standard products table Part number 22PD2QBM3KG6 22PD2QBTKG6 22PD22QBM3KG6 22PD22QBTKG6 32PD2QBM3KG2 32PD2QBTKG2 32PD22QBM3KG2 32PD22QBTKG2 Supercedes -22-PD-2-Q-V-5-C- -22-PD-2-Q-TW3-5-C- -22-PD-2-2Q-V-5-C- -22-PD-2-2Q-TW3-5-C- -32-PD-2-Q-V-5-D- -32-PD-2-Q-TW3-5-D- -32-PD-2-2Q-V-5-D- -32-PD-2-2Q-TW3-5-D- Flow (l/min) Model number 22PD 22PD 22PD 22PD 32PD 32PD 32PD 32PD Element length Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Length 2 Media rating (μ) Note: Filter assemblies ordered from the product configurator on the next page are on extended lead times. Where possible, please make your selection from the table above Seals Indicator Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Visual Electrical Bypass settings 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar 3.5 bar Ports G" G" G" G" G /4" G /4" G /4" G /4" Replacement elements G35Q G35Q G938Q G938Q G98Q G98Q G954Q G954Q 35 High pressure filters

138 High Pressure Duplex Filters 22PD/32PD Series Ordering Information (cont.) Product configurator Box Box 2 22PD 2 Box 3 Q Box 4 B Box 5 M3 Box 6 K Box 7 G6 Box 8 Box Model Small high pressure duplex filter Large high pressure duplex filter 22PD 32PD Box 2 Length Length Length 2 Filter type 2 Box 3 Element media Microglass III element High collapse element Degree of filtration Glass fibre 2μ media 2Q 2QH 5μ media 5Q 5QH μ media Q QH 2μ media 2Q 2QH Box 4 Seal material Fluoroelastomer Seal type B V Box 5 Visual indicator Electrical indicator Plugged with steel plug No indicator port Electronic 4 LED, PNP, N.O. Electronic 4 LED, NPN, N.O. Electronic 4 LED, PNP, N.C. Electronic 4 LED, NPN, N.C. Indicator M3 T P N F F2 F3 F4 Box 6 Bypass and indicator settings Bypass valve 3.5 bar No bypass No bypass Indicator 2.5 bar 5. bar No indicator K M X When filter includes a bypass valve but not an indicator, code denotes bypass setting. + Box 8: code 2 + Box 8: code 2 Box 7 Filter connection Ports 22PD: Thread G SAE flange /4" 3-M 32PD: Thread G /4 SAE flange /2" 3-M G6 R2 G2 R24 Box 8 Options Standard No bypass Options 2 Media 2Q 5Q Q 2Q 2QH 5QH QH 2QH Media 2Q 5Q Q 2Q 2QH 5QH QH 2QH Replacement elements with nitrile seals 22PD- G282Q G272Q G28Q G93Q G442Q G3737Q G44Q G932Q 22PD-2 G36Q G2724Q G35Q G938Q G448Q G3738Q G447Q G94Q 32PD- G69Q G2567Q G68Q G946Q G454Q G3739Q G453Q G948Q 32PD-2 G99Q G2727Q G98Q G954Q G46Q G374Q G459Q G956Q Replacement elements with fluoroelastomer seals 22PD- G32Q G2723Q G3Q G934Q G446Q G4235Q G445Q G935Q 22PD-2 G336Q G2726Q G335Q G942Q G452Q G4236Q G45Q G943Q 32PD- G89Q G2569Q G88Q G95Q G458Q G4237Q G457Q G95Q 32PD-2 G9Q G2729Q G8Q G958Q G464Q G4238Q G463Q G959Q Filter model 22PD- 22PD-2 32PD- 32PD-2 Filter model 22PD 32PD Nominal flow (I/min) at viscosity 3 cst 2Q 7 8 Seal kits S4233 S Q Fluoroelastomer S4234 S2375 Q Item is standard Item is standard with green options Item is semi standard Item is non standard 2Q Highlights Key (Denotes part number availability) Note: Standard items are in stock, semi standard items are available within four weeks ßx(c)=2 5.% 6 Degree of filtration Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 6889) / particle size μm [c] ßx(c)= ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)= ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)= % efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) 9.% % % % % Disposable Microglass III 2Q 5Q Q 2Q High collapse element 2QH 5QH QH 2QH Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 36 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 7

139 Portable Hydraulic Filtration Systems Guardian MAX 5 I/min - 2 bar 37 Portable filtration systems

140 Portable Hydraulic Filtration Systems Guardian Features & Benefits Features Portable and robust design Quick disconnect hose connections Visual indicator VAC or 22/24VAC options A range of clean-up elements Water removal element option Advantages Note: 5 l/min / Fluid transfer at a controlled rate Guardian is designed to be used anywhere. Take it to the system or transfer new oil from the drum. Storage is simple. Guardian s compact design means it is easily stowed. Operational condition is constantly monitored Guardian s power flexibility means it can be used anywhere. A user can specify the media that will best achieve his clean up/filtering requirements. Water removal from the system is an important requirement for fluid efficiency. Application Example A hydraulic system reservoir had become heavily contaminated and the hydraulic system was in danger of a catastrophic failure from particulate and water contamination. These contaminants were introduced from various points airborne, wear and introduction of new dirty fluids. The Guardian filtration system was installed into the hydraulic systems reservoir and run completely off-line for a period of time until acceptable contamination levels were achieved. This off-line attachment allowed the hydraulic system to continue operating without costly downtimes. Additionally a Water Removal (WR) Element was also fitted to the Guardian, which radically reduced the water contamination within the entire system. This customer will only now introduce new fluids into his hydraulic application by using the Guardian filtration system and in addition utilises the Guardian off-line option to maintain and protect his system. Contamination levels are monitored by an LCM222 which controls the Guardians operation. Result: reliability and complete confidence restored. Typical Applications Fluid transfer Offline reservoir clean-up Injection moulding machines Royal navy surface fleet systems Paper mills Industrial equipment Mobile equipment Marine system support The Parker Filtration Guardian portable filtration systems. Guardian is a portable filtration system with two main functions: to ensure that new dirty fluid often contaminated during handling, is delivered to the system at a specific cleanliness; and to permit periodic clean up of existing fluid to original condition. 38 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 8

141 Specification Quick access zero leakage 3 /4 -.5 NH hose connections Non conductive carrying handle.7 bar differential visual indicator 4 minimum element removal clearance Removable element 28mm 3 /4 wire reinforced flexible outlet hose,.6m (63 inches) length inlet hose,.6m (63 inches) length 3 /4 wire reinforced flexible outlet hose,.6m (63 inches) length 3 /4.5 NH hose thread (outlet) Motor is UL recognised & CSA listed Vibration isolating rubber feet 4-pls On/off switch Inlet 95mm (7.68 ) 5mm (2. ) Outlet 52mm (5.98 ) Alternative customer selectable inlet and outlet ports (plugged) Visible & easily cleanable inlet strainer 394mm (5.57 ) 39 Portable filtration systems

142 Portable Hydraulic Filtration Systems Guardian Ordering Information and Product Configurator Standard products table Part number Supercedes Model (fluorocarbon) Motor option Element (μ) Options Plug type Replacement element GT4EQUK GT4EQEUR GT4E2QIND F3-GT4E--Q--UK F3-GT4E--Q--EUR F3-GT4E-2-Q--IND GT4E GT4E GT4E 2 Q Q Q UK EUR IND G4396Q G4396Q G4396Q Product configurator Model (fluorocarbon) Motor options Element (μ) Options Plug type GT4E 22/24 VAC Q None UK United Kingdom 2 3 * VAC ~ 24 Vdc 2Q 5Q 2Q Microglass 6 Quick disconnect hose connections EUR IND CL Europe Industrial 3 pin * version only ~ Battery clamps (24Vdc Only) 25W 4W Wire mesh 74W WR Water removal Replacement elements Guardian replacement elements Part number G4396Q G4394Q G4395Q G4397Q G44 G44 G442 G443 Micron rating WR Media type Microglass III Microglass III Microglass III Microglass III Wire mesh Wire mesh Wire mesh Water removal Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 4 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 8

143 Hydraulic Service Equipment Filtration Unit MAX 5 I/min - 6 bar 4 Portable filtration systems

144 Hydraulic Service Equipment Filtration Unit Features & Benefits Features Single phase and three phase motor options 5 l/min flow Red/green visual indicator Robust construction Spin-on element Lightweight design Advantages Flexibility of power output Fluid transfer at a controlled rate Clear indication of condition during operation Reliability designed in Easy change element Easy to locate when and where required Benefits End user choice dependent on application Reliable fluid transfer from drum to system High visibility during operation Designed to be used even in the most demanding conditions micron Abs. elements Take the unit to the application. It s that easy Typical Applications Fluid transfer Small lubrication systems Constant flushing loops Maintenance flushing Offline filtration in circuits where pressure and flow pulses are expected The Parker Filtration Service Equipment. Designed to offer both permanent offline cleaning where higher levels of contamination are expected and portable additional clean-up capability as part of your preventative maintenance package. 42 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 9

145 Specification Electric motor Frame Size: IEC Frame 63. Foot and flange D (Flange IEC.F5). Totally enclosed fan cooled. Windings: 38/42 volt 3 ph/5 Hz, 22 Volt ph/5 Hz Volt ph/5 Hz. Power:.8 kw ( /4 hp). Speed: 4 rev/min. It is recommended that the Unit is wired independently from the main system when permanently installed, to facilitate the simple changing of the filter element without interrupting the main system. Filtration unit description The Parker Filtration Unit consists of an electric motor directly coupled to a hydraulic pump, which has a built in bypass fitted and spin on filter element. Fluid drawn in at pump inlet is circulated through the filter element and is thus cleaned before being delivered from the outlet port. A built in bypass valve safeguards the element in the event of blockage and returns oil to the pump inlet, this ensures that all fluid output from the unit is filtered, whatever the operating conditions. A visual element condition indicator is fitted to the pump. A unit is available without electric motor for customers who prefer to supply their own. See installation notes and part numbers for ordering. Pump and bypass valve Pump: Lobe type for quiet running. Flow: 5 l/min. Connections: Inlet G /2 ( /2 BSP). OutletG 3 /8 ( 3 /8 BSP). Bypass Valve: Cracks at.5 bar approximately. Bypassed oil is recirculated within the pump. Bypassed oil is reintroduced into the inlet port and does not pass the filter. Bypass operates when the element is contaminated and needs replacing. This condition will be made clear by the visual indicator. The Bypass Valve could also open when being used with high viscosity fluids, thus effectively reducing the unit output. Filter and condition indicator Filter Type: Rapid replacement spin-on can with μ cellulose element. Ensure that end clearance (2mm) is available to permit element withdrawal. μ nominal. MXR855 Visual indicator Has green and red zones on the dial. Needle in the green zone indicates normal operation. When the needle enters the red zone, the bypass valve will permit a flow of oil to return to the pump inlet The element will then need to be replaced. The bypass is fully open when the needle is at the extreme of the red sector. Sound level The Filtration Unit under normal conditions will operate at a sound pressure level of approximately 65 dba. Installation Details mm (inches) 55 (6.) (3.94) A 432 (7.) 66 (2.6) 5 (4.3) 7 (2.8) 77 (6.97) 75 (2.95) 9 CRS (3.54) 4 x Ø7 4 x (.27) 45 (.77) 8 (.3) 47 (5.78) 3 /8 BSP (G 3 /8) 2 CRS (4.76) 3 (5.6) Ø4 (5.5) Ø4 (5.5) Ø25 (4.92) /2 BSP (G /2) 2 (.79) Ø94 (3.7) Single Three phase phase Dimension A (8.7) (7.24) Dimension B (.77) (.98) 43 Portable filtration systems

146 Hydraulic Service Equipment Filtration Unit Sectioned Detail Outlet Pump delivery of oil 9 L (235 USG)/HR μ Multipass tested element M Inlet Out Circuit symbol Enlargement of bypass valve In Various electronic motor options Integral bypass Installation and Operational Notes The Filtration Unit is suitable for mineral based oils. Maximum viscosity at start up condition 85 centistokes-minimum viscosity 8 centistokes. Note that at 85 centistokes output will be reduced due to opening of bypass. Maximum operating temperature +9 C (94 F). The inlet pipe should be as large and as short as convenient to reduce inlet depression to a minimum. It should not be less than 2mm (.47 ) internal diameter. Suction element SE75 is supplied with all assemblies and must be installed. Ensure that a minimum 75mm (2.95 ) head of oil is maintained above the suction element. The outlet pipe should be as large as possible to reduce the possibility of delivery pressure exceeding the bypass valve setting. It should not be less than mm (.39 ) internal diameter. The discharge end of this pipe should always be below the oil surface to minimise aeration. It is equally important, to ensure the ends of the inlet and outlet pipes are as far apart as possible. It is recommended that a baffle be positioned between the suction and return pipes, to give maximum circulation of oil. Installation details 2742 The Filtration Unit is available without an electrical motor, any type motor may be used of identical frame, flange and shaft size to that stated in the specification. Remove the key, fitted to electric motor shaft. There are four nuts and bolts M8-.25mm thread supplied loose, the pump housing is complete with a shaft adaptor with internal drive pin. To fit pump to electric motor simply insert drive shaft of motor into the pump drive adaptor ensuring the drive pin engages in shaft keyway and that the locating spigot are correctly engaged. Complete the assembly by fitting the four nuts, bolts and washers. 44 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 9

147 Ideal Application Element withdrawal clearance minimum 2 (.78) Inlet G /2 ( /2 BSP) Suction flange Outlet G 3 /8 ( 3 /8 BSP) Return bush 9 CTRS (3.54) 4-off holes Ø7 (motor fleet) tap M6 for installation Element condition indicator Green area bypass closed Entering red area bypass cracked Extreme of red area bypass fully open. 7 (2.75) 75 (2.95) minimum 2 (.47) 2 CTRS (4.4) 2 bore minimum SE75 Suction element 25 minimum (9.84) Oil level bore minimum (.39) Baffle recommended Ordering Information Standard products table Part number Description μ filtration pump complete with 3 phase electric motor 274 (38/42/5 Hz H.E.F.C class F) visual indicator μ filtration pump without electric motor (supplied with x nuts,bolts and washers) visual indicator μ filtration pump complete with single phase electric 2743 motor (22/5 Hz T.E.F.C class F) visual indicator μ filtration pump complete with single phase electric 2744 motor (/5 Hz T.E.F.C class F) visual indicator Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for Availability Weight 5.92 Kg (3.2 lbs).5 Kg (3.3 lbs) 6.2 Kg (3.64 lbs) 6.2 Kg (3.64 lbs) Replacement elements MXR855 (μ nominal) 45 Portable filtration systems

148 The ch ice is perfectly clear anything possible.

149 Portable Filtration Trolley MF Series MAX 38 I/min 47 Portable filtration systems

150 Portable Filtration Trolley MF Series Features & Benefits The MF Portable Filtration System is ideal for: Off-line contamination control of fluid systems Replenishing installations with filtered fluid Emptying waste fluid quickly The MF Filter system is designed for on-site preventive maintenance of fluid systems. Two high capacity filters are used, with fluid passing through a primary clean-up filter and then through the final polishing filter giving highly effective and reliable contamination control. Two high capacity filters, complete with indicators element condition Filters incorporate standard Parker media. 38 l/min pressure balanced gear 345rpm electric motor with themal overload protection Robust all welded steel trolley, complete with drip tray and rubber tyred wheels Complete with stowable hoses Fluid flow path through MF portable filtration system when viewed from front, electrical switch to rear Typical Applications Paper mills Injection and blow moulding equipment Industrial & mobile equipment Transferring fluid from drums or storage tanks to system reservoirs Off-line conditioning of existing fluids Complimenting existing system filtration The Parker Filtration MF portable filtration system. Parkers portable filtration units are designed for on-site preventative maintenance of fluid systems. An internal pump draws fluid through a primary clean-up filter and then pushes the fluid through a high quality polishing filter to remove particulate contamination down to 4μm (c) absolute. Water can also be removed by installing Parker s Par-Gel water removal elements to the outlet filter. Once the water comes into contact with the Polymer element it will be removed from the fluid. An all round solution for contamination control in your critical system 48 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 2

151 Specification Pump drive options:.75kw Electric motor 22/24v A.C. Single phase 5HZ.75kW Electric motor V A.C. Single phase 5HZ. Pump: 38 l/min pressure balanced gear pump. Filters: Moduflow CF2. & RF2. filters, refer to brochure 235-GB. Electrical details: On/Off switch. 2 metre cable. Weight: 45.4 kg. Fluid compatibility: Suitable for use with mineral oils. For other fluids, please consult Parker Filtration. Max recommended fluid viscosity: 8 cst. Seals:. Filter elements: Inlet - synthetic, stainless steel mesh optional. Outlet - Q Microglass III, other μ ratings and WR optional. Filter bypass valve settings: Inlet -.2 bar (3 psi). Outlet -.7 bar (25 psi). Visual indicator: 3 band visual differential (clean, change, bypass). Construction: Cart frame - steel, filter head - aluminium. Filter bowl - steel, hoses - PVC standard. Motor options: 22/24 VAC. VAC. Operating temperatures: -4 C to 66 C. Installation Details Portable filtration systems

152 Portable Filtration Trolley MF Series Ordering Information Standard products table Part number MF4SAQUK MF4SAQEUR MF24SAQIND Supercedes MF--4SA-Q--UK MF--4SA-Q--EUR MF-2-4SA-Q--IND Model (fluorocarbon) MF MF MF Motor option 2 Inlet element (924448) 4SA 4SA 4SA Outlet element (924453Q) Q Q Q Options Plug type UK EUR IND Replacement elements Inlet Outlet Q Q Q Product configurator Model (fluorocarbon) Motor options Inlet element options (μ) Outlet element options (μ) Options Plug type MF 22/24 VAC 4SA Synthetic Q Microglass III None UK Moulded 3 pin 2 * VAC 4W 2Q 74W Stainless steel mesh Stainless steel mesh Stainless steel mesh 2Q 5Q 2Q WR Microglass III Microglass III Microglass III Par<>Gel water removal 3 Magnet pack EUR IND* Moulded 2 pin 3 pin industrial Replacement elements MF replacement inlet elements Part number Q Q seals Micron rating Fluorocarbon seals Media type Synthetic Microglass III Stainless steel Stainless steel Microglass III Stainless steel Synthetic Stainless steel Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. MF replacement outlet elements Part number Q 93368Q Q Q Q 92539Q 9254Q Q seals Micron rating WR Fluorocarbon seals WR Media type Microglass III Microglass III Microglass III Microglass III Water removal Microglass III Microglass III Microglass III Microglass III Water removal 5 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 2

153 Portable Purification Systems PVS Series - Models 85, 6, 2, 8 and 27 5 Portable filtration systems

154 Portable Purification Systems PVS Series Effects of Water Contamination Water is one of the most common and destructive contaminants in a fluid system. When water contaminates a system, it can cause serious problems such as: Corrosion by etching metal Fluid breakdown, reduction of lubricating properties, additive precipitation, and oil oxidation Reduced dielectric strength Abrasive wear in hydraulic components Fluid type Hydraulic fluid Lubrication fluid Transformer fluid Typical saturation points PPM %.3%.4%.5% Free water occurs when oil becomes saturated and cannot hold any more water. This water is usually seen as cloudy oil or puddles of water at the bottom of an oil reservoir. Water which is absorbed into the oil is called dissolved water. At higher temperatures, oil has the ability to hold more water in the dissolved stage due to the expansion of oil molecules. As the oil cools, this ability reverses and free water will appear where not visible before. In addition to temperature, fluid type also determines the saturation point for your system (see chart above). Principles of Operation Contaminated oil is drawn into the Parker portable purification system by a vacuum of 25 In/Hg. The oil passes through the in-line low watt density heater/s where the oil is heated to an optimum temperature of 66 C (5 F). The oil then enters the distillation column where it is exposed to the vacuum through the use of dedicated dispersal elements. This increases the exposed surface area of the oil and converts the water to a vapor form, which is then drawn through the condenser by the vacuum pump. The vapour returns to water and drops into the condensate holding tank - this can then be drained off at a later stage. The water-free oil falls to the bottom of the vacuum chamber and is passed through a final particulate removal filter by a heavy duty lube oil pump. Clean dry oil re-enters the reservoir/system via the outlet port. 25 % Bearing Life Remaining % Water In Oil 52 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 2

155 Applications for PVS Portable Purification Systems Paper mills - Dryer lubrication - Hydraulic - Compressor lubrication - Calenders Steel mills - Bearing lubrication - Continuous casters - Press roll lubrication Power generation - Turbine oil - Transformer oil - EHC systems Industrial/aerospace - Test stands - Machine tools Air Cooled Condenser Condensate holding tank Vacuum pump Caster wheels Low watt density heater Self diagnosing controls include: Programmable thermostat Reverse pole switch/phase fail % RH display Liquid level sight glass Forklift guides Variable flow circuit Moisture sensor Condensate holding tank Compact size Forklift guides Lifting eyes Programmable thermostat Automatic operation Features Advantages Benefits Reverse pole switch/phase fail High temperature safety circuit Circuit breakers utilised in electrical panel Available with EPR seals and stainless steel Solid state heater contacter Allows oil to heat to required temperature quickly Real-time water content indication Captures removed water/solvents Large enough to provide long service interval Smallest envelope in the industry Ease of portability Provides safe and secure method to lift unit Maintains oil within C Prevents overheating oil Unattended use Change motor rotation for different power source locations Shuts down heater if primary contacters fail Oil can never exceed 2 C (25 F) No fuses to replace Simple diagnostics Phosphate ester compatible Longer more reliable service life Starts removing water quickly Indicates when safe water content level is obtained Eliminate potential hazard of exhausting to atmosphere Reduced maintenance costs Fits through doorways and down narrow aisles Increased use Employee safety Easily transported Unattended operation Increases oil life Reduced labour costs Increased running time Flexibility, less maintenance Prevents incorrect rotation Prevents system damage Worker safety Fewer spare parts, increased uptime Reduced maintenance Specifically designed for application Reduced downtime 53 Portable filtration systems

156 Portable Purification Systems PVS Series Typical Performance Potential contaminant PVS performance Tank size 227 litres (5 gallons) Solid particulate ISO cleanliness code* 4/3/ attainable Run time 62 minutes Water Removes % of free water, 8-9% of dissolved water. Parker model PVS 6 (37.9 l/min) Air Gases * When utilising 2Q media Removes % of free air, 9% of dissolved air. Removes % of free gases, 9% of dissolved gases. PVS (Vacuum dehydration) compared to other technologies Centrifuge units Removes free water only; has difficulty breaking stable emulsions; larger envelope dimensions but lower flows; higher initial and operating costs. Desiccant units Have limited water removal capability due to absorbing material; only removes air ingressed particles; expensive compared to the volume of water removed. Coalescer units Removes free water only; has difficulty breaking stable emulsions; does not work well in viscous fluids (>23cSt); much larger in size compared to PVS. Water content (ppm) Start:, PPM (.%) Stop: 5 PPM(.5%) Contamination level Start: ISO 2/8/6 Stop: ISO 6/4/ Start Stop Estimated Water Removal Time 5 ppm (.5%) to 5 ppm (.5%) Reservoir Size (Litres) Total Hours PVS85 PVS6 PVS 2 PVS 8 PVS Reservoir Size (Gallons) 54 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 2

157 Portable Purification Systems PVS 85 Specification Flow rate: 9 lpm (4.2 gpm). Height: 65mm (65 ). Width: 825.5mm (32.5 ). Length: 26.5mm (47.5 ). Weight: kg (65 lbs). Seal material: Fluorocarbon (EPR opt.). Condensate tank: 5.5 ltrs (3.4 gals). Dispersal elements:. Minimum operating capacity: 8.9 ltrs (4.2 gals). Vacuum (max): 25 In/Hg. Viscosity (max): 8 cst (5sus) disposable. 46 cst (25 sus) packed tower. Outlet pressure (max): 4. bar (6 psi). Ports: 3/4 JIC (male) inlet. 3/4 JIC (male) outlet. FLA (full load amps): 5-4 amps. (Depending on voltage used). Replacement elements Particulate 2Q (2 micron) Q 5Q (5 micron) Q Q ( micron) Q 2Q (2 micron) Q Dispersal Disposable 9338 (coalescing) Packed tower (cleanable) 2QE 5QE QE 2QE Coreless Q 93362Q Q Q PVS 85 flow diagram Heater 55 Portable filtration systems

158 Portable Purification Systems PVS 6 Specification Flow rate: 38 lpm (8.3 gpm). Height: 638.3mm (64.5 ). Width: 7.6mm (44 ). Length: 549.4mm (6 ). Weight: 48.2 kg (9 lbs). Seal material: Fluorocarbon (EPR opt.). Condensate tank: 5.5 ltrs (3.4 gals). Dispersal elements: 2. Minimum operating capacity: 22.7 ltrs (5. gals). Vacuum (max): 25 In/Hg. Viscosity (max): 8 cst (5sus) disposable. 46 cst (25 sus) packed tower. Outlet pressure (max): 4. bar (6 psi). Ports: JIC (male) inlet. JIC (male) outlet. FLA (full load amps): amps. (Depending on options & voltages). Replacement elements Particulate 2Q (2 micron) Q 5Q (5 micron) Q Q ( micron) Q 2Q (2 micron) Q Dispersal Disposable 9338 (coalescing) Packed tower (cleanable) 2QE 5QE QE 2QE Coreless Q 93362Q Q Q PVS 6 flow diagram 56 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 2

159 Portable Purification Systems PVS 2 Specification Flow rate: 76 lpm (6.7 gpm). Height: 65mm (65 ). Width: 7.6mm (44 ). Length: 549.4mm (6 ). Weight: 73. kg (55 lbs). Seal material: Fluorocarbon (EPR opt.). Condensate tank: 3.4 ltrs (6.9 gals). Dispersal elements: 4. Minimum operating capacity: 4.6 ltrs (9. gals). Vacuum (max): 25 In/Hg. Viscosity (max): 8 cst (5sus) disposable. 46 cst (25 sus) packed tower. Outlet pressure (max): 4. bar (6 psi). Ports: /2 NPTF inlet. JIC (male) outlet. FLA (full load amps): 3-48 amps. (Depending on options & voltages). Replacement elements Dispersal Disposable 9338 (coalescing) Packed tower (cleanable) 2QE 5QE QE 2QE Coreless Q 93362Q Q Q PVS 2 flow diagram 57 Portable filtration systems

160 Portable Purification Systems PVS 8 Specification Flow rate: 4 lpm (25 gpm). Height: 65mm (65 ). Width: 66.8mm (42 ). Length: 943.mm (76.5 ). Weight: 56.7 kg (255 lbs). Seal material: Fluorocarbon (EPR opt.). Condensate tank: 3.4 ltrs (6.9 gals). Dispersal elements: 8. Minimum operating capacity: 68. ltrs (4.98 gals). Vacuum (max): 25 In/Hg. Viscosity (max): 8 cst (5sus) disposable. 46 cst (25 sus) packed tower. Outlet pressure (max): 4. bar (6 psi). Ports: 2 NPTF inlet..5 JIC (male) outlet. FLA (full load amps): V/6hz. Replacement elements Dispersal Disposable 9338 (coalescing) Packed tower (cleanable) Coreless 2QE 5QE QE 2QE Q 93362Q Q Q 58 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 2

161 Portable Purification Systems PVS 27 Specification Flow rate: 7 lpm (37.4 gpm). Height: 65mm (65 ). Width: 66.8mm (42 ). Length: 943.mm (76.5 ). Weight: 56.7 kg (255 lbs). Seal material: Fluorocarbon (EPR opt.). Condensate tank: 3.4 ltrs (6.9 gals). Dispersal elements: 8. Minimum operating capacity: 68. ltrs (4.98 gals). Vacuum (max): 25 In/Hg. Viscosity (max): 8 cst (5sus) disposable. 46 cst (25 sus) packed tower. Outlet pressure (max): 4. bar (6 psi). Ports: 3 NPTF inlet. 2 NPTF outlet. FLA (full load amps): V/6hz. Replacement elements Dispersal Disposable 9338 (coalescing) Packed tower (cleanable) Coreless 2QE 5QE QE 2QE Q 93362Q Q Q 59 Portable filtration systems

162 Portable Purification Systems PVS Ordering Information Product configurator Select the desired symbol (in the correct position) to construct a model code. Box - Box 2 PVS Box 3 6 Box 4 46 Box 5 DS Box 6 D Box 7 5Q Box 8 - Box 9 2 Box AC Box DFL Box Box 2 Box 3 Box 4 Seals Basic assembly Flow rate Power supply Description Description Description Model Description Fluorocarbon EPR None E8 Portable Purification System PVS 9 lpm (4.2 gpm) 38 lpm (8.3 gpm) 76 lpm (6.7 gpm) 4 lpm (25. gpm) 7 lpm (37.4 gpm) VAC, 3P, 5HZ 46VAC, 3P, 6HZ 575VAC, 3P, 6HZ 38VAC, 3P, 5HZ 46VAC, 3P, 6HZ 55VAC, 3P, 6HZ VAC, 3P, 5HZ VAC, 3P, 6HZ 46 55VAC, 3P, 6HZ 55 38VAC, 3P, 5HZ VAC, 3P, 6HZ 46 55VAC, 3P, 6HZ 55 38VAC, 3P, 5HZ VAC, 3P, 6HZ 46 55VAC, 3P, 6HZ 55 Box 5 Box 6 Box 7 Vacuum pump Dispersal element Particulate element Pressure setting Description Description Dry sealed DS Disposable (coalescing) D 2 micron Microglass III 2Q Liquid ring LR Packed tower (cleanable for use with viscious or highly contaminated fluids) P 5 micron Microglass III micron Microglass III 2 micron Microglass III 5Q Q 2Q Note: Above elements are rated for Beta 2+ (99.5% efficiency) Box 8 Box 9 Box Box Filter housing Heater Condenser Options Description Model Description Description Description 8CN-2 IL8 (39 ) Ecoglass III upgrade None E Note: IL8 option is available on 6 models, and is standard on 2 models and larger KW (3 phase) 2 KW 24 KW 24 KW 36 KW 48 KW Air cooled Liquid cooled AC LC Pneumatic wheels Auto condensate drain Dirty filter light Resetable hour meter Sight flow indicator Inlet control valve PW ACD DFL RHM SFI ICV CE marked CE CSA marked CSA Explosion proof EXP (Class I, Division II, Zone I and II) Note : Contact parker for part number profile availability 6 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 2

163 Water Removal Filter Elements Par-Gel 6 Water removal filter elements

164 Water Removal Filter Elements Par-Gel Par-Gel filter elements are an effective tool in controlling water related problems in hydraulic power and lubrication systems. There is more to proper fluid maintenance than just removing particulate matter. You need to remove water as well. Parker has developed Par-Gel water removal elements to be used in combination with particulate filters to provide significant benefits. Less component wear, consequently less component generated contaminants. Significant reduction of costly downtime and replacement of failed components. Increased efficiency of the system, thereby improving machine productivity. Less frequent replacement and disposal of contaminated fluid. Reduced chance of catastrophic failure..% Water PPM.3% Water 3 PPM Water as a contaminant. Whether you used a mineral-base or synthetic fluid, each will have a water saturation point. Above this point, the fluid cannot dissolve or hold any more water. This excessive water is referred to as free or emulsified water. As little as.3% (3 ppm) by volume can saturate an hydraulic fluid. Many mineral-base and synthetic fluids, unless specifically filtered or treated in some way, will contain levels of water above their saturation point. Water is everywhere! Storage and handling. Fluids are constantly exposed to water and water vapour while being handled and stored. For instance, outdoor storage of tanks and drums is common. Water settles on top of tanks and drums and infiltrates the container, or is introduced when the container is opened to add or remove fluid. In-service. Water can get into the system via worn cylinder and actuator seals, or through reservoir openings. Water can come into contact with these entry points through water based cutting fluids or when water and/or steam are used for cleaning. 62 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 22

165 Specification Water in the system creates oxides, slimes and resins. Corrosion is an obvious by-product and creates further contaminants in the system. The effect is compounded, as you now have both particulate contaminant and water working together. The particulate contamination can be as simple as rust flaking from reservoir walls. Anti-wear additives break down in the presence of water and form acids. The combination of water, heat and dissimilar metals encourages galvanic action. Pitted and corroded metal surfaces and finishes result. Further complications occur as temperature drops and the fluid has less ability to hold water. As the freeze point is reached, ice crystals form, adversely affecting total system function. Operating functions may become slowed or erratic. Electrical conductivity becomes a problem when water contamination weakens insulating properties of fluid (decreases dielectric kv strength). Testing your fluid for water. Condensation is also a prime water source. As fluid cools in a reservoir, the temperature drop condenses water vapour on interior surfaces, which in turn causes rust. Rust scale in the reservoir eventually becomes particulate contamination in the system. A simple crackle test will tell you if there is water in your fluid. Simply take a metal dish or spoon with a small amount of fluid. Apply a flame under the container with a match. If bubbles rise and crackle from the point of applied heat, you have free water. Microbial growth as a contaminant. Once water enters a system, growth of micro-organisms begins. Since water is one of the end products of the breakdown of hydrocarbon fluid, once started, the process is somewhat self-sustaining. Slime is evidence of microbial growth, as is the apparent increase in viscosity of the fluid, obnoxious odour and discoloured fluid. The results are: short fluid life, degraded surface finish and rapid corrosion. Water generated damage and operating problems. Corrosion Accelerated abrasive wear Bearing fatigue Additive breakdown Increased acid level Visosity variance Electrical conductivity Forms of water in fluid Dissolved water below saturation point Free water emulsified or in droplets*. ParTest fluid analysis. For complete analysis, Parker offers Par-Test fluid analysis. Your Parker representative can supply you with a fluid container, mailing carton and appropriate forms to identify your fluid and its use. An independent lab performs complete spectrometric analysis, particle counts, viscosity and water content. Results are sent directly to the requester. * Excessive free water must be removed from the system before filtering is attempted. In systems with gross amounts of water (% to 2% by volume), settling or vacuum dehydration should be considered before using Par-Gel filter elements. 63 Water removal filter elements

166 Water Removal Filter Elements Par-Gel Features & Benefits Removing water. Using a Par-Gel water removal element is an effective way of removing free water contamination from your hydraulic system. It is highly effective at removing free water from mineral-base and synthetic fluids. The Par-Gel filter media is a highly absorbent copolymer laminate with an affinity for water. However, hydraulic or lubrication fluid passes freely through it and the water is bonded to the filter media. How many filter elements will I need? Suppose you would like to remove water from contaminated oil stored in a 75 litre tank. The tank is found to have ppm of water (very contaminated). The circulation rate will be 4 Ipm for the 4cSt fluid. Example: How many single length Modulflow elements will be needed to reduce the water to normal saturation levels. To find the answer, use the conversion charts and capacity curves for the Modulflow element.. ppm start 3 ppm finish = 7 ppm removed 2. 7 ppm water x. =.7%.7% x 75 litres =.53 litres water total 3. Use the capacity curve for Modulflow element P/N Capacity = 8cc at 4cSt & 4 Ipm to pressure drop of.7 bar. (See graph) 8cc x. Ipm =.76 Ipm/element CC litres total water = 7 elements*.76 Ipm/element * The replacement value of this fluid may range from 5. to 45. ( 2 to 5 gallon). An estimated element cost of 5. each, the saving could be as much as 3.! Photo above shows dry Par-Gel filter media and the same media swollen with absorbed water. Parker technology and expertise at your disposal. Choosing the correct filters can save money and minimise problems caused by particulate and water contaminants in hydraulic and lubricating fluids. Parker provides hard data and advice on choosing from a wide range of filter configurations, flow patterns and flow pressure capabilities. Using Par-Gel filter elements saves money in fluid and replacement component costs. Also, the frequency of fluid disposal and the problems associated with it are greatly reduced. Filter capacity. There are no accepted and approved water capacity testing or reporting standards. Consequently, there is virtually no way to compare one element capacity with another. It is also difficult to simulate a specific application in testing...making it hard to predict field performance. Why the discrepancies? Water removal media capacity is the result of the interplay of four variables: flow rate, viscosity, bypass setting and the media itself. Here s an example: two identical elements, testing the same fluid, varying only the flow rate. Element A Element A Flow rate: Ipm 38 Ipm Viscosity: 5 cst 5 cst Test capacity: 425 ml 36 ml This is a 5% reduction in capacity, due to changing only the flow rate! Now, look at what happens when the test flow rate is the same and the viscosity is changed. Element B Element B Flow rate: 76 Ipm 76 Ipm Viscosity: 4 cst 5 cst Test capacity: 25 ml 55 ml Twice the capacity can be achieved just by manipulating the test viscosity! Naturally, having a lower bypass valve setting limits the capacity. Since the life of the element is measured in pressure drop, using higher bypass valve settings will increase apparent life (all other conditions equal). We recommend.7 bar bypass valves to get adequate life from Par-Gel filter elements. Capacity also depends on the media itself. That s why Parker spent two years researching the media used in Par-Gel filter elements. We tested all known media, and worked closely with our suppliers to achieve maximum water absorbency. 64 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 22

167 Specification How we report: Our goal is to give our customers usable data. Why show test results at a lower viscosity (3cSt for example), if the typical application uses 4cSt fluid? So, we report at 4cSt to give typical field application capacity, and 5cSt for competitive comparisons. But keep in mind when comparing, you still have to consider flow rate. What it all means: You deserve to know how an element will work for you in your applications. So, we test and report our data in such a way that it helps you predict element performance and life. Be wary of claims that say... this element holds one litre (or 5 litres) of water. What was the test flow rate? fluid viscosity? bypass valve setting? Was it run as a single pass or multipass test? Rely on Parker to give you the facts and data you need. Our goal is to better protect your systems and components...and we start up-front by telling you what you need to know. Is there any other way to do business? Add it all up. Broad selection, competitive prices, off-the-shelf availability, on-time delivery, high-efficiency filter media, reduced system contaminant and longer component life. When you add it all up, we think you ll agree... Conversion Factors If you have: Multiply by: To get: mg/l.9 % ppm. % ml. cc gallons 4.54 litres Typical Saturation Points Fluid type PPM % Hydraulic 3.3 Lubrication 4.4 Transformer 5.5 Parker Par-Gel water removal filter elements are available in these standard Parker filter housings: Fluid model series Length Element part number 4CN- Single CN-2 Double CN- Single CN-2 Double 9348 Guardian Single 9329 Moduflow RF 2- (MF) Single Ideal Applications for Par-Gel filter elements Guardian Portable Filtration System Filtration Trolley 65 Water removal filter elements

168 Notes 66 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK.

169 FMU Δp-Indicators and Pressure Indicators Indicators Series MAX 42 bar 67 Filter indicators

170 FMU Δp-Indicators Indicators Series Features & Benefits Features Indicators fatigue tested to full pressure rating Cartridge screw-in type indicators Visual, electrical and electronic indicators available Several indication settings Visual indicators Electrical indicator with change-over switch Electrical indicator with 4 LEDs Programmable and ATEX certified indicators available Advantages Reliable indicators for heavy duty applications Easy mounting Check element condition at a glance Right style for the application Optimized for each bypass setting Local monitoring of the element condition Option of Normally Open (N..) and Normally Closed (N.C.) function Thermal lock-out Visual early warning with yellow LED Pre-alarm with yellow LED and wired output Alarm with red LED and wired output Right indicators for special applications Benefits Reliable and continuous control of the filter in all applications Reliable sealing, no leakage Optimises element life, prevents bypassing Match your system s electrical connections Right indicator for application Reliable low cost indicator Approved for low voltage and high voltage use including machine control systems and PLC s No false alarm because of low temperature oil Allows time to schedule element change Indicates upcoming element change Clear indication for element change Improved machine surveillance Typical Applications Industrial equipment Mobile equipment Marine/offshore applications The Parker FMU Series Differential Pressure Indicators The FMU range of filter condition indicators, are designed for use on a wide range of Parker filters and suitable for competitive interchange (consult Parker Filtration for details). Ideal for giving accurate visual, electronic or electrical feedback of filter element condition, in order to facilitate effective maintenance and ensuring hydraulic systems, marine/mobile or industrial are protected from particulate contamination. 68 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 23

171 Specification Maximum operating pressure: 42 bar (25 bar for aluminium). Maximum differential pressure: 2 bar. Working temperature range: -2 C to +85 C. Material of housing: Brass, aluminium or stainless steel. Seals: Fluoroelastomer, or EPDM. The differential pressure values of standard indicator models:.2 bar ±..5 bar ± bar ±.2 5. bar ±.4 7. bar ± bar ±.5 (Indicators for other differential pressure values are optional). FMU Δp Indicators are typically used with the following filters: Marine filters: 22, 235, 24, 245, 26, 265, 27, 2 and 252. Types: 235, 24, 245 and 26 require FMU-Block for connecting indicator to the filter. Medium pressure filters series: 45M and 3M. High pressure filters series: 7L, 7T, 7B, 5, 7 and 72. High pressure filters without bypass valve: 7L, 7T, 7B, 7 and 72. Medium and low pressure filter series; Note for PD Range only 2.5 bar indicators are available 5CN, 4CN, 8CN, 22PD, 32PD, 5P, 3P, 4RF, 5RF, IL8, 2M, 22M, 6P, 26P, 36P High pressure filters 8P, 28P, 38P, FDA, FDB U2H U2H U2H U4M U4H.5 bar 2.5 bar 7. bar.2 and 2.5 bar 2.5 and 5. bar 69 Filter indicators

172 FMU Δp-Indicators Indicators Series FMUT Electrical U2H model Contact configuration U2H model P-P2 No connect Rotating part 36 Fixed part A U2H U4M U4H A B C Ø6.2 Ø9.78 Ø8.83 ±.5 ±.6 ±.6 D 3 /4-6 7 /8-4 7 /8-4 UNF-2A UNF-2A UNF-2A COM Indication (N.O) Normally closed (N.C) Pin 2 3 P high pressure P2 low pressure C D B U4M model U4H model Enclosure class IP65 Electrical connector DIN 4365 Overvoltage category II (EN6-) Contact configuration U4M & U4H P-P2 B P2 low pressure Operation Red colour visible when indicator on COM Normally closed (N.C) Pin 3 U2H model ø24 Normally open (N.O) No connect 2 FMUM3 Visual Auto Reset/FMUM Visual Manual Reset R-type push here for reset Operation Rated voltage 25Vac 25Vac 8Vdc 4Vdc 3Vdc 25Vdc 25Vdc U4M model C D Red colour visible when indicator on P high pressure 3 2 U4H model C D Non-inductive load (A) Inductive load (A) Resistive load Lamp load Inductive load Motor load N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O Inrush current (A) N.C. 2 max. N.O. max. High pressure Low pressure /4-6 UNF-2A Note: Only FPUM3 visual auto reset available Low pressure for models U4M and U4H. FMUM not available. High pressure + + ø ø /8-4UNF - 2A 7 /8-4UNF - 2A 32 7 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 23

173 FMUF Electronic Contact configuration U2H model NPN PNP 3 FMU F NPN Normally open 2 (N.O) 4 Load Load max 3 ma +V Vdc V Rotating part 36 Green LED Yellow LED s Red LED Fixed part A U2H U4M U4H A B C Ø6.2 Ø9.78 Ø8.83 ±.5 ±.6 ±.6 D 3 /4-6 7 /8-4 7 /8-4 UNF-2A UNF-2A UNF-2A FMU F PNP Normally open (N.O) Load Load max 3 ma +V Vdc V High pressure Low pressure C D B U4M model U4H model Thermal lock-out (standard setting +2 C) Indicator operates only when temperature is above setting. Green LED is blinking if temperature is lower. (not in U2H) Ind. press. setting 5% 75% % LED status G Y Y2 R Output 2 active active B Low pressure Enclosure class Electrical connector Input supply voltage *Indication output Output type: IP65 DIN 4365, cable connection PG9 or optinally M2 4-pin + to 36 Vdc max. 3 ma/36 Vdc N.O. or N.C./NPN or PNP Note: Do not connect output terminals or 2 directly (without load) to power supply terminals, because this will damage the equipment. C D High pressure Safety feature: The 25 bar U4M indicator does not fit into the U4H cavity, which is used in 42 bar filters C D FPUL Programmable Dimensions: see FMUF electronic Δp-indicator Programmable Δp-indicator All settings adjustable (settings made via PC) Connections cable and software available from Parker 4 LEDs giving visual indication: Green (G): Power ON Yellow (Y): Pre-alarm (presetting 5%) Yellow 2 (Y2): Pre-alarm 2 (presetting 75%) Red (R): Indication (presetting %) two independently programmable indication outputs can be set independently from each other and LED setting output type: NPN or PNP switching type: N.O. or N.C. setting range:,5... bar thermal lock-out range:... C includes a microchip with memory logs number of alarms: max time indication on (output ): max 92 hours time power on (running hours): max 7 /2 years upload and reset via PC 7 Filter indicators

174 FMU Δp-Indicators Indicators Series Ordering Information Product configurator Box Box 2 FMU M3 Box 3 K Box 4 V Box 5 M Box 6 U4 Box 7 H Box 8 Box Indicator series Filter monitoring unit FMU Box 2 Filter type Differential pressure indicator Visual manual reset Visual autoreset Electrical Electronic 4 LED, PNP, N.O. Electronic 4 LED, NPN, N.O. Electronic 4 LED, PNP, N.C. Electronic 4 LED, NPN, N.C. Programmable with memory logs Ex version * available only with U2 thread M* M3 T F F2 F3 F4 L X Box 3 Indicator setting. bar (4 psi).2 bar (7 psi).5 bar (2 psi) 2.5 bar (35 psi) 5. bar (7 psi) 7. bar (98 psi) 8.5 bar (25 psi) Standard settings: a: U4M, former -W3 b: U4H, former -W6 C: U2H, former -F6 Indicator setting Standard c a c a, b, c b c F G H K M N P Box 4 Seal material Fluoroelastomer EPDM Neopren Seal type B V E N Box 5 Indicator body Aluminium (Box 7, code M) Brass (Box 7, code H) Stainless steel Indicator body A M R Box 6 Thread connection Thread connection 3 /4" - 6UNF-2A 7 /8" - 4UNF-2A U2 U4 Box 7 Max Pressure Max pressure Medium pressure housings (<25 bar) High pressure housings (<42 bar) M H Box 8 Options Standard Other options Options omit factory supplied Note: F and L type indicators. Non-standard thermal lockout settings shown here. Indicator type X: ATEX Δp-indicator Electronic indicator accordant with ATEX 94/9/EC directive: (Ex) II 2 GD Eex mii T6. Degree of protection IP66. For details contact Parker Filtration. Connection cable + software for programmable indicator L Connection cable for PC serial connection and software for indicator settings and utilising memory logs. Ordering : Seal kits (fluroelastomer) Ordering code Indicators with thread connection U2H (former -F6) Indicators with thread connection U4M (former -W3) Indicators with thread connection U4H (former -W6) Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 72 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 23

175 Pressure Indicators for Low Pressure Filters ETF Filter Visual pressure indicator G2 mm (inches) G /8 48 Vdc electrical indicator.2 bar S2/S3 mm (inches) 3 (.22) 25 VAC electrical indicator.2 bar S4 mm (inches) Rotating part (.49) 3 (.8) x3 (.8) 4 (.57) 67 (2.64) HEX (2.2) 44 (.73) C3 2 NO NC 74 (2.9) 32 (.26) (.39) G /8K (.39) HEX 27 (.6) G /8K Fixed part Option Description Connection/Voltage Wiring Part number G2 Visual indicator.2 bar FMUG2FBMG2L S2/S3 Electrical indicator.2 bar 42 Vdc max Select either normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) FMUS2FBMG2L or FMUS3FBMG2L Normally open contacts S4 Electrical indicator.2 bar 25 Vac max NC 2 NO 3 C Indicator PS pressure switch Protective cap with dual cable duct for, 7-2, 3mm diameter cable Indicator PS NO/NC pressure switch Protective cover Normally open contacts 9 75 Amp 6.3x8 terminals 2 4 Switch A/F = COM. 2 = N.C. 3 = N.O. 24 A/F 9 FMUS4FBMG2L Normally closed contacts 74 Normally closed contacts 55 Mx G /8 (BSP) Ø3.5 Mx Ø28 Elec.rating Thread connection Elec.connection Protection Visual indicator M: code G /8: code Specifications 42V / 4A Mx AMP 6.3x.8 terminals + protective cap IP65 (with cap) terminals IP FMUSEBMML (Switch).2 bar FMUSEBMML FMUS4EBMG2L Elec.rating Thread connection Elec.connection Protection Switch type 73 Specifications 42V / 2A G /8 - Mx AMP terminal 6.3x.8 IP65 (terminal IP) NO or NC FMUS2EBMG2L (NO switch) FMUS3EBMG2L (NC switch) Visual indicator.2 bar M: code FMUGEBPML G /8: code FMUG2EBPG2L Filter indicators

176 Notes 74 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK.

177 Reservoir Equipment 75 Reservoir equipment

178 Finding design solutions for reservoir requirements Parker s Filter Division Europe manufactures innovative, lightweight co-polymer reservoirs, that can feature an integrated, patented and environmentally friendly LEIF filter element and an ecological air filter. Ideally suited for mobile hydraulic systems, such as forklift trucks, telescopic handlers and agricultural sprayers, the all-in-one design of the reservoir means that it can be specified as a complete unit, helping mobile equipment manufacturers to cut costs, save time and increase efficiency. The environmentally friendly LEIF (Low Environmental Impact Filter) element has been designed to allow the outer metal filter sleeve to be re-used. As a result, only the contaminated filter medium has to be disposed of as chemical waste, helping to reduce disposal and processing costs by as much as 5%. Connection points for support devices, such as suction pumps, drains or filler openings, can be easily incorporated into the lightweight reservoir, with metal connectors being available for hose couplings, and flange or thread attachments. Each metal connector is moulded into the co-polymer reservoir wall, ensuring a reliable, leak-proof connection between the reservoir and ancillary components. In addition, an oil level indicator can be fully integrated into the design, eliminating the need for level glasses, which are fragile and a potential source of leakage if mounted incorrectly. The dimensions, shape and design of the lightweight reservoir can be fully adapted to meet the specific needs of each customer, with each reservoir being specified as a single unit. This can help OEMs to reduce inventory, assembly and maintenance costs. The co-polymer reservoir forms part of a product family comprising filters and filtration products, which have been designed to combine exceptional levels of performance and reliability in robust, virtually zero maintenance units. 76

179 Reservoir Equipment Environmental Air Filters 77 Reservoir equipment

180 Reservoir Equipment EAB Series Typical Applications Agricultural machines Articulated dump trucks Forestry equipment Wheeled loaders Lubricating systems Excavators Mobile cranes Industrial power units Technical Data The breather has been designed to achieve a low pressure drop and high dirt holding capacity with airflows up to 5 l/min. A compact EAB with airflows up to l/min is also available. Construction: Glass reinforced composite housing with Eco-element. Filter media options: P2: High quality polyester media. 2μm (abs). C5: Polyester media with water-resistant layer..5μm (abs) Q: Glass fibre media..μm (abs) Mounting options: With 6 screws. Includes machine and plate screws, a strainer and gaskets. External threads G 3 /4, G. Internal thread G 3 /4. Options: Visual gauge type vacuum/pressure indicator. Overpressure valve, pressure setting.2 bar. (available for EAB2 only) Advantages of the EAB-breathers: Easy maintenance. Indicator states the need for element change. Quick and easy element change (no tools required). Environmentally friendly: EAB elements contains no metal parts: therefore it can be crushed and burned minimising the volume of waste material. Other features: The optional indicator is located in a safe place inside the housing. Housing includes mounting holes for a padlock, which allows you to increase the security against theft and vandalism. Pressure Drop Curves Δp total = Δp housing + Δp element. The recommended level of the initial pressure drop for this filter is max.2 bar (2. kpa). Δp (kpa) Δp (kpa) GE2 GE6 HC EAB Housing Only EAB2 Housing Only GE2 GE6 HC Δp (kpa) Δp (kpa) C5 Q P EAB Elements EAB2 Elements 3 2 C5 Q P Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 24

181 Specification EAB Optional indicator Ø4 EAB2 Optional indicator Ø4 Holes for locking Holes for locking 68 2 Air flow Q = l/min max * Optional mounting holes * Strainer Ø73 G 3 /4 G 3 /4 or G Ø9 25 * Gasket Air flow Q = 5 l/min max Optional overpressure valve * Optional mounting holes * Strainer Ø73 G 3 /4 G 3 /4 or G Ø9 43 * Gasket * Comes with HC73 * Comes with HC73 Ø5 Ø5 NOTICE! Air filters are an essential part of the system and the element needs to be replaced regularly. 6 hole fixing mounting dimensions 55 6 x 6 Ø4 or M5 73 Mounting 6 mounting holes G external G 3 /4 external G 3 /4 internal HC73 GE6 GE2 GS2 79 Reservoir equipment

182 Reservoir Equipment EAB Series Ordering Information Standard products table Part number Supercedes Model Media Mounting Overpressure valve Indicator Replacement elements EAB2P2HC73V2 EABP2HC73 EAB2P2HC73 EAB2P2GE6 EAB2P2HC73A EAC2P2 EAB2P2HC73-V2 EAB2P2HC73-A EAB2 EAB2 EAB2 EAB2 EAB2 EAC2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 HC73 HC73 HC73 GE6 HC73 V2 A EAB2P2 EAB2P2 EAB2P2 EAB2P2 EAB2P2 EAC2P2 Product configurator Product number Media options Mounting options Overpressure valve options Indicator options EAB2 PO2 2μ abs polyester HC73 6 hole fixing No overpressure valve No indicator EAB C5 Q.5μ abs water resistant.μ abs glass fibre GE2 GE6 GS2 ME33 G 3 /4 external thread G external thread G 3 /4 internal thread M33 x 2 external thread V2.2 bar A Vacuum/pressure gauge Replacement elements Product number Media options EAC2 PO2 2μ abs polyester EAC C5.5μ abs water resistant Q.μ abs glass fibre Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 8 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 24

183 Reservoir Equipment ABL Series Typical Applications The Parker Filtration ABL- and ABL-2 Series Air Filters. Saw mills Agricultural machines Articulated dump trucks Forestry equipment Wheeled loaders Lubricating systems Excavators Industrial power units Mobile cranes Technical Data Assembly: Tank top mounted. Connections: Threads G /4 (ISO 228), /2 (UN-6-2B). Seal material: Seals integrated in LEIF element. Operating temperature range: -2 to +8 C. Filtration media: 3 micron. Flow fatigue characteristics: Filter media is supported so that the optimal fatigue life is achieved. Vacuum indicator: ABL- on request only, ABL-2.4 bar. Visual with latch out memory. Breather housing: High impact strength composite. Filter element: LEIF element. Options: Adaptor with filter connection. Single adaptor. Breather with integrated pressure relieve valve for pressurised tank on request only. LEIF elements can be applied for hydraulic fluids only. For other fluids contact Parker Filtration. Pressure Drop Curves ABL ABL Δp (mbar) Δp (mbar) Reservoir equipment

184 Reservoir Equipment ABL Series Specification ABL- ABL-2 5 (no indicator) 4 (35.5) NOTICE! Air filters are an essential part of the system and the element needs to be replaced regularly. 25 Top view ISO 228-G /4 Optional: /2-6UN-2B 46 A/F Ø27 /2-6UN-2B (Optional: ISO 228-G /4) SLW46 Ø27 25 Top view Extensions and filling mounting adaptors Adaptor single A Adaptor with filler connection A xØ7(PCDØ73) 6xØ7(PCDØ73) Ø /2 BSP Ø85 82 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 24

185 Ordering Information Standard products table Part number Supercedes Replacement elements ABLG4QXWL3 ABL2G4QXWL3V ABL2U2QXWL3V ADAPTORABLG4FP ABL-G /4-QXWL-3 ABL2-G /4-QXWL--3-V ABL2-U /2-QXWL--3-V ADAPTOR-ABL-G /4-FP QXWL3 QXWL3 QXWL3 - Product configurator Product number Mounting options Filtration (3μm) Indicators Options ABL l/min G4 ISO G /4 (BSP) QXWL3 ABL Only None None ABL2 2 l/min U2 /2 UN-6-2B QXWL3 ABL2 Only V Visual SNG Vacuum/Pressure Gauge FP Adaptor With Filler Connection Product configurator Product number Mounting options Options Adaptor ABL G4 ISO G /4 (BSP) SNG Single Adaptor U2 /2 UN-6-2B FP Adaptor With Filler Connection Replacement elements Part number Supercedes QXWL3 QXWL-3 QXWL3 QXWL-3 Description 3μ 3μ Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 83 Reservoir equipment

186 Notes 84 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK.

187 Reservoir Equipment Glass-Filled Nylon and Metal Air Filters IP65 Rated, Metal, Screw-on and Lockables 85 Reservoir equipment

188 Reservoir Equipment IP65 Rated Filler Breather Filters Specification for Single and 6 Hole Installation Option Construction: Moulded in non-corrodible glass-filled nylon combining strength with a lightweight design. Options: () single (63mm dia) hole Filler breather installation that eliminates drilled and tapped holes using self-locking clamps. (2) 6 hole Filler Breather Installation that uses 6 x No thread forming screws. (3) 3 hole filler breather utilises 3 x zinc and clear chromate plated steel screws. Option Filler Breathers (Single Hole Installation) Strainers: Unique design diffuses oil flow into the reservoir. () Single length in polypropylene (95mm length) (2) 2-piece telescopic in polypropylene (95mm length max.) Filtration element: Expanded polyurethane foam, micron. Seals:. Working temperature: -3 C to +9 C. Pressurised filler breathers: Available in 3 pressure options to maintain a positive pressure in a reservoir. Pressurisation options:.2,.35 and.7 bar crack pressure. Pressurisation valve: Nylon/. Dipstick: Available for use with options and 2. Dipsticks are available in 2 lengths and in packs of. Dipstick material: ABS. Hi/Lo indicators: Acetal. Adjustable Red/Green level indicators. Dipstick lengths: 2mm and 4mm. Breather weight:.2kg. Anti-splash feature: The unique design antisplash feature is standard on all options and 2 and allows for a dipstick to be fitted if required max Ø AB98XXX Pressurised Pressure Drop Curves.2..7 Valve Valve Valve A Ø Flow I/sec (Air) AB98XXX Non-Pressurised Pressure Drop Curves A Ø7..5. With Anti-Splash.5 Option. Single Hole Filler Breathers Pressurised Part number AB9822 AB9823 AB9822 AB98222 AB9823 AB98232 AB9827 AB9827 AB98272 Supercedes AB.9822.UC AB.9823.UC AB.9822.UC AB UC AB.9823.UC AB UC AB.9827.UC AB.9827.UC AB UC Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Description μ pressurised.2bar with 95mm strainer μ pressurised.35bar with 95mm strainer μ pressurised.2bar without strainer μ pressurised.2bar with telescopic strainer μ pressurised.35bar without strainer μ pressurised.35bar with telescopic strainer μ pressurised.7bar without strainer μ pressurised.7bar with 95mm strainer μ pressurised.7bar with telescopic strainer.5 Without Anti-Splash 5 5 Flow I/sec (Air) Option. Single Hole Filler Breathers Non-Pressurised Part number AB982 AB9822 AB982 Supercedes AB.982.UC AB.9822.UC AB.982.UC Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Description μ filler breather with 95mm strainer μ filler breather with telescopic strainer μ filler breather without strainer 86 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 25

189 Filler Breathers (6 Hole Installation) Option 2 Note. Un-pressurised 6 hole fixing: Form 6 off tank mounting holes between Ø4. and 4.4mm (dependent on the material and thickness see guide below) equispaced on 7-73mm P.C.D. to suit supplied No. thread forming screws. Note 2. Pressurised 6-hole fixing: Form 6 off tank mounting holes between Ø4. and Ø4.4mm (dependent on the material and thickness see guide below) equispaced on 73mm P.C.D. to suit supplied No. thread forming screws. Ø Note 3. Reservoir mounting guide Sheet thickness mm Hole size mm Ø 27 Telescopic Strainer The telescopic strainer design is ideal, where reservoir depth allows, to increase the surface area of the strainer, improving still further its straining ability, oil flowthrough and allowing for longer dipstick lengths Ø3 Ø42 Option 2. 6 Hole Filler Breathers Pressurised Part number AB9887 AB9882 AB9882 AB98822 AB9883 AB9883 AB98832 AB9887 AB98872 Supercedes AB.9887.UC AB.9882.UC AB.9882.UC AB UC AB.9883.UC AB.9883.UC AB UC AB.9887.UC AB UC Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Description μ pressurised.7bar with 95mm strainer μ pressurised.2bar without strainer μ pressurised.2bar with 95mm strainer μ pressurised.2bar with telescopic strainer μ pressurised.35bar without strainer μ pressurised.35bar with 95mm strainer μ pressurised.35bar with telescopic strainer μ pressurised.7bar without strainer μ pressurised.7bar with telescopic strainer Ø42 Option 2. 6 Hole Filler Breathers Non-Pressurised Part number AB988 AB988 AB9882 Supercedes AB.988.UC AB.988.UC AB.9882.UC Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Description μ filler breather without strainer μ filler breather with 95mm strainer μ filler breather with telescopic strainer 87 6x Ø A 73 7 Reservoir equipment

190 Reservoir Equipment Filler Breather Filters Option 3 Filler Breathers (3 Hole Installation) Ø5.5 Ø53 New Options Fully Tested As part of the design development programme for the new IP65 Filler Breathers, extensive performance and endurance testing was carried out to ensure durability and efficiency. Ø24 3x Ø A hole Filler Breathers (6-hole available) Part number AB68 AB688 Description micron filler breather without strainer micron filler breather with 95mm strainer Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Note 3: Not suitable for use with B.6826/27 Note 4: 6-hole AB.689/AB.6898 option available. Note: Form 3 off tank mounting holes between Ø4. and Ø4.4mm (dependent on the material and thickness see chart for guide) equispaced on 4.3 P.C.D. to suit No. thread forming screws supplied. Dipstick Options Dipstick Ordering Part number B6826 B6827 Supercedes DIP.26 DIP.27 Description x 2mm Dipsticks x 4mm Dipsticks Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Dipsticks The dipstick, available in 2 lengths 2mm and 4mm, can be cut to the required length or left as it is and the Hi/Lo indicators moved and positioned on the dipstick itself by squeezing the sides of the indicator and repositioning along the dipstick. 88 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 25

191 Reservoir Equipment Screw-On Type Air Breathers Standard Screw-On Breathers - Specification Option G /2 and G 3 /4 (Ø) Pressure Drop Flow Curve Construction: Moulded in non-corrodible glass-filled nylon combining strength with a lightweight design. Option : 2 screw on type air breathers are available G /2 or G 3 /4 threaded base models. Filtration element: Expanded polyurethane foam, micron. Seals:. Working temperature: -3 C to +9 C. Pressurised air breathers: Available in 3 pressure options to maintain a positive pressure in a reservoir. Pressurisation options:.2,.35 and.7 bar crack pressure. Pressurisation valve: Nylon/. Dipstick: Available for use with all options. Dipsticks are available in 2 lengths and in packs of. Dipstick material: ABS. Hi/Lo indicators: Acetal. Adjustable red/green level indicators. Dipstick lengths: 2mm and 4mm. Breather weight:.2kg. Anti-splash feature: The unique design anti-splash feature is standard on option and allows for a dipstick to be fitted if required. AB98XXX Screw-on Non-Pressurised Pressure Drop Curves G /2 Ø.2.5. With Anti-Splash Without Anti-Splash 5 5 Flow I/sec (Air) 3 G /2 3 A/F HEX Note: For pressure drop information on the Option. Pressurised consult Parker Filtration. A Option G /2 or G 3 /4 Part number AB986 AB9862 AB9863 AB9867 AB984 AB9842 AB9843 AB9847 Supercedes AB.986.UC AB.9862.UC AB.9863.UC AB.9867.UC AB.984.UC AB.9842.UC AB.9843.UC AB.9847.UC Description μ G /2 Un-pressurised μ G /2 pressurised.2 bar μ G /2 pressurised.35 bar μ G /2 pressurised.7 bar μ G 3 /4 Un-pressurised μ G 3 /4 pressurised.2 bar μ G 3 /4 pressurised.35 bar μ G 3 /4 pressurised.7 bar Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. G 3 /4 A Ø 6 96 G 3 /4 3 A/F HEX 89 Reservoir equipment

192 Reservoir Equipment Screw-On Type Air Breathers Compact Screw-On Breathers - Specification Option 2 G /4, G 3 /8, R /2 and R 3 /4 (Ø4) Construction: G /4, G 3 /8, R /2 and R 3 /4 cap and base plate mouldings in nylon 66. Element: Expanded Polyurethane foam, micron. Dipstick: Available for use with R /2 and R 3 /4. Dipstick material: ABS. Hi/Lo indicators: Acetal adjustable red/green level indicators. Dipstick lengths: 2mm and 4mm (packs of ). Breather weights:.28kg Pressure Drop Flow Curve Ordering Information G/ Flow I/sec (Air) Option 2 G /4, G 3 /8, R /2 and R 3 /4 Part number AB683 AB68X AB68Y AB68Z Supercedes AB.683.UC AB.68X.UC AB.68Y.UC AB.68Z.UC Description μ G /4 Un-pressurised μ G 3 /8 Un-pressurised μ R /2 Un-pressurised μ R 3 /4 Un-pressurised Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Note: For pressure drop information on G 3 /8, R /2 and R 3 /4, consult Parker Filtration. Ø4 G /4 Ø4 G 3 /8 2 A/F HEX G /4 Ø R /2 Ø4 R 3 /4 6 2 A/F HEX G 3 / A/F HEX A/F HEX 9 4 R /2 R 3 /4 9 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 25

193 Screw-On Type Air Breathers - Specification Option 3 G 3 /8, G /2 and G 3 /4 (Ø7) Construction: Mouldings in glass-filled nylon and glass coupled polypropylene. Element: Expanded Polyurethane foam, micron. Seals:. Pressurised air breathers: Available G 3 /8, G /2 and G 3 /4, 3 pressure options to maintain a positive pressure in a reservoir. Pressurisation options:.2,.35 and.7 bar crack pressure. Pressure Drop Flow Curve Pressurisation valve: Nylon. Dipstick: Available for use with G 3 /8, G /2 and G 3 /4. Dipstick material: Mini-series in brass. Hi/Lo indicators: Acetal adjustable red/green level indicators. Dipstick lengths: 2mm and 4mm (packs of ). Breather weights:.75kg, Mini-series.9Kg. Ordering Information G3/8 G/2 G3/4 Option 3 G 3 /8, G /2 and G 3 /4 Part number AB685 AB687 AB686 Supercedes SAB.5 SAB.7 SAB.6 Description μ G 3 /8 Un-pressurised μ G 3 /4 Un-pressurised μ G /2 Un-pressurised Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability Flow I/sec (Air) Ø7 G 3 /8 G /2 Ø7 The mini-series breather Screw-on option Push-fit option Ø G 3 /8 28 A/F HEX G /2 28 A/F HEX G 3 /4 Ø7 A min Ø22 Spotface Ø Ø Ø.8 G / Ø3.55 Ø Part number S683 Description Gearbox air breather G 3 /4 3 A/F HEX A 9 Reservoir equipment

194 Reservoir Equipment Filler Breather Filters (Metal) Metal Airbreather/Filler breather Specification Ø76.2 Locking lug option (556) For added security, certain Parker Filtration Metal Filler Breather Filters can be specified with a locking lug option. Ø49.5 Ø83 Ordering Information Standard products table Part number Supercedes Replacement cap Supercedes Displacement I/min Crack pressure Micron rating Air flow m 3 /min Thread Weight SAB562 SAB563 AB63 AB PAB735 PAB73 SPA735 SPA73 SAB.562. SAB.563. AB.63. AB.38. PAB PAB.73.. SPA SPA.73.. CAP.63 CAP.38 CAP.735 CAP.73 Threaded airbreather (unpressurised) CAP.63. CAP Filler breather - filter flange type (pressurised) CAP CAP bar.7 bar Air breather - threaded type (pressurised) Filler breather - filter flange type (unpressurised) Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability..35 bar.7 bar G 3 /4 G /4 G 3 /4 G 3 /4.2kg.6kg.24kg.8kg.24kg.27kg.27kg.2kg.2kg 92 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 26

195 73 - Threaded type (Pressurised) Ø76.2 Displacement: 43 l/min. Micron rating: μ Weight:.2 Kg. Thread: G 3 / Air flow:.45m 3 /min. Valve crack-pressure:.35 and.7 bar. 6 G 3 /4 35 A/F HEX Threaded type (Un-pressurised) Ø44.5 Displacement: 562 = 43 l/min. 563 = 35 l/min. Micron rating: μ Air flow: 562 =.45m 3 /min. 563 =.5m 3 /min. Weight: 562 =.2 Kg. 563 =.6 Kg. Thread: 562 = G 3 / = G / G /4/G 3 / A/F HEX 38 - Filter flange type Ø44.5 Displacement: 35 l/min. Micron rating: μ Air flow:.5m 3 /min. Weight:.8 Kg Ø5 Tank installation notes. Un-pressurised 6 hole fixing Form off tank mounting holes between Ø4. and Ø4.4 (dependant on the material and thickness, consult Parker Filtration) equispaced on P.C.D. to suit No. thread forming screws supplied. 2. Pressurised 6 hole fixing Form 6 off mounting holes between Ø4. and Ø4.4 equispaced on 73. P.C.D. to suit No. thread forming screws supplied. 3. Un-pressurised 3 hole fixing Form 3 off tank mounting holes between Ø4. and Ø4.4 equispaced on 4.3 P.C.D. to suit No. thread forming screws supplied. Breather Units Ordering Information Small Breather Specification Ø35 Part number H279 H2792 H2793 Supercedes H279- H279-2 H279-3 Description Small breather /4 BSPT thread Small breather 3 /8 BSPT thread Small breather /2 BSPT thread 22 Three size: /4 BSPT 3 /8 BSPT /2 BSPT 5 93 Reservoir equipment

196 Reservoir Equipment Lockable Filler Breather Installation Details Tank Mounting 5.5 Ø5 Strainer off equispaced clamps Ø Tank mounting hole Flap to protect lock Stand Pipe Mounting 2 locking screws threaded type at positions X and Y 3 locking screws push on type at positions X, Y and Z X 5.5 Z 34 7 B Y A Lockable Filler Breather Selection Total assembly pressure drop flow curve μ elements μ Ordering Information Part number LFC62242 LFC62222 LFC LFC LFC62222 LFC LFC6224 Description Non-breathing (No element) Clamp mounting with strainer μ element, G2 thread with strainer μ element, clamp mounting with strainer μ vented (air in) push on mounting with strainer Non-breathing (No element) 2 BSP thread with strainer μ element, G2 /2 thread with strainer μ vented (air in) G2 thread without strainer Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 94 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 26

197 Reservoir Equipment Spin-On Air Breathers 95 Reservoir equipment

198 Reservoir Equipment Spin-On Air Breathers Specification High capacity air filters designed for the removal of airborne contamination in hydraulic systems to support environmental maintenance. Ideal for high flow systems and heavily contaminated environments. Disposable spin-on elements quickly and easily replaced. 5 micron quality filtration elements. 2 models available 7 l/min and 5 l/min. Available with a pressurised valve in the mounting adaptor. Standard spin-on air breather stem Ø94 Reservoir cutout Ø25 maximum A Circuit symbol (standard) B A Ø5 3 off M6 fixing holes equispaced on 4.3 P.C.D. B Pressurised spin-on air breather stem Reservoir cutout Ø25 maximum 6 Ø97 Ø63.5 Circuit symbol (pressurised) 6 Ordering Information 3 off M6 fixing holes equispaced on 5 P.C.D. Note: Spin-on air breather elements can also be mounted directly on to any suitable length of 3 /4 BSP threaded pipe. 5μ Spin-on air breathers Part number Supercedes Air flow Valve crack pressure A mm B mm Weight Replacement element S.3456 S.3452 S.3458 S.3459 S.3454 S.3455 *S.3458 **S.3459 *S.3454 **S l/min 5 l/min 7 l/min 7 l/min 5 l/min 5 l/min Unpressurised Unpressurised.35 Bar.7 Bar.35 Bar.7 Bar Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Note 3: Reservoir must be capable of withstanding pressurisation Kg.75Kg.69Kg.69Kg.8Kg.8Kg Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 27

199 High capacity air filters designed for the removal of airborne contamination in hydraulic systems to support environmental maintenance. Ideal for high flow systems and heavily contaminated environments. Disposable spin-on elements quickly and easily replaced. 3 micron quality filtration elements. Models available 7 l/min and 3 l/min. ØA ØA Mounting face for standard and large breather 73 PCD Ø57 hole in tank B C B D E BSPT C Ø88 boss or spot face (.6 micron surface finish) 6 fitting holes Ø5.6 equispaced on 73 PCD Strainer 3 mesh (6 microns) Ø48 Large breather filter Specification Maximum operating temperature: -2 C to +9 C. Construction materials: Epoxy coated steel components to resist corrosion. resistant paint finish on large breathers. Fluid compatibility: Suitable for use with mineral oils and water oil emulsions. Weights: Large: H834. Kg H Kg H Kg Each breather filler is supplied with mounting gaskets and self-tapping screws. Ordering Information Large breather dimensions Large breather filler dimensions Part number Supercedes Air flow l/min H8344 H8345 H834-4 H Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Dimensions (mm) A B C D Ports 3 /4 /4 97 Part number H834 H8342 H8343 Supercedes Air flow l/min H834- H834-2 H Dimensions (mm) A B C Replacement element complete with bayonet H8346 H8347 H8347 Supercedes H834-6 H834-7 H834-7 Reservoir equipment

200 Notes 98 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK.

201 Reservoir Equipment Fluid Level Measurement Fluid Level Temperature Gauges 99 Reservoir equipment

202 Reservoir Equipment Fluid Level/Temperature Gauges Specification Construction: Lens Transparent polyamide. Lens base Nylon 66. Shroud High impact polystyrene. No aluminium content. Bolts: Steel. Seals:. Maximum working pressure: bar. Working temperature: -3 C to +9 C. Fluid compatibility: Mineral and petroleum based oils. Note: A 5mm model with metal shroud finished in black available. Recommended bolt tightening torque: Nm maximum. Thermometer scale range: +3 C to +9 C. Temperature Indicator: Blue alcohol. Note:. Locate seals in mounting recess before fitting. 2. Select the size required by studying the installation details to determine a part number. Size Installation Details For through hole mounting: Thread Hole size M M2 Preferred. 3. Maximum For tapped holes: Holes to be tapped square to mounting face. Tolerance on hole centres: For welded back nuts: The above details should be combined. Drive slot Black line Red line A/F HEX Installation and Application Information Simple to Install The universal fixing is designed for either front or rear fixing. Just two holes in the tank threaded for front fixing and the gauge is ready to install. After positioning the gauge the bolts are simply tightened to provide a secure seal. There is no fear of leakage with the square section seals and the two-point mounting system eliminates problems with tank distortion. M and M2 bolt thread options are available. Easy to Read The high-visibility lens is one-piece for added security and moulded in shatterproof, transparent polyamide for an accurate and clear oil level and temperature indication. Further gauge protection is provided by a specially designed shroud moulded in high-impact, black polystyrene. Size Ordering Information Standard products table Part number Supercedes FL692 FLT.2 FL6923 FLT.23 FL69 FL. FL693 FL.3 Desciption Fluid level/temp Fluid level/temp Fluid level Fluid level Centres 76mm 76mm 76mm 76mm Thread M M2 M M2 Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Max temp 9 C 9 C 9 C 9 C Weight.3Kg.3Kg.3Kg.3Kg 2 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 28

203 Size 2 Installation Details Drive slot Black line 6 27 A/F HEX 74 7 Red line Size 2 Ordering Information Standard products table Part number Supercedes FL6922 FLT.22 FL69223 FLT.223 FL692 FL.2 FL6923 FL.23 Desciption Fluid level/temp Fluid level/temp Fluid level Fluid level Centres 27mm 27mm 27mm 27mm Thread M M2 M M2 Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Max temp 9 C 9 C 9 C 9 C Weight.5Kg.5Kg.5Kg.5Kg Size 3 Installation Details Drive slot Black line A/F HEX Red line 4.5 Size 3 Ordering Information Standard products table Part number Supercedes FL6932 FLT.32 FL69323 FLT.323 FL693 FL.3 FL6933 FL.33 Desciption Fluid level/temp Fluid level/temp Fluid level Fluid level Centres 254mm 254mm 254mm 254mm Thread M M2 M M2 Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Max temp 9 C 9 C 9 C 9 C Weight.23Kg.23Kg.23Kg.23Kg 2 Reservoir equipment

204 Notes 22 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK.

205 Reservoir Equipment Reservoir Float & Level Switches 23 Reservoir equipment

206 Reservoir Equipment FL Series Adjustable Float Switch Features & Benefits Float Switch Features Include: Float switches can be adjusted on site They can be fitted with a thermostatic switch Reliable design using reed switches Different types of mounting can be specified 3 lengths available, 5mm, mm and 5mm The FL Series is a range of vertically mounted, single float level switches operating on the proven reed switch and magnet principle. The FL Series float switch can be tailored by the user for a particular application, by adjusting the length of the float switch tube. It is also possible for the user to select the switching configuration by inverting the float, giving either open on rise or close on rise operation. The unit is supplied part assembled, with detailed instructions for the user to complete assembly to the specifications of the application and to install the unit. The FL Series is designed to be adjusted by the user to fit their tank. The unit consists of a stem with the reed switch, thermal switch (if fitted) and float already set in position. The customer can cut the stem to fit their tank, and assemble it to the header. The unit is then ready to be fitted to the tank. The unit has a factory set Open On Rise switching configuration, but this can be changed by reversing the float. The common temperature switches used are 6 C Open On Rise or 6 C Close On Rise. However, other temperature specifications may be obtained on request. A standard DIN 4365 connector is supplied with the unit. Typical Specification Installation Drawing Installation Mounting: BSP threaded header Gasket: 2.mm thick sealing washer Length: Adjustable up to 5mm Electrical specification Supply voltage: 24 Vac maximum 3 Vdc maximum Switching current:.5a Thermostat ratings Normal voltage: 25V Current rating: 4A (A max) Material specification Header: Brass Stem: Brass Float: Polypropylene Gasket: Klingersil grade C4324 to BS753 grade Y Other parameters Fluid types: Any liquids compatible with brass and polypropylene HEX 36 A/F Customer Adjustable 35 approx BSPP thread Polypropylene float Ø28.5 Ordering Information Standard products table Part number Supercedes FL5R FL-5--R FLR FL---R FL5R FL-5--R Desciption 5mm long float level switch mm long float level switch 5mm long float level switch Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 24 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 29

207 Reservoir Equipment CLS46 Capacitive Level Switch Features & Benefits Features Include: Rugged construction Simple to install Delay circuitry prevents false alarms Purely electronic, no moving components Integrated test feature The CLS46 Liquid Level Switch is an active device which is designed to give an alarm signal if fluid falls below a preset level. It will only give an output signal after a few seconds of low level to eliminate false alarms due to turbulence. The fact that the CLS46 Series has no moving parts and incorporates a built in delay means that it is ideal in applications where mechanically operated switches mis-trigger due to vibration and fluid turbulence. The CLS46 Capacitive Level Switch is designed to detect the loss of fluid below its position in the tank. The CLS46 Series has no moving parts and it is therefore suitable for all applications, particularly where space and access inside a vessel is at a minimum. The CLS46 Series compliments the existing range of level measurement instrumentation supplied by Parker Hannifin. Technical Specification Installation Details Dimensions: See drawing Electrical rating: Supply voltage: 7-4 Vdc Supply current: 3.mA Max. load current:.a Alarm delay time:. seconds Connections: V+: Positive power supply GND: Negative power supply or GND Output: Transistor switched to GND on alarm Test: Ground to operate Body: Connected to ground Fluid types: Water based fluids compatible with brass, PTFE and flurosilicone Construction: Body: Brass Probe: PTFE Terminals: SAE CA2 brass, tin plated Seals: Flurosilicone Connector: 3% glass filled nylon 6 Environmental ratings Max. pressure: 5. bar (72 PSI) Temp. ranges: Fluid: -4 C to +3 C Ambient: -4 C to + C Storage: -5 C to +4 C Sealing: IP67 Vibration: 6g -5Hz (6-3rpm) Shock: 5g, 6.3mS Weight: 53g /4 NPTF, /2 NPTF or /2 BSPT thread.39 across corners (HEX.2 A/F) Ordering Information Standard products table Part number Desciption CLS46 Capacitive fluid level sensor CLS46Connector Capacitive fluid level sensor connector Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 25 Reservoir equipment

208 Reservoir Equipment Fluid Power Products Hydraulic system protection from Parker is further confirmed with a quality range of fluid power products that include suction strainers, check valves pressure gauges and a pipe clamping system that will ensure secure pipe installations. For information on Parker Filtration products and technology: Tel: +44() Fax: +44() filtrationinfo@parker.com 26

209 Reservoir Equipment Strainers 27 Reservoir equipment

210 Reservoir Equipment Suction Elements Specification Installation - Suction Elements Without Bypass Construction: Stainless steel media 3% glass filled nylon head. Zintec centre tube. Epoxy adhesives. Maximum working temperature: 9ºC..4 Filtration media: 25 micron*..3 Flow range: 5-5 l/min..2 Bypass rating:.7 bar.. Mounting threads: G /2 up to G3. SE.39 * Non-standard elements are available to order. Consult Parker Filtration SE.32 SE.457 SE Installation - Suction Elements with Bypass SE.324 SE.326 SE.29 SE.22 SE A C A/F HEX A C A/F HEX ØB ØB Mounting thread Mounting thread Circuit symbol Ordering Information - Without Bypass Circuit symbol Standard products table Part number Supercedes Air flow l/min SE75 SE7522 SE75232 SE75352 SE75353 SE75364 SE75462 SE75473 SE75484 SE.39 SE.32 SE.547 SE.323 SE.324 SE.326 SE.29 SE.22 SE Ports BSP /2 3 /4 /2 / /2 3 Micron rating Dimensions (mm) A B C Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability Weight Bypass rating Ordering Information - With Bypass Standard products table Part number Supercedes Air flow l/min SE75 SE7522 SE75232 SE75352 SE75353 SE75364 SE75462 SE75473 SE75484 SE.5 SE.5 SE.52 SE.53 SE.54 SE.55 SE.56 SE.57 SE Ports BSP /2 3 /4 /2 / /2 3 Micron rating Dimensions (mm) A B C Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability Weight Bypass rating.7 bar.7 bar.7 bar.7 bar.7 bar.7 bar.7 bar.7 bar.7 bar 28 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 3

211 Reservoir Equipment Diffusers Installation Details A Specification Construction: Zintec body. 3% glass-filled nylon head. Zintec end cap. Epoxy adhesives. Flow range: 5 l/min up to 454 l/min. Mounting threads: G 3 /4 up to G2. Mounting thread ØB C A/F HEX 2 plain area The effect of fitting a diffuser Note: When installing a diffuser the plain area on the outside must be facing the pump inlet. The benefits of specifying a Parker Filtration Diffuser Installing a Parker Filtration Diffuser in a hydraulic reservoir is a simple operation that can make a big difference to system efficiency. With its special concentric tubes designed with discharge holes 8 opposed fluid aeration, foaming and reservoir noise are reduced and pump life extended by reducing cavitation to the pump inlet. Ordering Information Diffusers manufactured to customer specifications and other sizes of diffusers are available. Standard products table Part number Air flow l/min Ports BSP Dimensions (mm) A B C Weight /2 3 / Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 29 Reservoir equipment

212 Reservoir Equipment Inline Filters Metal Inline Filter - Specification Construction: Head zinc. Bowl Aluminium BS47/5A Element: Zintec/Stainless steel. 25 micron*. Installation Details Max. flow: 9 l/min. Max working pressure: 7 bar. Thread: G. Working temperature: -3 C to +8 C. Seal:. Bowl tightening torque: 2 Nm. Filter Selection Flow direction: From outside to inside. Weight:.5 Kg. *Alternative media can be specified. G Total assembly pressure drop flow curve Oil Viscosity 3 cst Relative density Circuit symbol Minimum for bowl removal Ø off fixing holes Ø Ordering Information Standard products table.5 Part number Flow l/min Thread BSP Micron rating Replacement element Supercedes Non-Corrodible Inline Filter - Specification IL5 9 G 25 EIL5 E.IL.5 Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Construction: Housing and bowl moulded in polyester. Element: Stainless steel mesh. 25 micron*. Max. flow: 2 l/min. Max working pressure: 7 bar. Thread: G. *For alternative media consult Parker Filtration Note: When using with water, protect from freezing. Working temperature: -3 C to +8 C. (+6 C water). Seal:. Bowl tightening torque: 2 Nm. Bowl tightening note: A box or ring spanner is recommended. Flow direction: From outside to inside. Weight:.5 Kg. Installation Details G Ø45 63 Ø9 2 Inlet off fixing holes Ø Total assembly pressure drop flow curve Oil Viscosity 3 cst Relative density Ø74 6 Minimum for bowl removal Ordering Information 22 A/F HEX Circuit symbol Standard products table Part number Supercedes Thread BSP Appliance Micron rating Weight Replacement element IL765 IL7625 IL.5 IL.25 Oil Water Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability..5.5 R.765 R Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 3

213 Reservoir Equipment Drive Couplings Technical Data Materials Coupling halves Sintered Steel Sleeve Nylon 66 Max temp sleeve 83 C To select coupling model check application to establish running load condition. Check chart for factor (F) and apply factor (F) to *Rating of coupling formulae. This answer you now apply to *Rating/ rev/min below. It is advisable always to check shaft sizes being used on application and check with dimension H. Installation Details Factor (F) Application Electric motor Petrol/diesel engine Uniform load..2 Medium shock.25.5 Heavy shock HP of application x x F *Rating of coupling= rev/min of application F G Hub withdrawal clearance A A Sectioned detail ØJ ØH ØC ØB E Grub screw position D Max *Rating/ H J speed rev/min Weight A B C D E F G max min pilot Part number prefix rev/min kw hp mm mm mm mm mm mm mm bore bore bore DC28* DC42* DC55* min 38. max Height of keyway from base of bore Metric Imperial Standard bore BS 45, (985) BS 96, Part, (985) Standard keyway BS 4325, Part (98) BS 46, Part, (985) Ordering Examples Parker Filtration drive coupling components are ordered separately. Here are three examples of complete assemblies ordered this way.. Complete assembly DC28M4B4K Made up of a DC28M4 DC28B4K DC28.S (Sleeve) Complete model DC28 drive coupling: One gear hub has 4mm bore with 5mm wide keyway and other hub has a /2 bore with.25 wide keyway. Both hubs supplied with locating grub screw. Assembly data. Maximum angular misalignment is ±2. Maximum radial misalignment is ±.4mm. 2. Ensure that the Parker Filtration drive coupling gear hubs are an easy fit to their respective shafts. Do not use heavy blows to force the hubs on. 3. When in position, the hubs should have a gap of 4mm as denoted by E dimension. 4. Tighten grub screws to locate both gear hubs on to their respective shafts. 2. Complete assembly DCR42PBPB Made up of 2x DCR42PB s DC42S (Sleeve) Complete model DC42 drive coupling: Both gear hubs have pilot bore of.5mm. Not supplied with grub screws. 3. Complete assembly DCR55PBB2K Made up of a DCR55PB DC55B2K DC55S (Sleeve) Complete model DC55 drive coupling: One gear hub pilot bored 5 /8, the other hub pilot bored /2. Latter only supplied with grub screw. 2 Reservoir equipment

214 Reservoir Equipment Drive Couplings Ordering Information Model DC.28 Part number Supercedes Dimensions (mm) Weight Ø Bore Width Height DC28M6 DC28M9 DC28M2 DC28M22 DC28M24 DC28M25 DC28M28 DCR28PB DC28S DC28M DC28M DC28M4 DC28M8 DC28B3K DC28B4K DC28B5K DC28B6K DC28B7K DC28B8K DC28B9K DC.28.M6 DC.28.M9 DC.28.M2 DC.28.M22 DC.28.M24 DC.28.M25 DC.28.M28 DCR.28.PB DC.28.S DC.28.M DC.28.M DC.28.M4 DC.28.M8 DC.28.B3K DC.28.B4K DC.28.B5K DC.28.B6K DC.28.B7K DC.28.B8K DC.28.B9K 6.mm 9.mm 2.mm 22.mm 24.mm 25.mm 28.mm.mm.mm 4.mm 8.mm 7 /6 /2 5/8 3 /4 7/8 /8 5.mm 6.mm 6.mm 6.mm 8.mm 8.mm 8.mm 8.mm 3.mm 4.mm 5.mm 6.mm.25 ins.25 ins.88 ins.88 ins.25 ins.25 ins.33 ins 8.4mm 2.9mm 22.9mm 24.9mm 27.5mm 28.5mm 3.5mm.5mm 2.9mm 6.4mm 2.9mm.5 ins.57 ins.72 ins.84 ins.99 ins.2 ins.24 ins Range from.259kg to.4kg Model DC.42 Part number Supercedes Dimensions (mm) Weight Ø Bore Width Height DC42M25 DC42M28 DC42M3 DC42M35 DC42M38 DC42M42 DCR42PB DC42S DC42M8 DC42M9 DC42M2 DC42M22 DC42M24 DC42M32 DC42B5K DC42B6K DC42B7K DC42B8K DC42B9K DC42BK DC42BK DC42B2K DC42B3K DC.42.M25 DC.42.M28 DC.42.M3 DC.42.M35 DC.42.M38 DC.42.M42 DCR.42.PB DC.42.S DC.42.M8 DC.42.M9 DC.42.M2 DC.42.M22 DC.42.M24 DC.42.M32 DC.42.B5K DC.42.B6K DC.42.B7K DC.42.B8K DC.42.B9K DC.42.BK DC.42.BK DC.42.B2K DC.42.B3K 25.mm 28.mm 3.mm 35.mm 38.mm 42.mm 8.mm 9.mm 2.mm 22.mm 24.mm 32.mm 5 /8 3/4 7/8 /8 /4 3 /8 /2 5 /8 8.mm 8.mm 8.mm.mm.mm 2.mm 2.mm 6.mm 6.mm 6.mm 6.mm 8.mm.mm.88 ins.88 ins.25 ins.25 ins.33 ins.33 ins.375 ins.375 ins.439 ins 28.5mm 3.5mm 33.5mm 38.5mm 4.5mm 45.5mm 2.9mm 2.9mm 22.9mm 24.9mm 27.5mm 35.5mm.72 ins.84 ins.99 ins.2 ins.24 ins.37 ins.49 ins.6 ins.76 ins Range from.436kg to.753kg Model DC.55 Part number Supercedes Dimensions (mm) Weight Ø Bore Width Height DCR55PB DC55S DC55M25 DC55M28 DC55M3 DC55M32 DC55M35 DC55M38 DC55M42 DC55M55 DC55B9K DC55BK DC55BK DC55B2K DC55B3K DC55B4K DC55B5K DC55B6K DC55B7K DCR.55.PB DC.55.S DC.55.M25 DC.55.M28 DC.55.M3 DC.55.M32 DC.55.M35 DC.55.M38 DC.55.M42 DC.55.M55 DC.55.B9K DC.55.BK DC.55.BK DC.55.B2K DC.55.B3K DC.55.B4K DC.55.B5K DC.55.B6K DC.55.B7K 25.mm 28.mm 3.mm 32.mm 35.mm 38.mm 42.mm 55.mm /8 /4 3 /8 /2 5 /8 3 /4 7 /8 2 2 /8 6.mm 8.mm 8.mm 8.mm.mm.mm.mm 2.mm 6.mm.33 ins.33 ins.375 ins.375 ins.439 ins.439 ins.5 ins.5 ins.626 ins 28.5mm 33.5mm 33.5mm 35.5mm 38.5mm 4.5mm 45.5mm 59.5mm.24 ins.37 ins.49 ins.6 ins.76 ins.89 ins 2. ins 2.3 ins 2.3 ins Range from.248 Kg 2.46 Kg Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 22 Parker Hannifin (UK) Limited Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 3

215 Pipe Clamp System Multiclamp 23 Reservoir equipment

216 Pipe Clamp System Multiclamp When only the best Clamping System will do...specify Multiclamp Multiclamp is a system. A system of components, each one engineered to a high standard that together build to provide effective, all-purpose pipework clamping. Multiclamp offers creative and cost-effective environmental benefits to the system designer and installer. Creating accurate runs of varying diameter tubes, pipes, hoses and cables in all industries. Secure Multiclamp installations ensure a leak free, noise free and vibration free system. The neat design of pipe line runs offers easy maintenance of machinery and plant equipment. Visual planning of line runs is straightforward with Multiclamp accurate installations can be achieved without skilled labour keeping costs down and quality up. Planning with Multiclamp These notes have been compiled to assist in planning your Multiclamp system. Multiclamp offers considerable flexibility. For example, it can fit in with a factory installation that is being built in phases. Should a last minute change in pipe diameter occur during installation, an alternative rubber bush is likely to be all that is required. Not a complete and expensive re-think of the installation. Multiclamp metal components can be sprayed to match a vehicle livery or plant installation and, if installed properly, should require no maintenance. Installation is simple and requires no experience Anyone can use Multiclamp and only the basic, everyday tools are required. From one pipe to almost any number because each Multiclamp position can be visually sighted and its position adjusted an almost guaranteed straight run can be obtained. Equally, changes of plane or direction can be achieved simply and securely. Group pipe sizes together to obtain the most economical use of three basic Multiclamp Series. Some sites will require all pipes mounted in one single plane either vertical or horizontal. When stacked modules are preferred, the only work to be done on the Multiclamp is to saw off the desired length. If a large number of pipe lines are to be run, it is recommended that the upper clamping unit is simply cut into two lines only, and progressively assembled by securing two pipes at a time. It will be recognised that most odd lengths on site will be used, and one man can easily cope with a large number of pipe lines by this simple progressive build up. This assembly will provide easy access for servicing and replacing pipes. This method also reduces the quantity of Stacking Nuts and Studs by 5%. If a factory installation is being built in phases, it would be wise to leave the first phase with a lower clamping unit and Stacking Nuts in position ready to receive pipe runs for the next building phase. Series 6.mm-2.mm ( /4-3/4 ) Series 6 6.mm-28.mm ( /4 - ) Stacked modules or single module Series 32.mm-5.mm ( 3/8-2 ) Fixing points to suit Your maximum pipe size will determine the series to use. There is a degree of versatility provided by the rubber bushes. You choose from single or multistacked Multiclamp, whichever suits your particular installation requirements. Stacking stud and nut not required in this position 24 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 3

217 Specification Dimension details supplied in product configurator Single Clamp B C CTS ( B ) Double Clamp Ø B C C B A A Series PAT.7557 E F REF F E D Multiclamp 2 or 6 holes Split Bushes set of clamping units = pair Split bushes are ordered in sets only i.e. set of bushes = bushes of one size C A B Thetford England Series PAT.7557 Ø B Pipe size H REF G A Ø D E F Material Specifications Zinc plated steel with anti-corrosive, full passivate. Multiclamp can also be multi-stacked using stacking studs and nuts. Series and 6 clamp is supplied in lengths of 63mm and Series 32 in lengths of 26mm. These can be simply cut to the required lengths for installation. Note: For stainless steel version please consult Parker. Series will accept pipe or hose diameters from 6mm up to 2mm maximum. Series 6 from 6mm up to 28mm and Series 32 from mm up to 5mm. Across the 3 Series, there are 26 different high-quality split rubber bushes to select from to cope with any combination and number of different pipe and hose diameters in the same run. Stacking Nuts Stacking Studs Mounting Adaptors Weld Plate A B Thread Thread B A Ø A B C D B F E A Stacking nuts are ordered in sets only. i.e. set of stacking nuts = 5 stacking nuts of one size. Stacking studs are ordered in sets only. i.e. set of stacking studs = 5 stacking studs of one size. Mounting adaptors are not ordered in sets. i.e. off mounting adaptors = single piece. Weld plates are ordered in sets only. i.e. set of weld plates = weld plates. 25 Reservoir equipment

218 Pipe Clamp System Multiclamp Ordering Information - Series Product configurator Part number Supercedes Description Pack Dimensions (mm) Thread quantity A B C D E F G H Ø MC MC2 MC6 MCN MCS MCWP MCSB MCBMO MC.. MC..2 MC..6 MC.N. MC.S. MC.WP. MC.SB. MC.B..MO Single clamp Double clamp 6 bay clamp Stacking nut Stacking stud Weld plate Standard bolt Mounting adaptor pairs pairs pair M8 x.25 M8 x.25 M8 x.25 Pack weight.6 Kg. Kg.8 Kg.8 Kg.5 Kg.35 Kg.55 Kg.2 Kg Part number Supercedes Description Pack Dimensions (mm) Paper size quantity A B (mm) OD MCG5 MCG6 MCG8 MCG MCG2 MCG4 MC.G..5 MC.G..6 MC.G..8 MC.G.. MC.G..2 MC.G..4 Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush /6 3/8 /2 5/8 3/4 /4 Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Pack weight.3 Kg.2 Kg.2 Kg. Kg.9 Kg.3 Kg Ordering Information - Product configurator Series 6 Part number Supercedes Description Pack Dimensions (mm) Thread quantity A B C D E F G H Ø MC6 MC62 MC62 MCN6 MCS MCWP MCSB MCB6MO MC.6. MC.6.2 MC.6.2 MC.N.6 MC.S. MC.WP. MC.SB. MC.B.6.MO Single clamp Double clamp 2 bay clamp Stacking nut Stacking stud Weld plate Standard bolt Mounting adaptor pairs pairs pair M8 x.25 M8 x.25 M8 x.25 Pack weight.8 Kg.6 Kg. Kg.6 Kg.5 Kg.35 Kg.55 Kg.6 Kg Part number Supercedes Description Pack Dimensions (mm) Paper size quantity A B (mm) OD MCG65 MCG66 MCG68 MCG6 MCG62 MCG64 MCG66 MCG68 MCG64 MC.G.6.5 MC.G.6.6 MC.G.6.8 MC.G.6. MC.G.6.2 MC.G.6.4 MC.G.6.6 MC.G.6.8 MC.G.6.4 Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush /6 3/8 /2 5/8 3/4 7/8 /4 Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Pack weight.28 Kg.28 Kg.26 Kg.22 Kg.2 Kg.8 Kg.4 Kg.6 Kg.28 Kg 26 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 3

219 Ordering Information - Series 32 Product configurator Part number Supercedes Description Pack Dimensions (mm) Thread quantity A B C D E F G H Ø MC32 MC322 MC326 MCN32 MCS32 MCWP32 MCSB32 MCB32MO MC.32. MC.32.2 MC.32.6 MC.N.32 MC.S.32 MC.WP.32 MC.SB.32 MC.B.32.MO Single clamp Double clamp 6 bay clamp Stacking nut Stacking stud Weld plate Standard bolt Mounting adaptor pairs pairs pair M x.5 M x.5 M x.5 Pack weight 2.25 Kg 3.82 Kg 3.8 Kg.99 Kg.9 Kg.7 Kg.3 Kg.26 Kg Part number Supercedes Description Pack Dimensions (mm) Paper size quantity A B (mm) OD MCG32 MCG322 MCG326 MCG328 MCG322 MCG3224 MCG3232 MCG326 MCG328 MCG324 MCG3226 MC.G.32. MC.G.32.2 MC.G.32.6 MC.G.32.8 MC.G.32.2 MC.G MC.G MC.G.32.6 MC.G.32.8 MC.G.32.4 MC.G Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush Split bush /8 3/4 /4 /4 2 3/8 /2 7/8 Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Pack weight. Kg. Kg. Kg. Kg.8 Kg.8 Kg.4 Kg.3 Kg.2 Kg. Kg.6 Kg How to build Multiclamp Reservoir equipment

220 Reservoir Equipment Speed Control and Needle Valves Specification Construction: Brass 58 UNI 575 (G 3 /4 model-steel) Nickel plated. Speed control valve/check valve crack pressure:.5 bar. Max. working pressure: 2 bar. Operating temp. range: -2 C to + C. Fluid compatibility: Petroleum-based oils. Sizes: G /4, G 3 /8, G /2 and G 3 /4. Panel mounting: A retaining nut for panel mounting is included with every option. Filtration recommendation: Parker Filtration 25 micron absolute system filtration is desirable to ensure acceptable reliability and service life. G /4, G 3 /8 and G /2 options ØC G 3 /4 option Ø47. Panel mounting thread G Panel mounting thread M4 x.5 B D A B F max E Port identification A A B Ordering Information Speed Control Valves white caps A B C D E F G Weight Part number Description mm mm mm mm mm Size Panel mtg thread Kg SCV7 G /4, 2 bar speed control M7 x.3 SCV7 G 3 /8, 2 bar speed control M2 x.24 SCV72 G /2, 2 bar speed control M25 x.5.45 SCV73 G 3 /4, 2 bar speed control M4 x.5.3 Needle Valves orange caps A B C D E F G Weight Part number Description mm mm mm mm mm Size Panel mtg thread Kg 2 G /4, 2 bar needle valve M7 x.3 2 G 3 /8, 2 bar needle valve M2 x G /2, 2 bar needle valve M25 x G 3 /4, 2 bar needle valve 5 73 M4 x Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 32

221 Technical Data Pressure drop (ΔP) flow characteristics with mineral oil at 3 cst viscosity Speed Control Needle Valve A B A B Graphs for needle/shut-off valves and speed control valves with flow A-B (controlled flow through needle). Symbol Flow setting by number of turns of control knob is indicated on the body graduated scale. Graphs for speed control valves. Flow B-A (flow through check valve), with needle valve portion in fully open and fully closed positions. 2/SCV7 Flow setting in no. of turns FULLY OPEN SCV7 Flow setting (fully closed/fully open) 22/SCV72 Flow setting in no. of turns FULLY OPEN SCV72 Flow setting (fully closed/fully open) CLOSED 2 74 OPEN CLOSED OPEN /SCV7 Flow setting in no. of turns FULLY OPEN SCV7 Flow setting (fully closed/fully open) 23/SCV73 Flow setting in no. of turns FULLY OPEN SCV73 Flow setting (fully closed/fully open) CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN Reservoir equipment

222 Reservoir Equipment Inline Check Valves Specification Construction: Steel UNI 55. Ball and spring: Chrome finished steel. Retainer: Nylon. Flow rates: From 2 l/min to 5 l/min. Max. working pressure: 35 bar. Valve crack pressures:.35 and 4.5 bar. Circuit symbol Installation Details A B A/F HEX Thread Technical Data Ordering Information Pressure Drop Flow Curves Standard products table Cracking Flow pressure Thread A B Weight Part number l/min bar G mm mm Kg /4 3 /8 /2 3 /4 /4 3 /8 /2 3 / Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 32

223 Reservoir Equipment Single Station Gauge Isolator Valves Specification Construction: Single Station: Cast iron and steel. Knurled aluminium knob with Twist to lock or push to read type. Max. working pressure: 35 bar. Port size: Single Station: G /4. Weight: Single Station:.9 Kg. Single Station Installation Details HEX nut 38. A/F 3. G G /4 TYP 3 positions DR P Circuit symbol 2. SQ Operation Details Single Station Ordering Information Standard products table Part number GI486 GI44 Description Single station gauge isolator twist to lock type Single station gauge isolator push to read type Weight.9 Kg.9 Kg 22 Reservoir equipment

224 Reservoir Equipment 63mm Dia. Pressure Gauges Specification Construction: Case: Natural finish stainless steel. Window: Non-splintering clear acrylic glass. Movement: Cu alloy. Dial: White plastic, with pointer stop pin. Pointer: Black plastic. Liquid filling: Glycerine 99.7%. Working pressure: Max 75% of the full scale value. Process temperature: + 6 C maximum. Accuracy:.6% FSD. Wetted parts connector: Copper alloy. Bourdon tube: < 6 bar = Cu alloy, C-type, soft soldered. > 6 bar = Cu alloy, helical type, soft soldered. Mounting Stem Detail Installation Details Bottom Connection h Dimensions (mm) Note: It is recommended that all glycerine gauges should be mounted in the vertical position with gauge case relief valve uppermost. Pressure range up to bar available. Bottom Connection a b D D2 e G h SW Weight ±.5 ± Kg G / Dimensions (mm) Panel Mounting (Centre Back) Panel Mounting (Centre Back) b b2 D D2 e G SW Weight ±.5 ± Kg G /4 4.2 Note : Panel cut-out 64.5 ±.5 Note 2: 3mm on the outside radius required to allow for fixing clamp. Panel Mounted (3-hole flange) D G ØD2 ØD Ø5 Ø9.5 Snubber fitted G /4 ( /4 BSP) 4 A/F HEX SW 2 a b e ØD2 Note : Note 2: Symbol D G Gauge dimensions as for panel mounting option above with flange as shown below. Panel cut-out for 3-hole mounting 67±.3. Dimensions (mm) SW b2 b e ØD2 Ordering Information Bottom Connection Part number PGB63 PGB636 PGB6325 PGB634 PGB636 PGB63 PGB636 PGB6325 PGB634 PGB636 PGB634 Panel Mounting Part number PGC63 PGC636 PGC6325 PGC634 PGC636 PGC63 PGC636 PGC6325 PGC634 PGC634 PGC636 Panel Mounted (3-hole flange) Part number PGF636 PGF63 PGF636 PGF6325 PGF634 PGF634 PGF63 PGF636 PGF6325 PGF634 PGF636 Supercedes PGB.63. PGB.63.6 PGB PGB.63.4 PGB.63.6 PGB.63. PGB.63.6 PGB PGB.63.4 PGB.63.6 PGB.63.4 Supercedes PGC.63. PGC.63.6 PGC PGC.63.4 PGC.63.6 PGC.63. PGC.63.6 PGC PGC.63.4 PGC.63.4 PGC.63.6 Supercedes PGF.63.6 PGF.63. PGF.63.6 PGF PGF.63.4 PGF.63.4 PGF.63. PGF.63.6 PGF PGF.63.4 PGF.63.6 Pressure range - bar -6 bar -25 bar -4 bar -6 bar - bar -6 bar -25 bar -4 bar -6 bar -4 bar Pressure range - bar -6 bar -25 bar -4 bar -6 bar - bar -6 bar -25 bar -4 bar -4 bar -6 bar Pressure range -6 bar - bar -6 bar -25 bar -4 bar -4 bar - bar -6 bar -25 bar -4 bar -6 bar Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. *Note 3: Any subsequent changes to gauge accuracy will be notified. Connector type G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom Connector type G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel Connector type G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange D D2 D3 ØD Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 32

225 f Reservoir Equipment mm Dia. Pressure Gauges Specification Construction: Case: BS 34 S5 stainless steel. Window: Acrylic. Movement: Brass. Dial: White aluminium. Pointer: Black aluminium. Liquid filling: Glycerine 98%. Working pressure: Full scale value. Process temperature: + 6 C maximum. Accuracy:.% FSD. Wetted parts connector: Copper alloy. Bourdon tube: < bar = Cu alloy, c-type, soft soldered. > bar = stainless steel.457, helical type, brazed. Mounting Stem Detail Ø6 Ø7.5 Snubber fitted G /2 ( /2 BSP) 22 A/F HEX Installation Details Bottom Connection h Symbol Note: It is recommended that all glycerine gauges should be mounted in the vertical position with gauge case relief valve uppermost. Panel Mounting (Lower Back) Dimensions (mm) Bottom Connection a b D D2 e G h SW Weight ±.5 ± Kg G / Dimensions (mm) Panel Mounting (Centre Back) b b2 D D2 e G SW Weight ±.5 ± Kg G / Note : Panel cut-out 2 ±. Note 2: 3mm on the outside radius required to allow for fixing clamp. Panel Mounted (3-hole flange) 2 D G SW ØD2 ØD 2 ØD3 a b e ØD2 Note : Note 2: D Gauge dimensions as for panel mounting option above with flange as shown below. Panel cut-out for 3-hole mounting 4±.5. Dimensions (mm) G SW D D2 D b2 b e ØD2 223 Ordering Information Bottom Connection Part number PGB25 PGB4 PGB PGB6 PGB25 PGB4 PGB6 PGB PGB6 PGB6 PGB Panel Mounting Part number PGE PGE6 PGE25 PGE4 PGE6 PGE PGE6 PGE25 PGE4 PGE6 PGE Panel Mounted (3-hole flange) Part number PG.25 PGF4 PGF PGF6 PGF25 PGF4 PGF6 PGF PGF6 PGF6 PGF Supercedes PGB..25 PGB..4 PGB.. PGB..6 PGB..25 PGB..4 PGB..6 PGB.. PGB..6 PGB..6 PGB.. Supercedes PGE.. PGE..6 PGE..25 PGE..4 PGE..6 PGE.. PGE..6 PGE..25 PGE..4 PGE..6 PGE.. Supercedes PGF..25 PGF..4 PGF.. PGF..6 PGF..25 PGF..4 PGF..6 PGF.. PGF..6 PGF..6 PGF.. Pressure range -25 bar -4 bar - bar -6 bar -25 bar -4 bar -6 bar - bar -6 bar -6 bar - bar Pressure range - bar -6 bar -25 bar -4 bar -6 bar - bar -6 bar -25 bar -4 bar -6 bar - bar Pressure range -25 bar -4 bar - bar -6 bar -25 bar -4 bar -6 bar - bar -6 bar -6 bar - bar Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. *Note 3: Any subsequent changes to gauge accuracy will be notified. Connector type G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom G /4 Bottom Connector type G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel G /4 Panel Connector type G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange G /4 Panel Flange Reservoir equipment

226 Notes 224 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK.

227 Portable Particle Counter LaserCM Fluid Condition Monitoring 225 Fluid condition monitoring

228 Portable Particle Counter LaserCM Features & Benefits Test time: 2 minutes Particle counts: 2+, 5+, 5+, 25+, 5+ and + microns 4+, 6+, 4+, 2+, 38+ and 7+ microns(c) International codes: ISO 7-22, NAS -2 Data retrieval: Memory access gives test search facility Max. working pressure: 42 bar Max. flow rate: 4 I/min when used with system 2 Sensors. Higher with single point sampler (consult Parker) Working conditions: LaserCM will operate with the system working normally Computer compatibility: Interface via RS baud rate. Special diagnostics are incorporated into the LaserCM microprocessor control to ensure effective testing. Routine contamination monitoring of oil systems with LaserCM saves time and saves money. Contamination monitoring is now possible while machinery is working - LaserCM saves on production downtime. Data entry allows individual equipment test log details to be recorded. Data retrieval of test results from memory via hand set display. Automatic test cycle logging of up to 3 tests can be selected via hand set display. Totally portable, can be used as easily in the field as in the laboratory. Automatic calibration reminder. Instant, accurate results achieved with a 2 minute test cycle. Data entry allows individual equipment footprint record. Data graphing selectable via the integral printer. Auto 3-test cycle logging via LCD handset input. RS232 serial port computer interface. Limit level output to control peripheral equipment such as off-line filtration via internal relay limit switches. Auto-testing allows for the conducting of automatic sequencing tests on flushing systems for example. Optional bar code swipe wand to allow handset data loading. Worldwide service and technical support. Typical Applications Construction machinery Industrial plant Hydraulic equipment & system manufacturers Research & testing institutes Offshore & power generation Marine Military equipment applications Parker LaserCM Portable Particle Counter. With 5 years experience in manufacturing the world s best selling white light portable particle counter CM2, the progression to the LaserCM with its opto-mechanical, continuous wave single point source laser (SPSL) is both a natural and customer driven development. 226 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 33

229 Specification Automatic Particle Counters (APC s), have been widely used for many years in condition monitoring of hydraulic fluids. However, it is only recently that APC s have become flexible enough to enable the instruments to be taken out of the laboratory and used on-line in order to obtain the most credible form of results. Unusually, the move from fixed laboratory use, to portable field use has not been at the expense of accuracy or user flexibility, but has actually enabled the instruments to be used over a wider range of applications and situations. The most common monitoring technique used in APC s is that of light obscuration or light blockage. Here, a focused light source is projected through a moving column of oil, (in which the contaminants being measured are contained), causing an image of the contaminant to be projected on to a photo diode cell, (changing light intensity to an electrical output). The electrical output of the photo diode cell will vary in accordance with the size of the particles contained in the column of oil; the larger the particle, the bigger the change in the photo diode electrical output. On-line APC s must be able to test the oil sample at whatever cleanliness it is delivered to the machine. Parker therefore had to develop technology to ensure the on-line APC was able to test a sample without the conventional laboratory technique which requires dilution - a practice that would have been simply impossible with a portable unit. By careful design and window sizing, gravimetric levels as high as 3mg of dirt per litre, (equivalent to up to 4 million particles >5 micron per ml), can be achieved without making the instrument susceptible to counter saturation. These high saturation point on-line APC s, whilst losing none of the accuracy of their laboratory counterparts, enable particle counting to be carried out quickly and accurately. A focused light source is projected through a moving column of oil. Laser Optical Sensing Core technology that proves itself in LaserCM The LaserCM portable particle counter features microprocessor controlled optical scanning for accurate contaminant measurement with a calibration range from ISO 7 to ISO 22 with no counter saturation. How does LaserCM work? The particles are measured by a photo diode that converts light intensity to a voltage output which is recorded against time. As the particle moves across the window the amount of light lost is proportional to the size of the particle. This reduction in voltage is measured and recorded. This voltage lost relates directly to the area of the particle measured, is changed into a positive voltage and then in turn changed into a capacitance value. This value is counted and stored in the LaserCM computer in one of 6 channels, >2, >5, >5, >25, >5 and >μ according to particle size. Readouts are displayed on the hand-held LCD in the accepted ISO and NAS standards ready for hard copy printing or RS232 computer download. The on-board computer allows storage of up to 3 test results. 227 Fluid condition monitoring

230 Portable Particle Counter LaserCM Specification Description A) Lexan, structural foam and ABS case B) Parylene coated ABS handheld display Mechanical composition Brass, plated steel, stainless steel and aluminium Fluorocarbon seals Perfluoroelastomer seals LaserCM LaserCM (LCM2.22) (LCM2.26) A B Nylon hoses (kevlar braided microbore) Stainless steel armoured hose ends.2m fluid connection hose 249 System 2 sensors. Higher with single point sampler Rechargeable battery pack 2Vdc power supply Fast blow fuse 24 Unique optical scanning system Bonded glass optical window enclosed in SS plate Micron channels analysis (2+,5+,5+,25+,5+ & +) Analysis range ISO 7 to 22 incl. (NAS to 2) 32 character dot matrix LCD. Alpha numeric keypad Data retrieval Calibration to ISO standards* Viscosity range 2 to cst. 5 cst.with SPS Operating temp.+5 to +8 C Ambient temp.+5 to +4 C 2 minute test completion time Memory store 3 test memory Commissioning Kit 2Vdc regulated power supply input Battery operated 6 x.5 D cells Power supply Limit socket, fuse & jack plug Screwdriver Datum & cable assy Phosphate Ester group compatibility Mineral oil & petroleum based fluid compatibility Up to 42 bar (6 psi) Integral 6 column printer RS232 computer interface Astra board case weight (Kg) 5 5 Unit weight (Kg) 8 8 DATUM software and cable link pack Weather protector cover CE certified Auto logging *Note: In compliance with international standards, all Parker portable particle counters can meet the ISO Medium test dust standards. The LaserCM s, in addition to the complete range of Condition Monitoring products, are capable of achieving certification to ISO 446:999 and with traceability to ISO 7 for SRM 286, via ISO 943. Re-chargeable battery pack Instruction manual & bar code software Power lead, printer ribbon, bar code pen & weather cover Batteries & printer reel 228 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 33

231 Operation Switch On Start Test Operating the Parker LaserCM is as simple as pressing the start button and turning the dial. The test procedure is automatic and in the case of the LaserCM takes no more than 2 minutes to complete. LaserCM makes the difference in industry Fully accredited to BS EN 6825:992 and IEC (safety of laser products) Standards, accredited to USA Standards and achieving full ISO certification. LaserCM offers users advanced laser technology, a fast, dynamic and on-line 2 minute system test cycle. A LaserCM Aggressive Fluids model is also available, suitable for monitoring corrosive fluids such as phosphate ester based lubricants used in commercial aviation. MTD calibration Laser CM2 MTD Calibration variants are certified via a primary ISO 7 calibrated automatic particle counter. All MTD Laser CM2 s achieve ISO 446:999 criteria, via ISO 943. LCM2 Using SPS Understanding MTD ACFTD (Air Cleaner Fine Test Dust) was formatted in the 96 s, but is no longer being produced. The obsolescence of this dust has led to the adoption of a new dust MTD. MTD (Medium Test Dust) having a particle size distribution close to ACFTD was selected as a replacement. However, MTD produced results somewhat different to ACFTD, so the NIST (National Institute of Standards & Technology) undertook a project to certify the particle size distribution of ISO MTD. The result was particle sizes below μm were greater than previously measured. Particles sizes reported based on NIST would be represented as μm (c), with c referring to certified. Therefore the CM2 reported sizes are as follows: ACFTD MTD 2μ 4μ (c) 5μ 6μ (c) 5μ 4μ (c) 25μ 2μ (c) 5μ 38μ (c) μ 7μ (c) MTD offers true traceability, improved particle size accuracy and better batch to batch reproduction. 229 Fluid condition monitoring

232 Portable Particle Counter LaserCM Why On-Site Fluid Contamination Monitoring Certification of fluid cleanliness levels. Early warning instrument to help prevent catastrophic failure in critical systems. Immediate results with laboratory accuracy. To comply with customer cleanliness requirements and specifications. New equipment warranty compliance. New oil cleanliness testing. Datum Data Management Datum, dedicated software, provides the link between a Laser CM2, System 2 EM2 or the H2Oil - Water in Oil and your computer management system. Features: Windows based, Icon driven program Full graphic output Tables/results download Trend analysis and predictive maintenance Auto test communication allows Datum to control particle counter testing and water in oil monitoring Certification creator using downloaded data Customer customised fields 6-column printer for hard copy data. A feature of the LaserCM is the on-board printout data graphing option developed to support predictive maintenance procedures. Laser CM Test ON LINE TEST TEST NUMBER 22 D M Y Date Time 5-52 ISO: 2/5/9 Count / ml >2μ 8272 >5μ 3564 >5μ 34 >25μ 64 >5μ 4 >μ NOTES Laser CM Test ON LINE TEST TEST NUMBER 22 D M Y Date Time 5-52 NAS CLASS: 7 Count / ml 2/5μ /5μ 325 NAS CLASS 7 5/25μ 25 NAS CLASS 3 25/5μ 5 NAS CLASS 3 5/μ 4 NAS CLASS 4 >μ NAS CLASS NOTES ISO (MTD calibration comes under ISO revised standards) Correlation to NAS Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 33

233 Introducing the new LCM Classic There is a new addition to the proven range the LCM Classic. Only available from Parker, the Classic retains all the technology that made the LaserCM one of the most accurate, reliable and popular portable particle counters available. Classic LCM2 Our design engineers have re-configured the LaserCM specification in a way that has reduced our manufacturing costs. These savings have been passed onto LCM Classic customers. How have we done this? First we talked to our existing customers and then to the engineers and maintenance operatives to find out the features that make the LaserCM a unique predictive maintenance instrument. Calibration certificate Then, we removed peripheral items such as the aluminium case and all the accessories, so a customer receives the monitor, with a CD user guide, professionally and securely boxed. One thing that has not altered is laser accuracy and laser reliability. Our in-house software engineers have reconfigured the EPROM, removing Data programming, User ID, Automatic Testing, Data retrieval, Alarm level settings, the barcode pen and Graph printing functions to reduce costs still further without in any way reducing the efficiency of the monitor. The LCM Classic is an instrument to be proud of. Empty battery pack CD user guide Carton box supplied to house kit Ordering Information (LaserCM and Classic LaserCM) Standard products table Part number Supercedes Description LCM2222 LCM2226 B8472 P84372 B84729 B8469 P84963 B84779 B8478 B B B B B MTD calibrated Classic unit - MTD calibrated Printer paper (5 rolls) Printer ribbon 2Vdc power supply Re-chargeable battery pack Weather protector cover Datum software pack Cable and adaptor Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Product configurator Model Fluid type Options LCM22 LCM Hydraulic mineral Skydrol ACFTD calibrated MTD calibrated ACFTD calibrated + bar code pen MTD calibrated + bar code pen Classic unit - ACFTD calibrated Classic unit - MTD calibrated Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 23 Fluid condition monitoring

234 Notes 232 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK.

235 Offline Sampling Universal Bottle Sampler 233 Fluid condition monitoring

236 Offline Sampling Universal Bottle Sampler Features & Benefits Simple operation Efficient testing procedure Clean and contamination free sampling Available for both mineral based and aggressive fluids Further advances the LCM2 s flexibility into laboratory bottle sampling environments Can accept various different sized bottles Minimal working parts Internal auto setting fuse for overload protection Simple maintenance procedures Typical Applications Batch sampling Aircraft rig certification Oil research Laboratory testing Transfer line monitoring Providing The Dynamic Link To All Portable Particle / Water Counters. The UBS off-line, has microprocessor technology to recognise and adjust to the connecting monitor including the LaserCM and Water in Oil Monitor. Simple To Use UBS The oil sample is drawn into the UBS Off-line where it is secured, free from further contamination, in a bottle together with a clean waste bottle by a peristaltic, self-priming pump. Simple operation and efficient testing are assured once the UBS Off-line is connected to any of the CM monitors, and powered up using it s own power source. The oil sample requires agitation and de-gassing before carrying out the contamination test. A de-gassing kit option is available and consists of a vacuum chamber and pump. (Standard with UBS.92) 234 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 34

237 Specification Description Viscosity range 2 to 25 cst Operating temp +5 to +8 C Test time 2m5s / 4m5s (Flush 2m) 2 Vdc power supply Extruded aluminium construction Unit weight - (Kg) Mineral oil and petroleum based compatibility Phosphate Ester group compatibility CE certified Military approved Manual operation Bottle pack De-gassing chamber Manual Sample tube pack Interface cable to LCM2, H2Oil etc. UBS offline 4 Fluorocarbon seal EPDM seals Installation Details CTRS 8 CTRS 65 CTRS 235 Fluid condition monitoring

238 Offline Sampling Universal Bottle Sampler Usage Specifications System Flow Rate Samples are best taken from a point in the system where the flow is TURBULENT (Reynolds No. greater than 4). The turbulent flow creates a mixing action. Where flow is streamline or LAMINAR, larger particulate may tend to settle toward the lower pipe surface and not be sampled. System Condition Changes Changes in the system operating condition, flow, temperature, pressure or vibration, can result in previously sedimented contaminant being retrained into the flowing oil. It is also possible that these changes may cause partially contaminated filter elements to shed particulate into the system. Samples should, therefore, be extracted when the system is in a steady state condition and the result less likely to be distorted by contaminant peaks. There are a number of proprietary sampling valves available which adhere to good theoretical principles. However, they do tend to generate a level of precision and cost which is unnecessary for trend monitoring. Sampling points should enable extraction of a sample without changing the system s condition. Fine control needle valves are not desirable, as they have a tendency to silt up under some operating conditions, causing the distribution of contaminants in the fluid to be changed. The sampling port should be protected to maintain cleanliness and thoroughly flushed before collecting the sample for analysis. Allow sufficient airspace in the bottle to enable 8% fill. Bottle Cleanliness It is preferable that bottles have sealing screw caps and both parts are cleaned to a suitable level in accordance with lso3722. The bottle should not contain more than one tenth the number of particles per mi than are expected to be monitored. Standard Parker bottles are supplied clean to lso3/ (NAS Class 4) and should not be used to accurately count oils cleaner than ISO 5/2 (NAS Class 6) although they may be used for trend monitoring at lower levels. The bottle should remain capped until time of sample filling and re-capped immediately afterwards. Sample Mixing Sedimentation of contaminant in a sample will occur, the rate of which is dependent upon both fluid and particle characteristics. Samples should be analysed, without delay, once agitated and de-gassed. 236 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 34

239 Ordering Information Standard products table Part number UBS92 UBS93 UBS94 UBS95 Description Universal bottle sampler (inludes aluminium case and kit) Universal bottle sampler Aggressive universal bottle sampler Aggressive universal bottle sampler (Includes aluminium case and kit) Accessories Part number B8997 B899 S8454 S895 B8963 B8982 Supercedes B B.89.9 B B Description Sample bottle kit (2 Bottles) Sample bottle pack (5 x B.8997) Power supply and socket De-gassing kit and pump De-gassing chamber Cable and adaptor Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 237 Fluid condition monitoring

240 Notes 238 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK.

241 Single Point Sampler SPS 239 Fluid condition monitoring

242 Single Point Sampler SPS Features & Benefits The Single Point Sampler provides a means to connect a CM2 or H2Oil to a single pressure test point and balance the differential pressure across the system, to provide a controlled flow of oil into the monitor and away into a waste oil receptacle. Lightweight, compact and easy to use design Fingertip operated control valve even at high pressures 42 bar (6,PSI) rated Facilitates testing from large diameter pipes Capability to test up to 5cSt viscosity oils (pressure permitting) Pressure compensated flow control mechanism Possible to control the valve with the same level of accuracy whether the device is operating at high or low pressure Capable of allowing a flow rate in excess of ml/min when operating at any viscosity within the product specification Suitable for fluid temperatures from +5 C to +8 C (+4 F to +76 F) High quality polished finish. (stainless steel/ aircraft grade aluminium) Capable of working with a CM2 or H2Oil connected into a system via the standard one metre extension hose kit Suitable for use with mineral and biodegradable oils, petroleum based and phosphate ester fluids Phosphate ester version utilises the 5 /8 BSF HSP style fitting Designed so that it meets the lowest possible level of magnetic permeability Supplied with accessories kit It will maintain the set flow rate between upper and lower limits within a bar inline pressure change Clear product identification to ensure that it is connected correctly. (i.e. downstream of the CM2 or H2Oil) Connection Instructions (F) System Prs. (D) (A) R. Ensure valve is closed (A). 2. Connect P2 on monitor (B) to P2 on Single Point Sampler (SPS) (C). 3. Connect drain line on SPS (D). 4. Connect P of monitor (E) to the system (F). 5. The SPS is ready to operate. 6. Open valve (A) slowly until the oil flows continuously from the drainline (D). 7. Switch on monitor and begin testing. (E) P Monitor P2 (C) (B) Single point sampler LCM2 Only Carry out flow test as shown in the manual. If test is showing below Δt 3.6 C then carry out test as normal. If, however, test is above Δt 3.6 C then increase oil flow by turning valve (A) anticlockwise and then carry out flow test. Do this until Δt is below 3.6 C and carry out test as normal once this is achieved. WARNING! Ensure that SPS valve is closed and monitor is connected to the SPS BEFORE connection to system. 24 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 35

243 Specification Fluid compatibility: Mineral oil and petroleum based fluids (standard version). Aggressive fluid (dual seal version) for other fluids consult Parker Hannifin. Seals: Fluorocarbon or Perfluoroelastomer. Maximum working pressure: 42 bar (6 psi). Weight: 5 grams max. (Not including hoses). Packaging standard: Cardboard carton (military usage - plastic carry case). Unit size: 45mm dia x 23mm long. System connection: Standard - minimess M6 (G /4 BSP) with cap, Aggressive - 5 /8 BSF HSP. Operating temp range: +5 C to +8 C (+4 F to +76 F). Storage temperature range: -26 C to +8 C (-5 F to +76 F). Construction: Body: Finish: Aluminium BS 47 pressurised end stainless steel. Anodised blue (standard version). Anodised red (dual seal version). 23 SWP 42 bar 8. P2 Ø Ordering Information Standard products table Product number Supercedes Description SPS22 SPS26 B84784 B84224 B84225 B84788 B84787 B B B B B Mineral single point sampler Aggressive single point sampler Mineral or aggressive bottle assembly Mineral oil extension hose/coupling Aggressive oil extension hose/coupling Mineral oil waste hose Aggressive oil waste hose Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 24 Fluid condition monitoring

244 Notes 242 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK.

245 Inline Sensors & Monitors System Fluid condition monitoring

246 Inline Sensors & Monitors System 2 Features & Benefits Covering a wide range of flow rates, fluid types and applications, Parker s System 2 sensors are designed to be used with System 2 electronic or analogue monitors, contamination monitors and the H2Oil. Specially developed System 2 sensors are available for use with aggressive fluids. (EPDM Seals) System 2 monitors, combined with the inline sensor, give the user accurate and instant readings of flow, pressure and temperature without the need to shut down the system. For use with all mineral oils, water and water/oil emulsions. Analogue Monitor utilises 3 Day-Glo dial gauges with a protective hinged cover. Calibrated up to 38 l/min with dual scale bar/psi & C/ F. (US GPM also available) EM2 Electronic Monitor gives a full digital display. Automatically calibrated for all 3 sizes of sensor. Indicates line, differential and rising peak pressure. Easily scrolled from metric to US. 3 test memory. Capable of downloading saved data to datum. Typical Applications Drilling equipment Mining Grinding and conveying Industrial hydraulics Mobile Hydraulic system users need to ensure that lost production is kept to the absolute minimum. To ensure this, predictive maintenance and therefore routine condition monitoring of major components is essential. System 2 inline sensors remain at the heart of condition and contamination monitoring. Whether you re mining the coal, building the new bypass, harvesting the crops, crossing the oceans or drilling offshore whatever the industry, System 2 represents the premier system monitoring available today. 244 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 36

247 Specification: Sensors Installation Details Construction: Machined steel body. Electroless nickel coating to minimum depth of 4 microns Brass/stainless steel internal components Flow capacities: All suitable for use with oil, water and water/oil emulsion Size 6-25 l/min (.5-7US GPM) Size 2- l/min (.5-26 US GPM) Size l/min (5- US GPM) Max. working pressure: 42 bar (6psi) Capability: Reverse flow Pressure drop: At max. rated flow, Δp is. bar (mineral oil fluid at 3 cst 4 SSU). Ports: Size G 3 /8 Size G 3 /4 } (SAE threads also available) Size 2 G /4 Repeatability: ±% FSD Accuracy: Flow ±2.5% full scale deflection Weight: Size.5kg (.2lbs) Size 3.5kg (8.4lbs) Size 2 4.4kg (9lbs) Aggressive Fluid Applications: EPDM internal/external O -rings and seals Size Sensor 56 ø3 Size Sensor 66.5 ø4 Size 2 Sensor 73.5 ø G 3 /8 G 3 / G /4 Ordering Information Standard products table STI44 STI44 STI244 STI48 STI48 STI248 Product number Supercedes STI.44. STI.44. STI.244. STI.48. STI.48. STI.248. Size 2 2 Flow range I/min Fluid type Mineral Mineral Mineral Aggressive Aggressive Aggressive Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Note 3: Mobile Sensors are also available - Contact Parker Port threads 3 /8 3 /4 /4 3 /8 3 /4 /4 245 Fluid condition monitoring

248 Inline Sensors & Monitors System 2 A drilling equipment operation in a zinc mine has had System 2 installed for several years. System 2 Saving 5, Pump Damage Installing System 2 was part of a major restructuring plan to improve mining effectiveness and profitability. Machine operator training and oil storage operative training were essential elements of the plan. Prior to this investment, pump terminal damage could cost, for a replacement, over service costs and up to 39, in lost production. Add to this the difficulties of the mine s geography and it s easy to see the problems that have now been overcome. System 2 Saving 325, A Day Lost Production The mining industry puts a considerable demand on hydraulics and there are others such as agricultural machinery, harvesters or tractors and, for example, cement manufacturing plants that are equally demanding of hydraulic efficiency. A grinding and conveying plant processes in excess of tons of ore per day in the manufacture of cement products. A days lost production costs 32,. After one year of operation the Plant Engineers decided to invest in System 2 equipment, strategically placed to allow the Engineers to fault-find the major components quickly and easily. The result is that downtime and loss of production have been reduced by 8%. System 2 Electronic Monitor With System 2 inline sensors installed in a hydraulic system, faults can be predicted and remedied, all you have to do is connect the System 2 Electronic Hand Held Monitor (EM2). Designed to display flow, temperature, differential, rising peak and line pressure, System 2 Electronic can also calculate hydraulic power (kw and hp.) at a given point in a system to establish efficiency and power consumption. System 2 electronics versatility does not end there. The EM2 is automatically calibrated for all System 2 inline sensors using water or oil and can display in l/min, US GPM, bar, psi and kg/cm2. Battery powered and completely portable, the EM2 displays readings on the LCD and can store under a test number. Data can be downloaded via an RS232 connection to Datum. A sealed keyboard and fingertip control make the unit maintenance free and simple to use anywhere. System 2 -The Key To Predictive Maintenance The risk of fluid contamination by intrusive test devices is eliminated. Using System 2 Sensors and the monitor together, hydraulic fluids need never be disturbed. The monitoring procedure takes only a matter of minutes. With one System 2 monitor a user can check a complete fleet of vehicles or a factory full of hydraulic plant equipment. Predicting a problem means it can be put right as part of a planned maintenance programme. Simple routine monitoring with System 2 keeps machines running at a high level of operational efficiency. System 2 -The Proven System For operators of industrial and mobile machinery who recognise the benefits of installing System 2 in a hydraulic system, the System 2 hand-held analogue monitor offers significant advantages, particularly in intrinsically safe applications. Like the System 2 electronic, the analogue monitor is completely portable and can be connected immediately to a purpose-designed inline System 2 sensor but requires no power source. The analogue monitor will then - provide the user with an accurate and repeatable analysis of system flow, pressure and temperature - without having to stop the machine. Designed as a sealed assembly requiring no routine maintenance or adjustment, analogue monitors are suitable for use with all mineral oils, water/oil emulsions and water. The lightweight monitor has 3 dayglo dial gauges and features a protective hinged cover. The flow scale features double scale calibration - up to l/min and 38 l/min and has excess flow and reverse flow indication. 246 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 36

249 Electronic Monitor Specification Construction: A sealed assembly requiring no routine maintenance or adjustment. Body moulding in Acrylonitrile Butadene Styrene (ABS). Key pad moulded in silicon rubber. The monitor is suitable for use with all mineral oils, water and water/oil emulsions. LCD details Flow section: The analogue flow scale has reverse flow and overflow indication and provides a percentage reading of the digital full scale display automatically calibrated for all sizes of System 2 Sensor. Pressure section: Designed to indicate line pressure, differential pressure and rising peak pressure. Connected to a System 2 Sensor it will monitor pressure up to 42 bar (6 psi) with an accuracy of ±% FSD. Temperature section: Temperature reading between - C and + C ( F to 23 F). Dimensions: The ABS Case is 29mm (.46 ) long, 5mm (4.3 ) wide and 76mm (3 ) deep overall. Weight:.4kg (3lbs). Data logging: Each test logs the following data: Test number; time & date; sensor size; media tested; flow rate, pressure & temperature. Data download: The System 2 electronic monitor is capable of downloading saved test data to a 6 column serial printer, or a compatible PC via an RS232 connection using datum. Batteries: 6 x AA batteries. Hose retainers 29mm (.46in) Purge knob Function keys Display Battery covers mm (39.4in) nominal 5mm (4.3in) 76mm (3in) Ordering Information Standard products table Product number Supercedes Description EM29 B84779 P65367 B8567 B B System 2 electronic monitor Datum download software Monitor and sensor carrying case Dongle and cable assembly Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 247 Fluid condition monitoring

250 Inline Sensors & Monitors System 2 Analogue Monitor Specification Construction: A sealed assembly requiring no routine maintenance or adjustment. Body moulding in Acrylonitrile Butadene Styrene (ABS). The monitor is suitable for use with all mineral oils, water and water/oil emulsions. The monitor has 3 dayglo dial gauges and features a protective hinged cover. Gauge details Flow section: The flow scale has double scales for size and 2 sensors only. Calibrated up to l/min (26 US GPM) and 38 l/min ( US GPM). The flow dial has excess-flow indication. Temperature section: The temperature dial gives readings between - C and + C ( F to 23 F). Dimensions: The ABS Case is 292mm (.5in) long, 8mm (4.25in) wide and 67mm (2.64in) deep overall. Weight:.4kg (3lbs). A viscosity chart is provided for mineral oil applications where monitoring is required at variable viscosities (cst). When the system is in reverse flow or when the high pressure lines to the sensor have been transposed, a below zero indication is given. Pressure section: Dial readings in both bar and psi up to 42 bar (6psi). Hose retainers System flow rate 292mm (.5in) Purge knob System pressure System temperature mm (39.4in) nominal 8mm (4.25in) 67mm (2.64in) 98mm (7.79in) Ordering Information Standard products table Product number STM62 STM66 STM622 STM662 Supercedes STM.62. STM.66. STM.62.2 STM.66.2 Media type Oil Oil Water Water Flow readings l/min US GPM l/min US GPM Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Accessories Product number Description P65367 P6536 Monitor and sensor carrying case Metal sensor protective cap Pressure readings Dual scale bar/psi Dual scale bar/psi Dual scale bar/psi Dual scale bar/psi Temperature readings Dual scale C/ F Dual scale C/ F Dual scale C/ F Dual scale C/ F 248 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 36

251 Autoremote Particle Counter MCM2 249 Fluid condition monitoring

252 Autoremote Particle Counter MCM2 Features & Benefits The MCM2 is an online continuous particle counter ensuring constant system monitoring within defined parameters. PC/PLC controlled Ensures constant system monitoring. Can be pre-set to carry out tests at specific intervals. Can also be set up via detachable Handset. Enclosed in a metal casing, with internal workings on a removable chassis for ease of service and calibration. Connects permanently to a System 2 sensor via 2 meter hose assembly (supplied). Simple data formatting programme for trend analysis. User-friendly instrument improving familiarity and awareness of service and maintenance personnel. Typical Applications Test rigs Construction machinery Industrial plant Hydraulic equipment & system manufacturers Paper processing Steel rolling mills Military equipment application The Parker MCM2 Proven as a portable particle counter able to operate in any condition, MCM2 and its principles are available to users where continuous, permanent installed monitoring is required. The MCM2 utilises the latest laser diode method of particle counting as per our standard LaserCM. The unit is enclosed in a metal casing with access to the hydraulic connection, DC input power, fuse holder and PC/PLC connection ports located on the front panel. The internal workings are manufactured onto a removable chassis for ease of service and calibration. 25 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 37

253 Specification Test cycle time: Variable between 3 seconds and 3 minutes. Repeat test time: Continuous Mode or between 3 seconds and 44 minutes (24 Hours). Principle of operation: Optical scanning analysis and measurement of actual particles. Particle counts: 6 channels either ACFTD or MTD calibrated. International codes: ISO 7-22, NAS -2. Storage temperature: -4 C to +8 C. Operating temperature: +5 C to +6 C (hydraulic oil temperature). Unit control connection: Terminal protocol via RS 232 or optional handset. Data retrieval: Local PC / PLC program or by optional handset. Calibration: By accepted on-line methods confirmed by relevant International Standard Organisation procedures. Re-calibration: Annual certification by an approved Parker Service Centre. Max. working pressure: 42 bar. Minimum working pressure: 2 bar. Fluid compatibility: Mineral oil or petroleum based fluids. Aggressive fluid version also available. Sample requirements:.3.5 DP bar (differential pressure) via approved inline sampling concept. System connection: Via System 2 inline sensors / single point sampler Computer compatibility: Interface via RS baud rate. Size/weight: 249mm x 254mm x 9mm / 8.75kg. Power requirement: 2 Vdc input. (.25A (T) fuse). Regulated. Installation: Back/base M6x. mounting inserts (see annotated diagrams). Software: LabView demonstration software. 9 Over fixing screws 87 4 mounting hole M6 x CTRS Power on green LED 9 CTRS M6 minimess adaptors (P2 & P).25A fuse 25 Fluid condition monitoring

254 Autoremote Particle Counter MCM2 Communications Protocol The comms protocol for the product is as follows: Baud rate = 96 Data bits = 8 Parity = None Stop bits = Flow control = None Labview Optional Remote Handset Optional remote handset for direct interface control. Please consult Parker for more information. Customised demonstration/software for MCM operation. Full graphic display. Visual indication of limit parameters. Standard products table Product number Supercedes Description MCM2222 MCM2222HS MCM222 MCM222HS MCM226 MCM2262 MCM226HS MCM2262HS B946 B947 B9482 B948 MCM2.222.HS MCM2.22.HS MCM2.26.HS MCM2.262.HS B.94.6 B.94.7 B B.94.8 MTD calibrated - mineral MTD calibrated - mineral - with handset ACFTD calibrated - mineral ACFTD calibrated - mineral - with handset ACFTD calibrated - aggressive MTD calibrated - aggressive ACFTD calibrated - aggressive - with handset MTD calibrated - aggressive - with handset Handset (blue) Handset (red) 2m mineral hose assembly 2m aggressive hose assembly Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 252 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 37

255 Fluid Condition Monitoring H2Oil - Water in Oil Monitor 253 Fluid condition monitoring

256 Fluid Condition Monitoring H2Oil - Water in Oil Monitor Features & Benefits Water monitoring is now possible while machinery is working - H2Oil saves on production downtime. Totally portable, can be used easily in the field without the need for mains power, as well as in the laboratory. Connects into system at pressures up to 42 bar, via either system 2 sensor or single point sampler. 9 second test time. Scrolling memory for 5 tests plus memory for 2 different oil calibration curves. Routine water monitoring of oil systems with H2Oil saves time and money, promoting oil longevity. Samples that are tested are truly representative of water in the system. Analysis carried out before sample hydrodynamics change. Data entry facility enables user to store unique data test log details with every test carried out. Instant, accurate results are available on the display or the built-in printer ensuring maintenance decisions can be taken immediately. Computer interface available for downloading data on to the computer through the RS232 serial port. Internal diagnostics features ensures H2Oil will work accurately and reliably. Supplied in a robust aluminium carrying case. Optional oil delivery kit for simple offline sampling (see fig.). Fig. Typical Applications Off-shore & power generation Marine Construction machinery Paper mills Hydraulic equipment & system manufacturers Research & testing institutes Military equipment application The H2Oil is a two channel non-dispersive absorption spectrometer, designed to measure the level of water content polluting the oil, reducing system efficiency, promoting wear and affecting safety. The H2Oil makes it possible for an end user or service engineer to carry out quick, accurate measurements, taken in the field instead of remote laboratory analysis. With its secured hoses the H2Oil connects to an in-line System 2 sensor or single point sampler and features a re-chargeable 2Vdc power pack, diagnostic computer and on-board printer for effective logging and retrieval of data. 254 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 38

257 Specification Construction: Case-Noryl structural foam and ABS printer cover. Key pad silicone rubber. Mechanical composition: Brass, plated steel, stainless steel. Seals: Fluorocarbon. Hoses: Nylon (Kevlar braided microbore). Hose length: Fluid connection hose.2 metre (3.9 feet). Flow rate: Up to 4 l/min ( US GPM). (System 2 Sensors). Higher flows with SPS. Max. working pressure: Up to 42 Bar (6 psi). Fluid compatibility: Mineral oil and petroleum based fluids. Power: Re-chargeable battery pack (2Vdc trickle charger supplied). Fuse: 5. amp fast blow fuse included for overload protection. H2Oil technology: Infrared absorption spectroscopy Measurement and range: PPM (-3) or % content. Max operating temperature: +5 C to +8 C (+4 F to +76 C). Environmental temperature: +5 C to +4 C (+4 F to +4 F). Test completion time: 9 seconds. Memory store: 5 TEST (scrolling memory) capacity. Printer facility: Integral 6 column thermal printer for hard copy data. Computer interface RS232. Repeatability/accuracy: Better than 5% (typical). Viscosity range: 2- cst (9-46 SSU). 5cSt with SPS. Commissioning kit: Includes 2 re-chargeable battery packs ( fitted to monitor), 2 x thermal printer rolls, spare fuse,screwdriver, 2Vdc trickle charger and user manual. Data entry: 24 character two line back lit dot matrix LCD. Full alpha numeric keypad. Data retrieval: Memory access gives test search facility. Monitor carry case: Robust padlockable aluminium presentation case. Datum: Condition monitoring data software pack plus cable included in commissioning kit. 38mm (2.5 ) 346mm (3.62 ) handle raised 235mm (9.25 ) 3mm 2mm (5.2 ) (.79 ) 8mm (7.9 ) 255 Fluid condition monitoring

258 Fluid Condition Monitoring H2Oil - Water in Oil Monitor How the H2Oil Works On-line testing allows a mixed and flowing sample of oil and water to pass through the infrared measuring cell. A series of measurements can be taken and the average given as a result. With this method a representative oil sample is seen, unlike the usual reservoir samples sent for analysis. Also, by taking the test at working temperature and pressure, a true water content is taken, as both affect the way water is absorbed in oil. The flowing sample passes through a special water free optical cell. The infrared detector monitors two narrow band pass filters, one of which matches the spectral width of the water attenuation band. The second narrow wave band selected is unaffected by water and serves as a reference. By taking the transmission ratio between the two points an effective measurement of water can be made. Core Technology H2Oil uses true infrared (IR) analysis technique - the principle used in all laboratory spectrometers, to measure absorbed water (before saturation point). Channel one (2.6μ) is the reference point, whereas channel two (3μ) is H2O. The IR source is a tungsten halogen bulb. Effective Oil Maintenance Take a typical application where water can have a very detrimental effect on bearings. Cracks are generated early in life of a bearing and water, once condensed in the crack, leads to corrosion and early damage. Loss of bearing life, due to water contamination, (see below) can be prevented by stopping the water from entering the system in the first place. Introducing a regular water content monitoring function into the programme, such as the H2Oil, would support such efforts. % Bearing Life Remaining Whatever the application, whether it be offshore in the oil industry or off-road in the construction or earth moving industry, the portability of the H2Oil makes it an essential kit for the service van or engineers tool. Ordering Information Standard products table Product number Supercedes WOM9 B97 B.9.7 S8434 B84779 B B976 B.9.76 Description H2Oil (includes aluminium case and kit) Printer paper (5 rolls) Oil delivery unit Datum download software Cable and adaptor Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. % Water In Oil 256 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 38

259 Moisture Sensor Range MS, MS5 257 Fluid condition monitoring

260 Cost Effective Moisture Detection MS Moisture Sensor Features & Benefits Continuous, online moisture indication, for hydraulic and lubricating systems. Reporting of % relative humidity of water content, giving the user information on how close to the fluids real saturation point. Reliable data on the rate of water absorption. Sensing cell technology using a laser trimmed thermoset polymer, for capacitive sensing that is capable of absorbing water molecules due to its micro porous structure. Uses a thermistor for temperature compensation correction. Offering total confidence in reporting the %RH relative humidity over the sensors temperature range. M2, IP68, 5 way moulded cable. +8 to +3 Vdc supply voltage. Adjustable alarm limit. A purpose designed tee adaptor allows for easy installation into an existing fluid system. The MS can also be specified with a bench top wand offering the end user greater flexibility. Typical Applications Pulp and paper plants Marine hydraulics Power transmission & distribution Oil reclamation Industrial hydraulics Earth moving applications Agricultural In-Line Moisture Measurement of Hydraulic & Lubricating Oils. Parkers MS Moisture Sensor offers fast, reliable and accurate in-line detection of moisture in fluids. The MS transducer type technology has been especially designed with the preventative maintenance programme environment in mind. The industry accepted sensing cell device will monitor and report Relative Humidity (RH), moisture content in oils. The water content measurement technique offers the end user benefits over the current standard form of water content reporting (PPM). This allows for real time preventative maintenance to be undertaken and corrective actions to be made. By knowing that the water contamination is still within the oils absorbing range, less than %, reclaiming fluid properties before additive damage occurs can initiate calculable cost savings. 258 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 39

261 Specification Pressure: Maximum allowable operating pressure. (MAOP): 42 bar (6 psi). Operating temperature: Maximum: 85 C (85 F). Minimum: -5 C (-5 F) dependent on seal material. Flow through sensor cell: Installed in active flowstream. Fluid compatibility: Mineral oils and petroleum-based phosphate ester Skydrol option available. Viscosity range: Unlimited. Thread form connections: See ordering information. Outputs: - 5 Vdc ( Vdc dynamic range). Maximum alarm output lead:.5 amps (maximum continuous lead). Supply voltage: 8-3 Vdc/3mA. Calibration accuracy: +/- 2% RH. Compensated thermal stability: +/- % RH (+ C to +8 C). Materials: Stainless steel 365. Sensor size/weight: 7mm x ø5mm/.3kg. IP rating: IP68 (with specified moulded cable). Installation Details Ø Ø26.. Ø A/F Hexagon Thread detail dice pattern M2 x. pitch 42. Usage Specifications Interpreting the data Oil type: Texaco Rando 46. Saturation point: 65ºC (5ºF). At the above operating condition, the meter displays % saturation. As the meters scale indicates a reduction in the saturation percentage, there is also a corresponding reduction in PPM at a constant temperature. In the example above, a meter reading of 5% saturation could be interpreted as 2ppm at 65ºC (5ºF). Sensor Using only the sensor as a go/no-go device, a red LED will indicate when the oils water concentration reaches 8% saturation and trigger a corresponding voltage output. The unit also features an analogue output proportional to % saturation with a dynamic range of.85 to 4.5 volts. %RH Under Over Vdc < > Fluid condition monitoring

262 Cost Effective Moisture Detection MS Moisture Sensor Visual Indicators Specifications Bar Graph Indicator (PBG.834A) Construction: Housing nylon 6/6, window acrylic, bezel/board supports ABS, pins phosphor bronze. Power supply: 3 Vdc. Signal input: (By dipswitch configuration) Off differential up to 5V. A single signal (Ref. V) up to 5V. B single signal (Ref. V) up to 6V. Cut out size: 45.6mm x 45.6mm. Fixing: Push fit panel thickness.9mm to 3.2mm. Sealing: Designed to IP5 standard. (Front face may be silicon sealed after LED configuration). Scale: Supplied to % in horizontal. Other scales, in volume, consult Parker Hannifin. Scaling factors: % to % range. Fully adjustable. Lamp intensity: 4mcd each. Front viewing: Polarised. Weight: 29gms. Description Power supply Accuracy Sample rate Operating temp ( C) Storage temp ( C) Display Power output (Vdc) Weight (kg) Panel cutout (mm) Dimensions (mm) DDU Vdc ± /% typical per second to +7 5 digit LED x48 ±/.5 48x96x DDU2-24 Vdc ±.% typical 2.5 per second to +7 3 /2 digit LED x45 ±/.5 48x96x93 PBG834A DDU DDU2 The MS Moisture Sensor has a maximum cable length of meters, before the output starts to degrade. The MS extension box boosts all the outputs from the MS Moisture Sensor. This enables the outputs to go another meters. Features IP67 rated container (2mm x mm x 6mm) Integrated meter PVC cable already fitted. Complete with wall mounting kit. No additional power supply required. Universal box means it can be positioned in any orientation. 26 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 39

263 Ordering Information Standard products table - moisture sensors Product number Supercedes Model Thread form Seal option MSP MS5P MS2P MS3P MS4P MS6P MS7P MS-P MS-5P MS-2P MS-3P MS-4P MS-6P MS-7P MS MS MS MS MS MS MS /4" BSP with bonded seal 9 /6-8UNF 2A (SAE J54) /4" BSP with integral seal R /4" BSPT /4" NPT Handheld version Inline tee version Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. P P P P P P P Standard products table - accessories/panel displays Product Number Supercedes Description P9732PVC2 P9732PVC5 DDU2 PBG834A P9732PVC P9732PUR2 P9732PUR5 P9732PUR S974 S974 P9732 DDU P.9732PVC-2 P.9732PVC-5 DDU-2 PBG.834.A P.9732PVC- P.9732PUR-2 P.9732PUR-5 P.9732PUR- DDU- 2 meter M2 IP68 PVC coated cable 5 meter M2 IP68 PVC coated cable + to +24 Vac process indicator + to +3 Vdc bar graph indicator meter M2 IP68 PVC coated cable 2 meter M2 IP68 PUR coated cable 5 meter M2 IP68 PUR coated cable meter M2 IP68 PUR coated cable 2 Vdc power supply meter extension box IP67 Re-wireable M2 connector +22 to +55 Vdc process indicator Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 26 Fluid condition monitoring

264 Cost Effective Moisture Detection MS5 Moisture Sensor Features & Benefits Return line low pressure rating: Up to bar (45 PSI) Results reported as a % saturation of water in your oil Variable signal output options (+ to +5 Vdc) (+4 to +2mA) RH% ( to +5 Vdc) Temperature Compatible with Parker Digital Display Units (DDU, DDU2 and the bar graph indicator PBG834A) Simple dynamic installation into a flow path Temperature compensated results Two thread forms ( /4 BSPT & /4 NPT) Easier and more flexible cable connection Independent temperature output 2 alarm point option with alarm module (PAM8342) Parkers MS5 Moisture Sensor is the easy-to-fit, lightweight and cost-effective solution to accurately measure the % moisture present in operating fluids. MS5 provides an effective early warning device when connected to an array of monitoring options to ensure continuous system protection and fluid integrity. Typical Applications Earth moving machinery Forestry Agricultural (harvestors, tractors) Industrial factory (pulp & paper processes) Marine (hydraulic stabilizer systems) Test rig stands (critical test machines) Ground support vehicles (military) Fluid transfer systems (skids) Commercial aerospace and ground support systems (skids) Detect water contamination before it shuts your application down Dynamic moisture monitoring for todays demanding mobile hydraulic systems. The new lightweight MS5 moisture sensor is designed to produce accurate, real time moisture indications in petroleum - based, synthetic oils and phosphate ester (aggressive fluids) below fluid saturation levels. 262 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 39

265 Specification Pressure: Maximum allowable operating pressure. (MAOP): bar (45 PSI). Operating temperature: Minimum: -2 C (-4 F). Maximum: +85 C (+85 F). Flow through sensor cell: Installed in active flowstream. Fluid compatibility: Mineral oils, petroleum-based and Phosphate ester. Viscosity range: Unlimited. Port connections: /4 BSPT or /4 NPT. Outputs: Variable - see sensor outputs. Supply voltage: +8 to +3 Vdc. Sensor size/weight/material: 8mm x 43mm/.kg/Aluminium IP ratings: IP54 Installation Details A/F Ø38. Ø. All dimensions in millimetres (mm) Dimensions are for reference only MS5 Thread Form Options BSPT NPT Water enters hydraulic and lubricating systems from a variety of sources. Atmospheric ingression of water vapor, as well as internal heat exchanger leaks, create unfavorable operating conditions. The MS5 Moisture Sensor eliminates the guesswork by providing real time condition monitoring. It is designed to work well in petroleum/synthetic hydraulic and lubricating oil applications. Ø. R /4 BSPT. maximum Ø. /4 NPT. maximum Flow in either direction Tapping drill Tap to gauge.8 with reamer.2 without reamer Flow in either direction Tapping drill.7 with reamer. without reamer Installation details for R /4 BSPT taper Installation details for /4 NPT For alternative thread forms please contact Parker Filtration 263 Fluid condition monitoring

266 Cost Effective Moisture Detection MS5 Moisture Sensor Interpreting Data The Parker MS5 Moisture Sensor is designed to provide real time accurate and repeatable results reported as % saturation of water. Percent saturation is a useful measurement that offers the user a simple, quantitative method in determining how wet or dry a hydraulic or lubricating system may be. In contrast, PPM and % water by volume measurements provide little information about a fluid s free or dissolved water condition. % saturation can now easily be converted to PPM as long as the fluid s saturation point is known using the MS5 temp output. Example Oil type: Texaco Rando 46 Saturation point: +65 C (+5 F) At the above operating condition, the meter displays % saturation. As the meter s scale indicates a reduction in the saturation percentage, there is also a corresponding reduction in PPM at a constant temperature. In the example above, a meter reading of 5% saturation could be interpreted as 2ppm at +65 C (+5 F) Sensor Outputs MS5 moisture sensor pin designations Pin Designation Supply %RH %RH Temperature Common I/O Input Output Output Output Input Description Supply voltage (+8 to +3Vdc) % Saturation out (+ to +5Vdc) % Saturation out (+4 to +2mA) Temperature out ( to +5Vdc) Common (Vdc) ground from power supply (not chassis ground) Indicator Options For specifications on the process indicator options see page 268 and 269 for ordering information. Description Power supply Accuracy Sample rate Operating temp ( C) Storage temp ( C) Display Power output (Vdc) Weight (kg) Panel cutout (mm) Dimensions (mm) DDU Vdc ± /% typical per second to +7 5 digit LED x48 ±/.5 48x96x DDU2-24 Vdc ±.% typical 2.5 per second to +7 3 /2 digit LED x45 ±/.5 48x96x93 DDU DDU2 Ordering Information Standard products table Product number Supercedes Description MS53 DDU2 MS54 DDU PBG834A PAM8342 MS5-3 DDU-2 MS5-4 DDU- PBG.834.A PAM.8342 /4" BSPT moisture sensor + to +24 Vac process indicator /4" NPT moisture sensor +22 to +55 Vdc process indicator Bar graph indicator Alarm module Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 264 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 39

267 Hand-held Oil Condition Monitor Oilcheck 265 Fluid condition monitoring

268 Hand-held Oil Condition Monitor Oilcheck Features & Benefits A comparator between new and used oils. Oilcheck gives early warning of impending engine failure. Cost effective solution to save money and help increase engine life. Completely portable, battery powered. Ideal for fleet owners, garages and DIY mechanics. Numerical display to show positive or negative increase in dielectrics. Using Oilcheck Following the simple sampling procedure. The Oilcheck will ensure effective and highly repeatable results. Once a clean oil sample has been placed in the Sensor Well and the TEST button has been pressed, the instrument will zero on the sample. Once cleaned out with a degreaser and replaced by a contaminated sample, a new reading is obtained on the LCD, which can be easily compared against the green/amber/red efficiency scale. Typical Applications Fleet owners Construction equipment maintenance Vehicle service garages Plant hire maintenance The Oilcheck from Parker Filtration s Condition Monitoring Centre detects and measures the dielectric constant of oil, by comparing the measurements obtained from used and unused oils of the same brand. Used as a regular service monitoring instrument, the Oilcheck will give the engineer warning of an impending engine failure and promote increased engine life. Oilcheck is the low-cost solution that will take the guesswork out of oil changes, saving money and time. 266 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 4

269 Specification Using Oilcheck Case construction: ABS. Circuitry: Microprocessor control. Battery: x 9V alkaline. Display: LCD. Suitable oil types: Mineral and synthetic based oils. Repeatability: Better than 5%. Readout: Green/amber/red grading, Numerical value (-). Battery lifetime: >5 hours or 3, tests. Dimensions: 25mm x 95mm x 34mm (9.8 x 3.7 x.3 ). Weight:.4kg. Green/amber/red numerical value The Oilcheck can remove the need for costly and time consuming laboratory analysis of mineral and synthetic oils used in engines, gearboxes and bearing lubrication systems. It detects mechanical wear and any loss of lubricating properties in the oil with a repeat accuracy of less than 5%. The Oilcheck is able to show changes in the oil condition brought about by the ingress of water content, fuel contamination, metallic content and oxidation. Installation Details Function buttons Ø95 Visual display Numerical display Sample sensor 25 Re cal button Test button On/Off Hi/Lo switch Ordering Information Standard products table Product number OLK65 OLK6 Description Oilcheck kit with numerical readout Oilcheck cleaner Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 267 Fluid condition monitoring

270 With Parker as your partner, you have access to the world's broadest line of motion control components and systems Parker is the only company in the World to manufacture and supply a complete range of hydraulic, pneumatic and electromechanical systems and For further information call our Product Information Centre free on or visit our web site at components. Whether your need is for cylinders, valves, pumps, filters, drives, controls, connectors or seals, Parker has a product to meet your needs from a range of more than 6, for every type of mobile and industrial application epic@parker.com

271 Laboratory Analysis Service Par-Test 269 Fluid condition monitoring

272 Laboratory Analysis Service Par-Test Changes to ISO Standards The impact on filter performance reporting and the contamination code. The recent changes to ISO contamination and filtration standards were brought about to solve accuracy, tracability, and availability issues. It is important to remember that both real world hydraulic system cleanliness levels and actual system filter performance remain unchanged. However, the reporting of cleanliness levels and filter performance has changed due to the new particle counter calibration and multi-pass test procedures. The new calibration method. ISO 7 is the new particle counter calibration method and utilises calibration fluid made from ISO Medium Test Dust (ISO MTD) suspended in MIL-H-566. The calibration fluid is traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) and is designated by NIST as Standard Reference Material (SRM) 286. ISO 7 is replacing ISO 442 which is based on obsolete AC Fine Test Dust (ACFTD) It is important to note that the ISO 7 calibration method is based on a distribution of particles measured by their equivalent area diameter, whereas ISO 442 is based on distribution of particles measured by their longest chord. Also, the NIST work utilised scanning electron microscopy for particles below μm in size, whereas sizing distribution on ACFTD utilised optical microscopy. The charts to the right show the approximate particle size relationship between the calibration methods. Chart - ISO Comparison Former two-digit ISO 446:987 5μm / 5μm 4 / Former three-digit ISO 446:987 2μm / 5μm / 5μm 7 / 4 / New three-digit ISO 446:999 4μm (c) / 6μm (c) / 4μm (c) 8 / 4 / Chart 2 - Particle Size Comparison ACTFD size (per ISO 442:99) μm NIST size (per ISO 7:999) μm (c) Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 4

273 Laboratory Analysis Service The Par-Test service is a complete laboratory analysis performed on a small quantity of fluid supplied by the customer. Provision of a sampling bottle of known cleanliness and a pre-addressed bottle container, both of which are designed to be suitable for mailing, is part of the service. Most contaminant in hydraulic or lube oil systems are invisible Damage causing particles range from 5 to 4 micrometers in size, but the limit of human visibility is only 4 micrometers. Harmful particulate matter is often invisible, even in very high concentration. Also, acids, water and other fluid oxidation by-products cannot be easily detected by human senses. Some other means must be used to monitor fluid conditions. Fluid analysis is the only method to check fluid conditions Fluid analysis services may be as simple as a sample batch comparison. Or, a full laboratory treatment may be used to indicate the sources and quantity of contamination. In either case, important test results are achieved. Parker offers both types of services to fit your specific needs. Par-Test: complete laboratory analysis Par-Test is a complete laboratory analysis, performed on a small quantity of fluid. The test results are very comprehensive, and can include the following critical analysis: Spectrochemical analysis of over 2 wear metals and additives. Particle count reported over five size ranges. The particle count is expressed as an ISO cleanliness code. It is also plotted on a graph for better comparisons. Viscosity at 4 C is reported in centistokes. Water content is expressed as a % of volume. Many hydraulic systems may tolerate up to 3 ppm (.3%) of water contamination. Some bearing or lube oil systems must strictly limit water content. Analysis recommendations summarises Par-Test results and indicates what action should be taken to prevent any potential problems. Fast turnaround test results are mailed back to you within hours after receiving your fluid sample. Par-Test: concise and complete The Par-Test report you receive is neatly organised. You may quickly analyse the test results or compare them to a previous sample. Using the same unit number on your sample information form will allow up to four test results listed on a single Par-Test report form. Par-Test belongs in your regular maintenance program. Comprehensive and accurate fluid analysis will help you prevent major hydraulic or lube oil system problems. Order Par-Test today (see below details) and see how easy and complete fluid analysis can be. Ordering Information Par-Test: laboratory fluid analysis The purchase price for the Par-Test sample kit includes the pre-cleaned and sealed sample bottle, mailing tube with a pre-addressed label, sample information data sheet to be completely filled out by the end user and the complete laboratory analysis. IMPORTANT Parker Filtration has three European laboratory locations able to receive and process fluid samples. One location in the UK, one location in The Netherlands taking care of Central European analysis and a location in Finland to provide Scandinavian analysis. Decide on the Option required and contact the relevant Parker location. Par-Test laboratory analysis service - UK ( filtrationinfo@parker.com) (option 2 only) - Holland ( filtration.netherlands@parker.com) (all options) - Finland ( filtration.finland@parker.com) (all options) Option Option Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Description Sample bottle plus particle/membrane/water/microscopic photo analysis Sample bottle plus particle/water/spectro-chemical analysis Sample bottle plus membrane/water/microscopic photo analysis Sample bottle plus particle/membrane/water/spectro-chemical/microscopic photo analysis Note: Please allow hours of laboratory time plus mailing/shipping time to receive your test results. 27 Fluid condition monitoring

274 Laboratory Analysis Service Par-Test Charts PAR :TEST Fluid Analysis SAMPLE DATA DATE DATE LAB# TAKEN/ FILTER TESTEN SERVICE 926 3JUN89 2JUL JUL89 3JUL AUG89 22AUG89 PARKER NO. CLIENT NO. UNIT NO. OTHER SPECTROCHEMICAL ANALYSIS VALUES EXPRESSED IN PARTS PER MILLION (PPM) BY WEIGHT IRON CHROMIUM LEAD COPPER TIN ALUMINIUM NICKEL SILVER MANGANESE SILICON BORON LOCATION FILTER MANUF PARKER MICRON RATING SODIUM MAGNESIUM CALCIUM RETURN PUMP MODEL NOM BARIUM PHOSPHORUS ZINC MOLYBOENUM LINE TRUCK TITANIUM VANADIUM CADMIUM FLUID MANUF FLUID TYPE PHYSICAL PROPERTY DATA VIS 4ºC (VIS 4 ºF) VIS ºC (VIS 22 ºF) NUMBER COPIES 2 TYPE NUMBER 2 WATER % Vol ANALYSIS RECOMMENDATIONS LAB# ISO RATING 926 2/ / / 2 PARTICLES PER MILLILITER GREATER THAN INDICATED SIZE >5 >5 >25 >5 > 667,488 67,68 5, ,466 2,52 2, ,758 2, LAB# ANALYSIS RECOMMENDATIONS 926 EXTREME LEVELS OF CONTAMINATION INDICATE POSSIBLE WEAR PROBLEMS. HIGHER PRESSURE SYSTEMS(.5 PSI) SHOULD RECEIVE IMMEDIATE FILTRATION ATTENTION. SAMPLE AGAIN WITHIN 3 DAYS LAB# ANALYSIS RECOMMENDATIONS 9262 EXTREME LEVEL OF CONTAMINATION INDICATE POSSIBLE WEAR PROBLEMS. HIGHER PRESSURE SYSTEMS ( >5 PSI) SHOULD RECEIVE IMMEDIATE FILTRATION ATTENTION. SAMPLE AGAIN WITHIN 3 DAYS 9263 CLEANLINESS LEVEL SUITABLE FOR MOST SYSTEMS. SERVO CONTROLS REQUIRE CLEANER FLUID. CONTINUE REGULAR PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE. SAMPLE AGAIN IN 2-3 MONTHS. Since remedial advice is based on test results provided by others, and since corrective action, if any is performed by others, remedial advice is rendered without warranty or liability of any kind. NUMBER OF PARTICLES PER MILLILITRE GREATER THAN INDICATED SIZE PARTICLES IN FLUID SIZE / NUMBER PARTICLE SIZE, micrometers NUMBER OF PARTICLES PER MILLILITRE GREATER THAN INDICATED SIZE Viscosity Conversion Chart cst (centistrokes) SUS (Saybolt Universal Seconds) Comparisons are made at ºF (38ºC). for other Viscosity Conversion Approximations, use the formula: cst = SUS Cleanliness Level Correlation Table ACFTD NAS Disavowed ISO Particles/Millilitre Gravimetric 638 SAE Level 5 Micrometers 5 Micrometers Level, mg/l (964) (963) 26/23 64, 8, 25/23 32, 8, 23/2 8,, 2/8 2, 2,5 2 2/8, 2,5 2/7,,3 2/6, 64 9/6 5, 64 8/5 2, /4, / / / / / / / /8 2.5 /7.3 /6.64. For more information: Contact Parker Filtration s Condition Monitoring Centre: Tel: +44 () Fax: +44 () conmoninfo@parker.com 272 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 4

275 Pressure Transducers and Transmitters ASIC Performer 2, 6,, 25, 4 and 7 bar 273 Transducers and transmitters

276 Pressure Transducers and Transmitters ASIC Performer Applications for the ASIC Performer Fork lift trucks - braking and load systems. Truck mounted cranes - load safety systems. Earth moving machinery - hydraulic gearbox control. Racing car - gearbox, fuel, cooling and suspension systems. Water usage systems - pressurised systems for industrial and hi-rise usage. Forest Machinery - felling and logging. Paper mills - speed control and weighing systems. The Parker Filtration ASIC Performer Pressure Transducers and Transmitters. To overcome the historical problems caused by gauge creep of thick film sensors and the fragility of peizo-electric/ceramic based sensors, the new Performer range uses a high-grade stainless steel element, which is coated with layers of both insulative and alloy materials. These are trimmed to a very close tolerance using state of the art, semiconductor grade, laser and lon beam methods. This extremely accurate front end is then coupled with Application Specific Integrated Circuitry (ASIC) to produce a sensor that is both accurate and repeatable over a wide, fully compensated, temperature range, -4 C to +25 C. The Performer is now available in a variety of thread-form and connector options. This new design offers a high stability, very low drift device, which can operate over a wide thermal range. Powered from an extended working supply range (-3Vdc {PTD} and -35Vdc {PTX}). In addition to the standard 6 pressure ranges available, using the ASIC technology (Application Specific Integrated Circuit) programmable software, any variation can be manufactured. Consult Parker for any additional information. A comprehensive range of Pressure Transducers and Transmitters are available from Parker Filtration. One-piece body and diaphragm machining ensures long-term product stability. All stainless steel construction. 6 transducer pressure ratings with -5Vdc and -6Vdc outputs. 6 transmitter pressure ratings with a 2-wire 4-2mA output. Micro plug and M2 connector options. 274 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 42

277 Specification Pressure ranges: 2, 6,, 25, 4, 7 bar. Maximum over pressure: Rated pressure x2. Maximum burst pressure: Rated pressure x6. Snubber fitted inside thread form. Electrical Vibration: >5g. Installation: Spanner size 22A/F. Max. (recommended) tightening torque = 3Nm. Preferred Thread Form Options G /4 ( /4BSP) with bonded seal. All thread forms and sensor interface are made from 7-4PH stainless steel. Non standard threads - contact Parker CMC Linearity, Hysteresis, Repeatability, Response and Temperature Supply voltage Output - 3Vdc - 5Vdc - 3Vdc - 6Vdc - 35Vdc 4-2mA Transducer current draw = 8mA Linearity: (over any 8 C temp range). <+/-.5%. Hysteresis: (over any 8 C temp range). <+/-.5% full scale. Repeatability: (over any 8 C temp range). <+/-.5% full scale. Functional temp range: -4 C to +25 C. Temperature error: (over any 8 C temp range) <%. Stability: <.%FS after m cycles. Response time: <ms. Wiring Information Micro DIN option 4 M2 option Micro DIN option M2 option Pin number 2 4 Transmitter Supply +ve Return Transducer Signal output Supply +ve Supply ref (v) Pin number Transmitter Supply +ve Return Transducer Supply +ve Signal output Supply ref (v) Installation Details Micro DIN option M2 option Flying lead option 26.5 M2 thread 53. Ø9. Ø A/F 22. A/F 275 Transducers and transmitters

278 Pressure Transducers and Transmitters ASIC Performer Ordering Information Standard products table Product number Description - pressure transducer Model Output Pressure Thread form Connector PTDVB25AC PTDVB4AC PTDVB25AC2 PTDVB4AC2 PTDVB2AC PTDVB2AC2-5 Vdc 25 bar /4 BSP bonded seal micro-din Vdc 4 bar /4 BSP bonded seal micro-din Vdc 25 bar /4 BSP bonded seal M2-5 Vdc 4 bar /4 BSP bonded seal M2-5 Vdc 2 bar /4 BSP bonded seal micro-din Vdc 2 bar /4 BSP bonded seal M2 PTD PTD PTD PTD PTD PTD VB VB VB VB VB VB AC AC AC2 AC2 AC AC2 Product number Description - pressure transmitter Model Output Pressure Thread form Connector PTXB4AC2 PTXB2AC PTXB2AC2 PTXB4AC PTXB25AC PTXB25AC2 4-2 ma 4 bar /4 BSP bonded seal M2 4-2 ma 2 bar /4 BSP bonded seal micro-din ma 2 bar /4 BSP bonded seal M2 4-2 ma 4 bar /4 BSP bonded seal micro-din ma 25 bar /4 BSP bonded seal micro-din ma 25 bar /4 BSP bonded seal M2 PTX PTX PTX PTX PTX PTX B B B B B B AC2 AC AC2 AC AC AC2 Accessories Product number Supercedes Description P833PVC2M P833PVC5M P833PVCM P.833PVC-2M P.833PVC-5M P.833PVC-M 2 meter PVC coated 4 core cable 5 meter PVC coated 4 core cable meter PVC coated 4 core cable Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Product configurator Product number Output options Pressure range (bar) Thread form Connector PTD PTX VB SB B RB PB - 5 Vdc - 6 Vdc 4-2mA (PTX only) ratiometric /4 BSP with bonded seal AC AC2 Micro-din 4365 M2 Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Examples of standard part number product ordering PTXB2AC2 4 2mA output transmitter 2 bar maximum pressure /4 BSP with bonded seal M2 connector (See cable selection for IP68 protection) PTDVB25AC 5 volt output transducer 25 bar maximum pressure /4 BSP with bonded seal DIN4365 connecting plug 276 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 42

279 A range of cost saving solutions Flowmeters & Monitors 277 Flowmeters & monitors

280 Flowmeters & Monitors LoFlow - Oil and Water Flowmeters Features & Benefits Easy to read, permanent printed scales. Large scale definition for precise measurement. Easy panel mounting assembly. Negligible pressure drop characteristics. bar pressure rating. Simple to use. Specification Installation Details Construction: Body Grillon TR55. Back body half ABS 72. Ball retainer ABS 72. Back panel PVC. Float See below. Maximum working pressure: bar. Maximum working temperature: 6 C. Accuracy: ±2% typical. Repeatability: ±%. Connections: /4 and 3 /4 tapered threads. Simple to fit, easy to use The LoFlow meter has been designed for those industries where the need exists for a low cost solution to small measurements of flow with an accurate reading. LoFlow uses the well tried and tested principle of variable area flow measurement utilising the movement of a ball or float inside a calibrated tapered bore. Typical Applications Pharmaceutical industry Filtration systems Hospital equipment For water applications Water treatment Photography and X-ray Equipment Swimming pools Installation Details Ordering Information Outlet port R 3 / Standard products table 4 Product number Supercedes Media Ports (BSPT male) Flow range (l/min) Float material 44 LF8242 LF8243 LF8244 LF843 LF82432 LF82434 LF84 LF.22 LF.2 LF.222 LF.2 LF.9 LF.9 LF.25 Water Water Water Oil Oil Oil Water 3 /4-3 /4 3 /4-3 /4 3 /4-3 /4 /4-3 /4 3 /4-3 /4 3 /4-3 /4 /4-3 / Acetal S/Steel S/Steel S/Steel Acetal S/Steel S/Steel 4 88 Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 4 6 Inlet port R /4 / R 3 /4 4 off push out fixing slots Ø6 X 8 LG 278 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 43

281 Flowmeters & Monitors Easiflow - Meters and Flowswitches Features & Benefits Oil and water calibrated. Works in any plane. Pressures up to bar. Flows from to 5 I/min. Accuracy ±5% FSD. Repeatability ±% FSD. Switches fully adjustable flow rate signalling. Plant and equipment protection. Easiflow Meters Specification Construction: Cone Acetal Viewing glass Borosilicate glass Calibrated spring Stainless steel Seal Body Glass filled nylon Maximum working pressure: bar. Minimum working pressure: bar. Temperature range: +5 C to +8 C - Oil. +5 C to +6 C - Water. Flow rate: to 5 l/min. Viscosity range: to 2 centistokes (oil). Accuracy: ±5% FSD. Repeatability: ±% FSD. Connections: BSP parallel threads. Weight:.4kg. Flowswitch Specifications The Easiflow switch is a flow measuring device incorporating an AC/DC switch suitable for controlling valves or pump motors or for activating alarm signals. General flowmeter specification: See material details opposite. Switch type specifications: Magnetically operated reed switch. Electrical details: Voltage range Maximum current Maximum load 3Vac/dc 2.5Amps W resistive 7W inductive Installation Details 42 A/F HEX 42 A/F HEX Ø4 Ø Ø Ø6 Ordering Information Standard products table Product number EF77322 EF EF EF EF7732 EF7732 EF77322 EF77332 EF77342 EF77322 Supercedes EFW.32 EFW.52 EFW.2 EFW.52 EFL.5 EFL.3 EFL.5 EFL. EFL.5 EFW.52 Media Water Water Water Water Oil Oil Oil Oil Oil Water Flow range (l/min) Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Standard products table Product number EF77322 EF77322 EF7732 EF7732 EF77322 EF77332 EF77342 EF EF EF Supercedes EFW.5S EFW.3S EFL.5S EFL.3S EFL.5S EFL.S EFL.5S EFW.5S EFW.S EFW.5S Media Water Water Oil Oil Oil Oil Oil Water Water Water Flow range (l/min) Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Switch range (l/min) Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section Flowmeters & monitors

282 Flowmeters & Monitors Dataflow - 4 to 2mA and Pulse Output Flow Transmitters Features & Benefits 4 to 2mA output. Pulse output available for totalising/batching. Works in any plane. Accepts reverse flow. Maximum flow 5 l/min. Negligible pressure drop. Pressures up to bar. Low cost. Simple to install. For use with most liquids. Factory calibrated. Accuracy ±2%. DIN 4365 plug connection (included). Specification Installation Details Construction: Borosilicate glasstube. seals. Body Glass filled nylon. Rotor and locater Acetal. Washers and shaft Stainless steel. Rotor tips Stainless steel. Max. working pressure: bar oil/water. Flow indication: Min: 2 I/min. Max: 5 l/min. Accepts reverse flow. Accuracy: ±2% FSD. Temp range: +5 C to +8 C oil. +5 C to +6 C water. Connections: BSP parallel threads. Weight:.7Kg. Calibration 4 to 2mA: 4mA = l/min, 2mA = l/min. Calibration pulse output per litre: K factors. Oil = 5.4 Water = Electrical details 4 to 2mA: Supply = 24Vdc. Pulse output: Supply = 24Vdc. (open collector transistor). Digital Display Specification (DFT 99 only) For indicator options please refer to MS5 section of the catalogue, reference DDU and DDU2 indicators Ø Ordering Information Standard products table Product number Supercedes DFT98 DFT.98 DFT99 DFT A/F HEX Ø6 6 Description Dataflow "Pulse" output transmitter Dataflow 4-2mA transmitter Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Dataflow 4-2mA transmitter can be connected to a Digital Display Unit (DDU or DDU2) 4 to 2mA On-Site Calibration Set your system to zero flow. Connect a multimeter across terminals (+2mA) and (ma) (Dia. 2). Set the zero to read 4mA on your multimeter (Dia. ). Set your system to full flow and set the span to read 2mA on your multimeter. (Dia. ) Note: Minimum span setting = 3 I/min Set full flow to 2mA Diagram Diagram 2 Span Flow setup Slider Zero Set zero flow to 4mA ma +2mA Plug wiring 2 Earth OV power +24v power 28 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 45

283 Flowmeters & Monitors Dataflow Compact - Inline Flow Transmitter Features & Benefits Pulse output signal for flows up to 25 l/min. Lightweight and robust. Operates in any plane. Simple to install. Low cost flow measurement. Negligible pressure drop. Accepts reverse flow. 3 /8 BSP male connection. Water or compatible clear fluids only. Ideal for washing machines, showers and vending machines. Specification Construction: Body Grilamid TR55. Rotor 8% PTFE filled nylon. Shaft Stainless steel. Shaft Retainers Grilamid TR55. Operation: Infra-red. Maximum working pressure: 2 bar. Pressure drop: Max. bar at 5 l/min. Flow range: to 25 I/min. (Accepts reverse flow). Calibration: K Factor 752 pulses per litre, typical. Subject to application. Accuracy: ±2% typical. Installation Details Red wire Green wire Blue wire +5V supply Output signal V supply 2. TYP Repeatability: ±%. Temperature range: +5 C to +7 C. Overall dimensions: 52mm x 29mm x 27mm. Weight: 6 grams. Connections: 3/8 BSP Cable length: 3mm. Power supply: 5 Vdc. Output signal: 5 Vdc - square wave Dataflow Compact The Low Cost Transmitter The Dataflow Compact Transmitter was designed to offer OEM s and end users alike a means of monitoring low flows on liquids with an electronic output signal but at LOW COST. Fluid passes through the one piece sensor body impacting on the twin vaned turbine rotor, causing it to rotate at a speed proportional to the flow rate. Two opposing photo-transistors are mounted either side of the rotor and externally of the clear sensor body, these generate a continuous signal. As the rotor spins each blade obscures the infra red signal. This is then converted into an industry standard pulse output signal compatible with inexpensive display units for flow rate, totalising, batch control and large, central control systems. The lightweight Grilamid body with its virtually unrestricted flow path, offers negligible pressure drop for flows up to 25 I/min and withstanding pressures up to 2 bar. Flow Rate Totalising Batch Control and applications in many industries Dataflow Compact Transmitters are small and very robust having been developed and tested extensively in industry applications where space is a restriction. Dataflow Compact with its Grilamid body and BSP connections can be installed almost anywhere and once installed will give accurate and reliable output signalling. Ordering Information ISO 228 G 3 /8 2. Standard products table Product number Supercedes DFC9 DFC.9 Description Dataflow compact transmitter Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability TYP Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section Flowmeters & monitors

284 Flowmeters & Monitors Flowline - Oil and Water Calibrated Flowmeters (Brass Version) Features & Benefits Works in any plane. Pressure up to 35 bar (5 psi). Flows up to 36 l/min. Accuracy ±5% FSD. Repeatability ±% FSD. Direct reading. Relatively insensitive to viscosity changes. Oil or water calibrated. Optional reed switch upgrade. Specification Construction: Brass body to BS 2874 CZ4. Maximum working pressure: Up to 35 bar. Minimum working pressure: bar. Temperature range: Brass 2 C to +9 C. Calibration: Oil Specific gravity.856 at 2 C. Water Specific gravity. at 2 C. Ordering Information - Oil Standard products table Brass flowmeter for oil Viscosity range: to 2 cst (oil). Accuracy: ±5% FSD. Repeatability: ±% FSD. Min. scale reading: % FSD. Connections: BSP parallel threads. Wetted/non-wetted parts: Consult Parker for information. A B /4, /2 and 3 /4 BSP thread options E D ØC ØF Note: To add an electrically operated reed switch to your flowmeter please order B.2637 Dimensions (mm) Product number Supercedes Ports BSP Flow range (l/min) Maximum pressure (bar) A (A/F Hex) B (A/F Hex) C D E F Weight (kg) FM FM FM FM FM FM FM26222 FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM /4 /4 /2 /2 3 /4 3 /4 /4 /4 /4 / For intallation details for /4 flowmeters see next page Ordering Information - Water Standard products table Brass flowmeter for water Dimensions (mm) Product number FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM Supercedes FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM Ports BSP /2 /2 3 /4 3 /4 /4 /4 /4 /4 /4 /4 Flow range (l/min) Maximum pressure (bar) Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. A (A/F Hex) B (A/F Hex) C D E For intallation details for /4 flowmeters see next page F Weight (kg) Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 47

285 Flowmeters & Monitors Flowline - Oil and Water Calibrated Flowmeters (Stainless Steel) Features & Benefits Specification Construction: Stainless steel to BS 97 36S. Maximum working pressure: Up to 35 bar. Minimum working pressure: bar. Temperature range: 2 C to +5 C. Calibration: Oil Specific gravity.856 at 2 C. Water Specific gravity. at 2 C. Ordering Information - Oil Standard products table Stainless steel flowmeter for oil Viscosity range: to 2 cst (oil). Accuracy: ±5% FSD. Repeatability: ±% FSD. Min. scale reading: % FSD. Connections: BSP parallel threads. For flow measurement of corrosive or chemical media or in harsh locations. Manufactured in stainless steel 36. Works in any plane. Pressure up to 35 bar (5 psi). Flows up to 36 l/min. Accuracy ±5% FSD. Repeatability ±% FSD. Direct reading. Oil or water calibrated. Optional reed switch upgrade. /4 BSP option Ø87 Ø75 65 A/F Wetted parts: Body, thread adaptor Piston, etc: cone locknut: Stainless Steel. Flow cone: BS 97 36S A/F Ø76 Ø.3 Magnet encapsulation: Stainless steel BS97/:99. :36S3. Spring: Stainless steel to BS 256 EN 58J. Seal: Viton. Note: To add an electrically operated reed switch to your flowmeter please order B.2637 Dimensions (mm) Product number Supercedes Ports BSP Flow range (l/min) Maximum pressure (bar) A (A/F Hex) B (A/F Hex) C D E F Weight (kg) FM FM FM FM26322 FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM /2 3 /4 3 /4 /4 /4 /4 /2 /4 /4 / For intallation details for /4 flowmeters see above Ordering Information - Water Standard products table Stainless steel flowmeter for water Dimensions (mm) Product number FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 48 Supercedes FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM Ports BSP /4 /4 /4 /2 /2 3 /4 3 /4 /4 /4 /4 Flow range (l/min) Maximum pressure (bar) Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 283 A (A/F Hex) B (A/F Hex) C D E For intallation details for /4 flowmeters see above F Weight (kg) Flowmeters & monitors

286 Flowmeters & Monitors Flowline - Flowswitches Features & Benefits Boxed two-switch type. Intrinsically safe versions. Maximum/minimum switching models. Maximum working pressure 35 bar. (min bar) Flows from 2. to I/min. Stainless steel suitable for corrosive media. Stainless steel to BS97 36S6. Ordering Information To order the required switching unit, simply add the appropriate prefix before the part numbers shown below. Standard products table Product number Supercedes Description FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS switches, 2-2 l/min ( /2 BSP) Oil 2 switches, 5-46 l/min ( /2 BSP) Oil 2 switches, 5-55 l/min ( /2 BSP) Oil 2 switches, - l/min ( /2 BSP) Oil Product configurator Brass flowswitch for oil or water FS643 FS67A FS67B FS67C Product number 2 switches Intrinsically safe high switch Intrinsically safe low switch Intrinsically safe hi/low switch Flow range and (port size) 2-2 l/min ( /2 BSP) 5-46 l/min ( /2 BSP) 5-55 l/min ( 3 /4 BSP) - l/min ( 3 /4 BSP) 2 22 Fluid type Oil Water Product configurator Stainless steel flowswitch for oil or water FS643 FS67A FS67B FS67C Product number 2 switches Intrinsically safe high switch Intrinsically safe low switch Intrinsically safe hi/low switch Flow range and (port size) 2-2 l/min ( /2 BSP) 5-46 l/min ( /2 BSP) 5-55 l/min ( 3 /4 BSP) - l/min ( 3 /4 BSP) 2 22 Fluid type Oil Water Ordering example Product number Supercedes FS FS Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 284 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 49

287 Flowmeters & Monitors Hydraulic Test Equipment Features & Benefits Speedy diagnosis of hydraulic circuit faults. Flows ranging from 2 to 36 l/min. Measuring flow, pressure and temperature. Fully Portable No power source required. Hydrotrac unit for flows from 2 to I/min available. Designed for oil applications only. Specification Flow range: 2 to 36 I/min. Pressure range: to 35 bar. Temperature range: C to +9 C. Installation Details A A/F HEX Safety An axial flow restrictor valve is fitted which can be adjusted under full load from open to fully closed, and to complete the specification, a safety blow-out disc, set to fail at 455 bar is fitted to the manifold in a position facing away from the operator when reading the gauges normally. Two spare blowout discs are supplied which are easily replaced by removing the hexagonal plug on the gauge manifold. Additional blow out discs can be ordered - 423B (Bag of ) Ordering Information B ØC Troubleshooting Test Units Hydraulic Test Units are designed specifically for the speedy diagnosis of hydraulic circuit faults in mobile, marine and industrial systems using the normal range of mineral oils. Their rugged construction based mainly on mild steel, manganese bronze and acrylic materials makes them ideally suited for arduous use in the field. Each unit is supplied in a convenient carrying case providing full protection and additional storage space for fittings. Because they need no power source such as batteries etc, they are always ready for instant use. 6 models are available to cover flow capacities up to 36 I/min and each incorporates a direct reading, uni-directional flow meter. The meter, which is both self cleaning and reasonably tolerant of contaminated fluids is coupled to a manifold that houses a glycerine-filled pressure gauge calibrated to 35 bar and a dial-type thermometer with a C to C range. Unit can only operate up to 9 C. For further convenience the scale on the flow meter can be rotated to ensure visibility in any situation and the installed attitude of the assembly is not critical, though whenever possible the unit should be mounted with pressure gauge vertical and gauge case relief valve uppermost. The unit is designed for flow to be in the direction of the arrow on the flowmeter scale and must not be installed with the flow reversed. Standard products table Product number Flow range (I/min) Part number 423B Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section Supercedes 42.3.B Weight Kg (with case) A Description Safety blow out discs x Dimensions (mm) B Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. Note 3: 423 Hydrotrac unit features 2 flowmeters (2-2 and - l/min) and 2 pressure gauges. 285 C Flowmeters & monitors

288 Flowmeters & Monitors Flow Products - For Compressed Air Applications Features & Benefits C B A A Flowline Flowswitches and Flowmeters Calibrated for direct reading of compressed air at 7 bar. Works in any plane. Brass or stainless steel models available in 4 sizes. Calibrated at 7 bar and 2 C. Flow ranges from 2 to 6 SCFM. Pressure -4 bar max. Optional reed switch upgrade. B C Loflow Air Flowmeters Flow measurement from. to 72 l/min. Max bar rating. Compressed Air Test Equipment 6 models available /4, 3 /4 and /4 BSP. Air flow range 2 to 6 SCFM. Pressure -4 bar max. Specification D Full technical specifications for the Flowmeter, Flowswitch, LoFlow and test equipment products are provided in the respective pages for these products. A A/F HEX ØC Ordering Information Note: To add an electrically operated reed switch to your flowmeter please order B.2637 Standard products table Standard products table - LoFlow Brass flowmeter for air Product number FM FM FM FM FM FM FM Supercedes FM FM FM FM FM FM FM Ports BSP /4 /2 /2 3 /4 3 /4 /4 /4 SCFM Flow range l/sec Maximum working pressure (bar) Product number LF845 LF82455 LF82452 LF82454 LF845 LF82453 Supercedes LF.37E LF.35E LF.335E LF.372E LF.32E LF.333E Ports (BSPT male) /4-3 /4 3 /4-3 /4 3 /4-3 /4 3 /4-3 /4 /4-3 /4 3 /4-3 /4 Flow range l/min - 5 l/min 2-35 l/min 2-2 l/sec 4-22 l/min l/sec Float material Acetal Acetal Acetal S/Steel S/Steel S/Steel Standard products table Stainless steel flowmeter for air Flow range Product number Supercedes Ports BSP SCFM l/sec Maximum working pressure (bar) FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM /4 /2 /2 3 /4 3 /4 /4 / Product configurator Ordering example Brass flowswitch for air Product number Supercedes Product number Flow range SCFM and (l/sec) Ports (BSP) Fluid type FS FS FS643 FS67A FS67B 2 switches Intrinsically safe high switch Intrinsically safe low switch (2-25) - (5-5) 5-25 (6-6) ( - ) /2 /2 3 /4 3 /4 32 Air Note : Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a standard product selection. Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability. 286 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 5

289 Understanding and Answering the Threat of Contamination Guide to Contamination Control 287 Guide to contamination control

290 Understanding and Answering the Threat of Contamination Guide to Contamination Control The Threat of Contamination Industry requirements with regard to hydraulic and oil lubrication systems emphasise reliability, long lifetime and reduced energy use. Depending on the circumstances, some 7-8% of system failures are due to contamination. Cleanliness monitoring is essential in contamination control, as is selecting the right filter components. The first step, however, is understanding the specific system requirements and local operating conditions. This guide to contamination control describes: - Types of failures - Sources of contamination - Fluid cleanliness level - Condition monitoring equipment - Cleanliness service - Filtration: parameters and facts - Filter selection and filter types Types of Failures Component failure is often an invisible process. In general three types of failure can be distinguished:. Catastrophic Failures This failure occurs suddenly and without warning; it is of a permanent nature. It is often caused by larger sized particles entering a component and obstructing the relative movement between surfaces, resulting in seizure of the component. 2. Transient Failures Generally speaking, this type of failure is short-lived and goes unnoticed, although the consequences rarely do. It is caused by particles that momentarily interfere with the function of a component. The particles lodge in a critical clearance between matching parts, only to be washed away during the next operation cycle. As a result, components become less predictable and thus unsafe. 3. Degradation Failures Gradual deterioration in the performance of a component results in its eventual repair or replacement. This failure is caused by the effect of wear induced by contamination. Additional generated contamination can lead to a catastrophic failure. Failures or reduced system performance have a direct impact on the cost of ownership, the efficiency rate and the perceived quality perception of the end users. 288 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 52

291 Sources of Contamination Finding the balance What does it take to implement system-matched filtration? A review of the sources of contamination is the first step in finding the balance between the performance of the filtration system and the system demands. Built-in Contamination Natural Contamination Ingressed Contamination Generated Contamination Catalytic Effect FAILURE Sources of Contamination Several sources of contamination must be taken into account when it comes to the effective implementation of systemmatched filtration. Without adequate filtration, the protection of the system is jeopardised and component or system failure is imminent. System-matched filtration changes the deterioration into a balanced situation, representing the continuously controlled process that is needed to achieve system reliability. Realising this is only possible when the required fluid cleanliness levels are maintained.. Built-in Contamination Residual contamination from the manufacturing and assembly processes cannot be avoided. Examples are machining debris, weld spatters, casting sand, paint, pipe sealant or fibres from cleaning rags. Flushing system components prior to assembly and decent housekeeping during the various stages of the assembly process are a must to reduce the amount of built-in contamination. Filter media pleating 2. Natural Contamination In general, the cleanliness level of new oil does not always meet the requirements of the system. Despite the efforts to control the fluid cleanliness level during the production processes, transport and distribution may contaminate the oil. Depending on the requirements for system cleanliness, we advise that you filter new oil before usage. 3. Ingressed Contamination Systems are always under attack from contamination. Unfortunately it is not possible to avoid ingressed contamination. Air breathers, cylinder rod seals, wiper seals, component seals or poorly fitted covers are a few examples of system parts that may have an important influence on the amount of ingressed contamination. 4. Generated Contamination Particles generate particles. This phenomenon is known as abrasion. Other processes like cavitation, corrosion, erosion, fatigue and metallic contact between moving parts generates particles and thus influences the contamination that is already present in the system. Even though these processes cannot always be avoided, their impact is strongly influenced by effective filtration. 5. Catalytic Effect During the filter selection process, attention is generally given to the removal of solid, hard-type contamination only. The performance of hydraulic and lubrication fluids is influenced by the catalytic effect. As a result of the catalytic effect, the lifetime of the oil is significantly reduced. 289 Guide to contamination control

292 Understanding and Answering the Threat of Contamination Guide to Contamination Control Lifetime of Oil Selecting the Right Oil Oils are selected based on their unique performance with regard to: a. Energy transfer b. Corrosion protection c. Cooling (transfer of heat) d. Lubrication The lifetime of oils is influenced by the amount of oxygen, oil temperature, water content and presence of catalyser type elements. The allowed water content varies for each type of oil. Due to, for example, seal leakage or condensation, the water content can easily reach concentrations far above the allowed water content value. The combination of water and wear elements like iron or copper causes a catalytic effect and as a result, reduces the lifetime of the oil. The lifetime of oil is also influenced by the amount of generated static electrics. Lifetime Reduction The lifetime reduction of oil is expressed by the degradation factor. The influence of the catalytic effect of the degradation factor is shown below. The Balance between System Requirements and Filtration System Performance Parker s philosophy exceeds the traditional approach of protecting the system by means of filtration. Built-in Contamination Natural Contamination Ingressed Contamination Generated Contamination Catalytic Effect System-matched filtration is not limited to a filter alone. The process of system-matched filtration is based on the correct implementation of suitable filtration products, taking into account the requirements from the hydraulic or lubrication fluids, system components and customer expectations. Contamination Control Source: Diagnetics Inc. Oil degradation can reduce the protection against corrosion and lubrication performance. Regular oil analysis is important to monitor the condition of the hydraulic or lubrication fluid. This analysis is also used to obtain information related to the process of selecting systemmatched filter components. Achieving the required system protection implicates a correct understanding of the system. Today filters are selected based on several parameters like ß-values, pressure drop and dirt holding capacity. Filtration is built-in safety, meant to achieve and maintain the required fluid cleanliness level during a defined period. This implicates a more detailed approach, which can only be realised when several filtration parameters are considered. Before Filtration Tanktopper II return line filter with integrated air breather and patented LEIF element After Filtration 29 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 52

293 Contamination & Cleanliness Level Sizes of Contamination Filters are selected to capture contamination from hydraulic and lubrication fluids. Contamination is an invisible enemy. The human eye cannot see particles smaller than 4 micron. For the correct understanding a comparison is given below. Fluid Cleanliness Level The ISO 446:999 standard is an important code to define the fluid cleanliness level using a solid contamination code. This ISO code is determined by allocating a first scale number to the total number of particles larger than 4μm, allocating a second scale number to all particles larger than 6μm and allocating a third scale number to the total number of particles larger than 4μm. In the recent past, the fluid cleanliness level code was determined using the ISO 446:987 standard. Instead of counting particles sizes 4, 6 and 4μm, the fluid cleanliness level was determined by counting particles larger than 5 and 5μm. The particle size 2μm was added later. As a result of upgrading the ISO standards, new particle sizes have been defined. In general, the fluid cleanliness code will not change as a result of this new standard. Built-up historic data remains directly comparable to new data. micrometers Grain of salt 7 micrometers Diameter of human hair ISO 446:999 cleanliness classes 4 micrometers Limit of visibility to the naked eye 25 micrometers White blood cells 8 micrometers Red blood cells 2 micrometers Bacteria Filtration of hydraulic and lubrication fluids will effectively stop particles varying in size from millimetres to micron. Component Microns Anti-friction bearings.5 Vane pump (vane tip to other ring).5 - Gear pump (gear to side plate).5-5 Servo valves (spool to sleeve) - 4 Hydrostatic bearings - 25 Piston pump (piston to bore) 5-4 Servo valves flapper wall 8-63 Actuators 5-25 Servo valve orifice 3-45 Number of particles per millilitres greater than indicated size Typical hydraulic component clearances are given as an indication only Particle size, micrometers 29 Guide to contamination control

294 Understanding and Answering the Threat of Contamination Guide to Contamination Control Cleanliness Level Examples of cleanliness level are given in the ISO graph. These lines represent: A. Low-pressure systems (code 2/2/7) B. Low-pressure control systems (code 9/8/4) C. Sophisticated pumps/motors control valves (code 8/7/3) D. Highly sophisticated systems and hydrostatic transmissions (code 6/5/) E. Sensitive servo systems (code 5/4/) F. High performance sensitive systems (code 2//8) We recommend verifying the required cleanliness level based on the components used for the system. Manufacturers of system components often provide information related to the required fluid cleanliness level for their products. Condition Monitoring Equipment Over the years, fluid condition monitoring has become increasingly important. By offering system-matched filtration solutions, the stringent customer demands related to extended component lifetime or improved system reliability can be met. Parker has developed a complete range of instruments and components for maintenance programmes and local fluid condition analysis such as the LaserCM below. Solid Contaminant s In addition to ISO 446: 999, other standards are used to express the fluid cleanliness level. A comparison between the codes is given below. ISO 446: 999 ISO 446: 987 NAS 638 CLASS 3//8 /8 2 4/2/9 2/9 3 5/3/ 3/ 4 6/4/9 4/9-6/4/ 4/ 5 7/5/9 5/9-7/5/ 5/ - 7/5/2 5/2 6 8/6/ 6/ - 8/6/ 6/ - 8/6/3 6/3 7 9/7/2 7/2-9/7/4 7/4 8 2/8/2 8/2-2/8/3 8/3-2/8/5 8/5 9 2/9/3 9/3-2/9/6 9/6 22/2/3 2/3-22/2/7 2/7 Note: ISO 446: 987 is based on particle sizes larger than 5 and 5μm ISO 446: 999 is based on particles sizes larger than 4, 6 and 4μm Several Cleanliness Levels 6/4/ 8/7/2 LaserCM Parker s particle counters are well known for their accurate performance in the field or in a production line environment. Lightweight portable particle counters can be used for temporary fluid cleanliness measurements. The MCM2, designed for permanent installation, is meant for continuous fluid monitoring. The compact MS and MS5 moisture sensor together with the H2Oil means a complete solution is available to measure the water content in hydraulic or lubrication fluids. 2/8/4 22/2/6 24/23/8 292 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 52

295 Cleanliness Service Cleanliness Service to Prevent Failures As Parker has no financial interest in the oil industry, the company can operate as an independent laboratory. The development laboratory at Parker Filtration BV in Arnhem - the only laboratory of its kind in Belgium, the Netherlands and Luxembourg - has at its disposal all the facilities for its extensive R & D department. In addition, the services are offered on a commercial basis to third parties. Equipment The laboratory uses state-of-the-art test equipment. The company has invested in the latest Karl Fischer coulometric equipment, that prevents tests from being influenced by, among other things, additives in the oil. The particle-counting equipment is calibrated according to the recent ISO 7 standard. It is now possible to indicate the measured cleanliness according to ISO 446:999. Standard Test The high-quality standard test, carried out in Parker s laboratory, consists of a water analysis and a cleanliness calculation according to ISO 446, the new ISO 446:999 and the NAS 638 standard, as part of which particles from 2 to μm are measured and reported. Membrane research and digital photography of the membrane are also part of the standard test. The results of each test are described in a report that contains clear conclusions. It is also possible to conduct a spectral analysis. Filtration: Parameters and Facts Generally speaking, fibre-type materials like cellulose and glass fibre are applied for hydraulic and lubrication fluid filtration. Filters are selected based on the following parameters: - Required protection of system components - Location of filter(s) in the system - Flow rate and allowed pressure loss - Desired filter element life time - Hydraulic or lubrication fluid type The dirt holding capacity is the amount of solid contamination a filter can hold before the filter material is plugged. This value is measured in accordance to ISO 6889 using ISO MTD test dust. The filter element lifetime strongly depends on the contamination conditions that are present in the system and its environment. Predicting the filter element lifetime in the system is complicated, because of the variety in contamination (e.g. metal, sand and fibres, each with a certain distribution of particle sizes) in relation to the specified dirt holding capacity. Degree of Filtration Parker s filtration philosophy is based on the optimum distribution of several particle sizes by using the complete thickness of glass fibre layers. Pre-layer In Practice How do the laboratory services work? Only three days after receipt of the oil sample, the standard analysis is completed. The results of a spectral analysis are known after seven days. The reports can be sent directly and completely by . A free sample bottle is available upon request. Main layer Each selected filter layer has a unique performance for the removal of solid contamination. System-matched filtration implicates the removal of harmful particles. For some systems an improved removal efficiency for smaller sized particles is more important compared to other systems using components. The combination of pre- and main layers results in an achievable fluid cleanliness level. The complete package of filter and support layers is indicated as pleat pack. 293 Guide to contamination control

296 Understanding and Answering the Threat of Contamination Guide to Contamination Control Degree of Filtration The ß-value is used to express the removal efficiency for a defined particle size. The overall removal efficiency of the element forms the core of fluid cleanliness levels N particles upstream > ßx μm N particles downstream > ßx μm The correct degree of filtration is chosen based on the required fluid cleanliness level, not based on one ß-value. ßx(c) = N particles upstream > x μm / N particles downstream > x μm The ISO 4572 standard formerly required only the ßx>75 value. That standard has now been upgraded and replaced by ISO 6889, reporting the ß-value of 2,, 75,, 2 and for each filter medium or pleat pack. The corresponding efficiencies are given below. Beta 2 75 ß-value Efficiency 5,% 9,% 98,67% 99,% 99,5% 99,99% Taking into account a ß75(c)> element, the removal efficiency is 98.67% of particles larger than micron. Too often filter elements are compared by looking at one ß-value only. The focus on high ß-values is misleading and does not always provide the required information. Filter Filter Comparison ß-value element I element II Beta-value ß-75(c)> ß-2(c)> Number of particles at upstream of filter > micron 5,, 5,, Removal efficiency 98,67% 99,5% Number of particles at downstream of filter > micron 66,5 25, Statements that a ß2 filter improves the fluid cleanliness level by a factor 2.6 (66,5/25,) are misleading. Fluid cleanliness codes are based on several particle sizes. More information is needed to determine the overall removal performance of filter media. A comparison between two -micron filter medias Micron Q3- Q3-2 Q3-5 Q3- Q3-2 An indication of recommended fluid cleanliness levels is given in this table. It is common use in the industry that manufacturers of components prescribe required fluid cleanliness level for the reliable functioning of their products. Components ISO Servo control valves 6/4/ Proportional valves 7/5/2 Valve & piston pumps/motors 8/6/3 Directional & pressure control valves 8/6/3 Gear pumps/motors 9/7/4 Flow control valves 2/8/5 Cylinders 2/8/5 The ISO codes are indicative values only. Filter element (blue) I: ß(c)>75, Filter element (red) II: ß(c)>2 Filter element II has a lower removal efficiency for smaller sized particles. Smaller sized particles can easily flow in narrow tolerances areas. Smaller sized particles will accelerate the amount of generated contamination, effecting the functionality of other system components and accelerating oil degradation. Filter media composition 294 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK. Section 52

297 Flow Rate & Pressure Lost Flow Rate and Allowable Pressure Lost Each filter element is designed to handle a nominal flow rate. The allowed flow rate depends on fluid viscosity, degree of filtration, and the amount of pressure that is lost. Indirectly, the required element lifetime is an important parameter. A larger sized element with a more effective filter element area has a positive influence on the element lifetime. Filter Types and Locations Media Degree of filtration Upper range Lower range Q3 3 6/4/ 3//8 Q3 6 8/6/3 7/5/9 Q3 2/8/5 9/7/2 Q3 2 22/2/7 2/9/3 The given cleanliness levels are indicative values only, based on average values Filter elements are chosen based on their initial clean element pressure drop. It is preferred to apply a ratio of at least three between element bypass settings and element initial pressure drops. Life time diagram Depending on the filter type and corresponding location, a general pressure lost recommendation can be given Suction Line:.3-.5 bar Pressure Line: bar Return Line:.3-.5 bar Suction Return Filter: bar Comparing filter elements with different filter media based on the initial clean element pressure drop does not give a reliable indication of the element dirt holding capacity. In this example the filter media A has a higher initial pressure drop. However, during its lifetime the pressure lost is more constant compared to media B. This results in a longer element lifetime. The difference in performance is caused by a more effective distribution of captured particles in media A. 295 Guide to contamination control

298 Important Information! WARNING-USER RESPONSIBILITY FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE PRODUCTS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE. This document and other information from Parker-Hannifin Corporation, its subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product or system options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. The user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making the final selection of the system and components and assuring that all performance, endurance, maintenance, safety and warning requirements of the applications are met. The user must analyze all aspects of the application, follow applicable industry standards, and follow the information concerning the product in the current product catalogue and in any other materials provided from Parker or its subsidiaries or authorized distributors. To the extent that Parker or its subsidiaries or authorized distributors provide component or system options based upon data or specifications provided by the user, the user is responsible for determining that such data and specifications are suitable and sufficient for all applications and reasonably foreseeable uses of the components or systems. The operation of the products described here in is subject to the operating and safety procedures details of which are available upon request. Sales conditions The items described in this document are available for sale by Parker Hannifin Corporation, its subsidiaries or its authorized distributors. Any sale contract entered into by Parker will be governed by the provisions stated in Parker s standard terms and conditions of sale (copy available upon request) 296 Parker Hannifin Filter Division Europe FDHB2UK.

299 Throughout the world, Parker is serving more than 4, customers to improve productivity and reliability in thousands of industries. Parker motion and control systems are in operation on satellites orbiting the Earth, in machine tools and mobile equipment, on oil rigs and refineries, in hospitals and laboratories, in fact, wherever there s a need for motion and control, you ll find Parker components and system solutions hard at work. For more information, visit Parker s web site at or call freefone Aerospace Key Markets Commercial transports Military aircraft Regional transports Aircraft engines Business and general aviation Key Products Flight control systems and components Hydraulic systems and components Fuel systems and components Pneumatic systems and components Inert oxygen generating systems Fluid metering, delivery and atomization devices Wheels and brakes Couplings, fittings, hoses and tubes Automation Key Markets Factory automation Transportation and automotive Life sciences and medical Machine tools Semiconductor and electronics Key Products Pneumatic motion and control Air preparation Vacuum controls and sensors Electromechanical stepper and servo motors, drives, and controls Human machine interface Electric actuators, gantry robots, slides and linear motors Structural extrusion Climate & Industrial Controls Key Markets Refrigeration and air conditioning Transportation/mobile Process Industrial machinery Medical/life sciences Fuel cells Precision cooling Key Products Pressure regulators Check, ball and service valves Value-added systems Thermostatic and expansion valves Electronic controllers Contaminant controls Heating/air conditioning hose Gerotors Filtration Key Markets Industrial machinery Process Mobile Marine Oil & gas Power generation and energy Transportation Food and beverage Key Products Hydraulic, lubrication and coolant filters Process, chemical, water and microfiltration filters Compressed air and gas purification filters Condition monitoring Analytical gas generators Nitrogen, hydrogen and zero air generators Engine air, fuel, oil filtration and systems Fluid Connectors Key Markets Construction machinery Agriculture Transportation Mobile Industrial machinery Oil & gas Key Products Rubber and thermoplastic hose Industrial hose Tube fittings and adaptors Tubing and plastic fittings Brass fittings and valves Hose couplings Quick disconnects Hydraulics Key Markets Construction machinery Agriculture Industrial machinery Oil & gas Truck hydraulics Power generation and energy Key Products Hydraulic cylinders and accumulators Hydraulic valves and controls Hydraulic motors and pumps Power take-offs Hydraulic systems Instrumentation Key Markets Power generation Oil & gas Petrochemical Microelectronics Biopharmaceutical Key Products Medium/high pressure fittings and valves Instrumentation fittings, valves, manifolds and regulators High purity fittings, valves and regulators Fluoropolymer fittings, valves, pumps and regulators Analytical systems Seal Key Markets Transportation Energy, oil & gas Semiconductor Aerospace Fluid power Life sciences Telecommunications Key Products Elastomeric O-rings Homogeneous and inserted elastomeric shapes and diaphragms Metal and plastic retained composite seals Polymeric and plastic dynamic seals Rubber and plastic boots/bellows Extruded and precision-cut/fabricated elastomeric seals Thermoplastic engineered seals